| all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| manuals | |||||||||
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 |
|
Command Center Compliance | Users Manual | 134.32 KiB | May 02 2008 | |||
| 1 |
|
Gseries Command Center | Users Manual | 252.02 KiB | May 02 2008 | |||
| 1 |
|
Gseries Installation Part 1 | Users Manual | 2.53 MiB | May 02 2008 | |||
| 1 |
|
Gseries Installation Part 2 | Users Manual | 1.99 MiB | May 02 2008 | |||
| 1 |
|
Gseries Reference Part 1 | Users Manual | 1.98 MiB | May 02 2008 | |||
| 1 |
|
Gseries Reference Part 2 | Users Manual | 1.38 MiB | May 02 2008 | |||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | May 02 2008 | ||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | May 02 2008 | ||||||
| 1 | External Photos | May 02 2008 | ||||||
| 1 | Internal Photos | May 02 2008 | ||||||
| 1 | ID Label/Location Info | May 02 2008 | ||||||
| 1 | Cover Letter(s) | May 02 2008 | ||||||
| 1 | ID Label/Location Info | May 02 2008 | ||||||
| 1 | Test Setup Photos | May 02 2008 | ||||||
| 1 | Test Report | May 02 2008 |
| 1 | Command Center Compliance | Users Manual | 134.32 KiB | May 02 2008 |
Raymarine Limited Anchorage Park Portsmouth Hampshire PO3 5TD England 023 9269 3611 ext 1307 023 9269 4642 (Fax) www.raymarine.com BABT (FCC TCB) Balfour House Churchfield Road Walton- on- Thames Surrey KT12 2TD 15th January, 2008 Gentlemen, Raymarine "G Series" Command Center with Wireless Upgrade Kit (4069B-CCTR) In connection with the application for certification of the above product, it has been observed that Exhibit 8 (User Manual) does not contain the necessary statement:
FCC and Industry Canada Information The G-Series control keyboard and wireless base station comply with US CFR47 part 15 Rules and with IC Standard RSS210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) these devices may not cause harmful interference and (2) these devices must accept interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications to these devices not expressly approved in writing by Raymarine could violate compliance with FCC or IC rules, and void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Raymarine Ltd. hereby declares that:
The initial version of the manual has been printed and so an interim sheet bearing the above statement is being printed to accompany the manual. A second version of the manual, incorporating the required statement, will be produced in February 2008, from which time the issue of first edition manuals and interim sheets will cease. Sincerely, Peter Bowen Compliance Manager RAYMARINE LTD. Raymarine UK Limited. Registered in England. Company No. 04578449 Registered Office: Quay point, Portsmouth PO6 3TD
| 1 | Gseries Command Center | Users Manual | 252.02 KiB | May 02 2008 |
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive The Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive requires the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. Whilst the WEEE Directive does not apply to some of Raymarines products, we support its policy and ask you to be aware of how to dispose of this product. The crossed out wheelie bin symbol, illustrated above, and found on our products signifies that this product should not be disposed of in general waste or landfill. Please contact your local dealer, national distributor or Raymarine Technical Services for information on product disposal. Disclaimer The technical and graphical information contained in this document, to the best of our knowledge, was correct as it went to press. However, our policy of continuous improve-
ment and updating may change product specifications without prior notice. As a result, unavoidable differences between the product and handbook may occur from time to time. Raymarine cannot accept responsibility for any inaccuracies or omissions it may contain. For the latest product information visit our website - www.raymarine.com EMC installation guidelines Raymarine equipment and accessories conform to the appropriate Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) regulations. This minimizes electromagnetic interference between equipment, which could otherwise affect the performance of your system. Correct installation is required to ensure that EMC performance is not compromised. For optimum EMC performance, we recommend that:
Raymarine equipment and the cables connected to it are:
i. At least 3 ft. (1 m) from any equipment transmitting or cables carrying radio signals e.g. VHF radios, cables and antennas. In the case of SSB radios, the distance should be increased to 7 ft. (2 m). ii. More than 7 ft. (2 m) from the path of a radar beam. A radar beam can normally be assumed to spread 20 degrees above and below the radiating element. Raymarine specified cables are used. Cables are not cut or extended. Always allow the maximum separation possible between different items of electrical equipment. This will provide the best conditions for EMC performance for the installation. G-Series Command Center Keyboard Installation instructions Product installation This equipment must be installed and operated in accordance with the Raymarine instructions provided. Failure to do so could result in poor product performance, personal injury, and/or damage to your boat. Service and Maintenance This product contains no user serviceable components. Please refer all maintenance and repair to authorized Raymarine dealers. Unauthorized repair may affect your warranty. Ultra violet light To provide protection against the damaging effects of ultra violet (UV) light, the sun cover should be placed on the unit when not in use. Cleaning DO NOT use acid, ammonia based or abrasive products. DO NOT use commercial high pressure washing
(jet wash) equipment. Document number: 87084-1 Date: July 2007 Technical specification Approvals:
CE - conforms to FCC- conforms to Additional conformance Size Weight Mounting Supply voltage Power consumption Environmental conditions:
Storage conditions when packed:
LEN EN60945, EN300-440-2 CFR47 PART 15 IC-RSS-210 297 x 98 x 46 0.65 kg Dash mount Handheld (with optional wireless upgrade) 9 V to 16 V 1.5 W operating temperature: -15C to 55C (5F to 131F) non-operating temperature: -25C to 70C (-13F to 158F) relative humidity limit: 95%
water protection:waterproof to CFR-46 standard Temperature : -25C to 55C (-13F to 158F) relatiive humidity: 75%
3 Raymarine plc Anchorage Park, Portsmouth, Hampshire PO3 5TD United Kingdom Tel: +44 (0) 23 9269 3611 Fax: +44 (0) 23 9269 4642 Raymarine Inc. 21 Manchester Street, Merrimack, New Hampshire 03054-4801 USA Tel: +1 603.881.5200 Fax: +1 603.864.4576 www.raymarine.com Pack items Handbook/
Documentation Suncover Command center keyboard Panel seal Rear clamp assembly Stud (x4) Finger nut (x4) 1
5 6 0 0 1 D SeaTalkng T connector SeaTalkng backbone cable SeaTalkng spur cable Description G-Series command center keyboard Sun cover 1 m (3.3 ft) SeaTalkng/NMEA2000 cable 400 mm (15.75 in) SeaTalkng backbone cable SeaTalkng T-piece connector Rear cover / mounting bracket Screw pack Installation sheet Part No. E02044 R08307 A06039 A06033 A06028 R08308 R08309 87084 80017 Warranty booklet G-Series system The Keyboard is installed as a part of the Raymarine G-Series marine electronics system. Refer to the additional documentation supplied with your G-series GPM400 processor for additional information necessary to install the keyboard within your system. All documents can be downloaded from www.raymarine.com/handbooks. G-Series System Monitor SeaTalkng backbone GPM 400 r u p s l g n k a T a e S Keyboard ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL r u p s l g n k a T a e S 1
8 6 0 0 1 D Maximum quantity of Keyboards The G-Series system will support up to 8 keyboards. G-Series system documentation Title G-Series system installation and commissioning Instructions Part number 87070 G- Series system operating guide G-Series system user reference guide 86126 81276 Keyboard connections The G-Series Keyboard communicates using the SeaTalkng system. It may be connected directly to the backbone (wired) or used remotely with a separate basestation and wireless upgrade kit. Note: You should have at least one permanently wired keyboard. In the event that any wireless keyboards are lost, the wired keyboard can be used to control the system. Schematic diagram When connecting a keyboard to the system, record its details on your system/schematic diagram. You will need this information dur-
ing commissioning. (Refer to the separate G-Series system installation instructions for sample diagrams.) Keyboard connection details SeaTalkng instrument, e.g. ST70 SeaTalkng backbone OR SeaTalkng spur SeaTalkng spur Keyboard cables Cable Keyboard to SeaTalkng 400 mm (15.75 in) SeaTalkng spur cable 1 m (3.3 ft) SeaTalkng spur cable*
3 m (9.8 ft) SeaTalkng spur cable 5 m (16.4 ft) SeaTalkng spur cable Part Number Notes A06038 A06039*
Suppled with the keyboard A06040 A06041 Keyboard 1
0 7 0 0 1 D Mounting and environment The keyboard is suitable for mounting both above and below decks. It is waterproof to CFR-46 standard. Use the cutting template provided within this booklet. Connect cable into keyboard before clamping in place. The following conditions apply:
Do NOT install near sources of heat. (e.g. engine). Install the unit well away from potential sources of ignition. Cables Minimum bend radius of 100 mm (3.94 in). Mounting arrangement G-Series keyboard Dimensions
) n i 5 8
. 3
m m 8 9
) n i
. 8 3 1
m m 5 3
) n i
. 1 8 1
297 mm (11.69 in) m m 6 4 D10226-1 l e c n a r a e c m u m n m i i
) n i
. 5 3 2
m m 8 9 5
. Sun cover Keyboard Panel seal
(adhesive side up) SeaTalk NG cable Rear clamp assembly 1
1 0 1 0 1 D Stud (x4) Finger nut (x4)
Drill hole, 19/64 in (7.5 mm) diameter in 2 positions Command Centre Keyboard Template 11.1 in (281.6 mm)
) m m 6
. 2 8
n i 5 2
. 3 Drill hole, 15/16 in (23.6 mm) diameter in 2 positions Remove material from shaded area only 1
3 4 1 0 1 D Instrument edge Sun cover edge
| 1 | Gseries Installation Part 1 | Users Manual | 2.53 MiB | May 02 2008 |
G-Series Systems Installation and Commissioning Instructions G-Series System Installation & Commissioning Instructions Document Number:87070_1 Date: June 2007 Trademarks and registered trademarks Autohelm, HSB, Raymarine, RayTech, Sail Pilot, SeaTalk and Sportpilot are registered trademarks of Raymarine Limited. Apelco is a regis-
tered trademark of Raymarine Holdings Limited (Registered in all major marketing territories). AST, Autoadapt, Auto GST, Autoseastate, Autotrim, Bidata, Marine Intelligence, Maxiview, On Board, Raychart, Raynav, Raypilot, Raystar, ST40, ST60, Seaclutter, Smart Route, Tridata and Waypoint Navigation are trademarks of Raymarine Limited. Maptech is a registered trademark of Maptech. All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks (if applicable) of their respective companies Raymarine plc 2007 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 4 Contents Chapter 1: Introduction ..................................... 11 1.1 Handbook information .............................................. 12 1.2 Plan your installation ................................................ 12 1.3 Install your system ................................................... 12 1.4 Commissioning ........................................................ 13 Chapter 2: Typical systems .............................. 15 Chapter 3: Packs and contents ......................... 23 3.1 GPM400 processor .................................................. 24 3.2 GVM400 video module ............................................ 25 3.3 G-Series Keyboard .................................................. 26 3.4 Keyboard wireless upgrade kit ................................. 27 3.5 SeaTalkng wireless basestation ............................... 28 3.6 Marine monitors ....................................................... 28 3.7 Alarm buzzer ............................................................ 29 Chapter 4: Cables and connections ................. 31 4.1 General instructions ................................................. 32 4.3 GPM400 processor .................................................. 37 4.4 Monitor connections ................................................. 38 4.5 Keyboard connections ............................................. 40 4.6 Video and Entertainment ......................................... 43 4.7 SeaTalkhs network ................................................... 47 4.8 GPS Connection ...................................................... 49 4.9 SeaTalk & Alarm connection .................................... 50 4.10 NMEA 0183 connections ....................................... 51 4.11 SeaTalkng connections .......................................... 54 4.12 NMEA 2000 connections ....................................... 55 Chapter 5: Installation and mounting ................ 57 5.1 General instructions .................................................58 5.2 GPM400 Processor module .....................................59 5.3 G-Series Keyboard ...................................................60 5.4 G-Series Monitors ....................................................65 5.5 GVM400 Video Module ............................................66 5.6 Alarm buzzer ............................................................67 Chapter 6: Initial test ......................................... 69 6.1 Power up test ...........................................................70 Chapter 7: Initial Setup ..................................... 73 7.1 Power up the system ................................................74 7.2 First time configuration .............................................74 7.3 Select Master GPM ..................................................75 7.4 Configure Nav Stations ............................................77 7.5 Assign Keyboards ....................................................78 Chapter 8: Commissioning ................................ 81 8.1 Language setting ......................................................82 8.2 Compass heading setup ...........................................82 8.3 Radar setup ..............................................................83 8.4 GPS checks ..............................................................85 8.5 Fishfinder checks ....................................................86 8.6 Set up video .............................................................87 8.7 NMEA 0183 ..............................................................88 8.8 Data checks ..............................................................89 Chapter 9: Troubleshooting .............................. 91 9.1 Troubleshooting ........................................................92 Appendix ATechnical specification.......................... 103 Appendix B - Nav Station schematic....................... 109 Appendix C - Spares and accessories .................... 117 Index ....................................................................... 121 5 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 6 Warnings and cautions Product installation This equipment must be installed and operated in accordance with the Raymarine instructions provided. Failure to do so could result in poor product performance, personal injury, and/or damage to your boat. Potential ignition sources The equipment in these instructions is NOT approved for use in hazardous/flammable atmo-
spheres such as an engine room. Switch off power supply Make sure you have set the boats power supply to OFF before you start installing this product. Unless otherwise stated connect and disconnect equipment only with the power supply switched OFF. High voltage Equipment contains high voltages. Unless otherwise instructed within these instructions do not remove the covers or attempt to access the internal components. Grounding requirements This display is not intended for use on positive ground boats. The power input cable earth screen connections must be connected directly to the boats ground. Radar The radar scanner transmits electromagnetic energy. Ensure all personnel are clear of the scanner before switching to Tx (transmit mode) Navigation aid Raymarine equipment is intended for use only as an aid to navigation. You must still ensure that a properly qualified person is acting as navigator at all times and that all applicable maritime regu-
lations are adhered to. You must also ensure that all proper judgements and actions are taken to ensure a safe passage. Always maintain a perma-
nent watch Service and Maintenance This product contains no user serviceable components. Please refer all maintenance and repair to authorized Raymarine dealers. Unauthorized repair may affect your warranty. Sun covers To provide protection against the damaging effects of ultra violet (UV) light, use the sun covers when equipment is not in use. Cleaning DO NOT use acid, ammonia based or abrasive products. DO NOT use commercial high pressure washing
(jet wash) equipment. EMC installation guidelines Raymarine equipment and accessories conform to the appropriate Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) regulations. This minimizes electromagnetic interference between equipment, which could oth-
erwise affect the performance of your system. Correct installation is required to ensure that EMC performance is not compromised. For optimum EMC performance, we recommend that:
Raymarine equipment and the cables connected to it are:
7 i. At least 3 ft. (1 m) from any equipment transmitting or cables carrying radio signals e.g. VHF radios, cables and antennas. In the case of SSB radios, the distance should be increased to 7 ft. (2 m). ii. More than 7 ft. (2 m) from the path of a radar beam. A radar beam can normally be assumed to spread 20 degrees above and below the radiating element. The product is supplied from a separate battery from that used for engine start. This is important to prevent erratic behavior and data loss which can occur if the engine start does not have a separate battery. Raymarine specified cables are used. Cables are not cut or extended unless doing so is detailed in the installation manual. Remember Where constraints on the installation prevent any of the above recommendations:
Always allow the maximum separation possible between differ-
ent items of electrical equipment. This will provide the best conditions for EMC performance for the installation. Suppression ferrites Raymarine cables may be fitted with suppression ferrites. These are important for correct EMC performance. Any ferrite removed to facilitate installation must be replaced in the original position imme-
diately installation is complete. Use only ferrites of the correct type, supplied by Raymarine au-
thorized dealers. Waste Electrical and Electronic Equip-
ment Directive The Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive requires the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. Whilst the WEEE Directive does not apply to some of Raymarines products, we support its pol-
icy and ask you to be aware of how to dispose of this product. The crossed out wheeled bin symbol, illustrated above, and found on our products signifies that this product should not be disposed of in general waste or landfill. Please contact your local dealer, national distributor or Raymarine Technical Services for information on product disposal. Water ingress As it exceeds the water proof rating capacity outlined by standards CFR46 / IPX7, subjecting any Raymarine equipment to commercial high pressure washing equipment may cause subsequent water intrusion and failure of the equipment. Raymarine will not warranty equipment subjected to high pressure washing Warranty To register your new Raymarine product, please take a few minutes to fill out the warranty card included in the box or go to:
Connections to other equipment www.raymarine.com If Raymarine equipment is to be connected to other equipment using a cable not supplied by Raymarine, a Raymarine suppres-
sion ferrite MUST always be attached to the cable near the Raymarine unit. It is important that you complete the owner information and return the card to receive full warranty benefits, including notification of software updates if they are required. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 8 Disclaimer The technical and graphical information contained in this hand-
book, to the best of our knowledge, was correct as it went to press. However, our policy of continuous improvement and updating may change product specifications without prior notice. As a result, unavoidable differences between the product and handbook may occur from time to time. Raymarine cannot accept responsibility for any inaccuracies or omissions it may contain. For the latest product information visit our website - www.raymarine.com 9 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 10 1 Chapter 1: Introduction This guide provides information to help you plan, install and commission your G-Series system. Chapter contents 1.1 Handbook information on page 12. 1.2 Plan your installation on page 12. 1.3 Install your system on page 12. 1.4 Commissioning on page 13. See also You may require additional information when planning or installing your system. Spares and accessories. Lists of spares, accessories and cables can be found in Appendix C - Spares and accessories. Raymarine handbooks and manuals. All additional documents referred to in this manual can be downloaded from the Raymarine website. wwww.raymarine.com/handbooks. 1.1 Handbook information Nav Station details Appendix B - Nav Station schematic This document is part of a series of books associated with the G-
Series system We strongly recommend that you produce a complete schematic diagram for your G-Series installation. See Appendix B - Nav Station schematic. All documents can be downloaded from:
www.raymarine.com/handbooks. G-Series handbooks Title Part number Installation and commissioning instructions 87070 Operating guide User reference guide Additional handbooks 86126 81276 You may also refer to separate instructions provided with the asso-
ciated ancillary equipment. 1.2 Plan your installation Prior to installing your G-Series system you will need to plan care-
fully. Use the information in this guide to assist you. Tick Planning for Installation instructions Overall system Chapter 2: Typical systems Chapter 3: Packs and contents Equipment location Chapter 5: Installation and mounting Power, supply and distribution Chapter 4: Cables and connections Connections and cables Chapter 4: Cables and connections G-Series Installation & Commissioning 12 1.3 Install your system Once you have completed the planning stage, proceed with the installation:
Tick Installation task Installation instructions Ensure you have all required equipment, accessories and cables. Chapter 3: Packs and contents Chapter 4: Cables and connections Appendix C - Spares and accessories Site all equipment. Chapter 5: Installation and mounting Route all cables. Chapter 4: Cables and connections Drill cable and mounting holes. Chapter 5: Installation and mounting Make all connections into equipment. Chapter 4: Cables and connections Power on test the system. Chapter 6: Initial test Secure all equipment in place. Chapter 5: Installation and mounting 1.4 Commissioning Once you have completed the installation, proceed with the com-
missioning of the system:
Tick Commissioning task Installation instructions Assign master GPM Chapter 7: Initial Setup Set up Nav Stations Chapter 7: Initial Setup Assign keyboards Chapter 7: Initial Setup Commission ancillary equipment Chapter 8: Commissioning Complete warranty cards for equipment installed Refer to separate warranty booklets supplied with equipment. 13 Chapter 1: Introduction G-Series Installation & Commissioning 14 Chapter 2: Typical systems This section provides an overview of typical G-Series systems and ancillary equipment. Chapter contents System overview on page 16 Single processor system on page 17 Dual Nav station (single processor) on page 18 Network system, Single Nav station (Dual processor) on page 19 Dual Nav station (Dual processor 2) on page 20 Entertainment system on page 21 System limits on page 22 See also Cables and connections on page 31 2 System overview Navstation 1 (e.g. Flybridge) SeaTalkng Monitor DVI or VGA Keyboard ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Navstation 2 (e.g. Bridge) A G V r o I V D Monitor Keyboard ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Video/audio sources GPM 400 l g n k a T a e S SeaTalkng instruments/pilot CANCEL ENTER MENU CANCEL ENTER MENU and/or SeaTalk instruments/pilot CANCEL ENTER MENU CANCEL ENTER MENU SeaTalkhs switch Alarm sounder GPS OR SeaTalkhs SeaTalkhs SeaTalkhs network devices Video module Digital radar SeaTalk NMEA 0183 or SeaTalk DSM digital sounder
(or other compatible digital server) Note: Where 2 displays are connected to a single processor, both will display the same information. D9985-1 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 16 Single processor system Navstation Monitor SeaTalkng backbone Keyboard ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL SeaTalkng Pilot Instrument CANCEL ENTER MENU CANCEL ENTER MENU SeaTalkhs SeaTalkhs SeaTalk GPS GPM 400 (Central processor) Digital radar Alarm sounder SeaTalkhs switch DSM digital sounder Audio OUT
(to ship's audio system) DVI or VGA SeaTalkng SeaTalkhs SeaTalk/Alarm output SeaTalkhs SeaTalkhs SeaTalkhs C/lines for plugs/sockets Transducer D9987-1 17 Chapter 2: Typical systems Dual Nav station (single processor) Navstation, (e.g. Flyridge) Monitor SeaTalkng backbone Keyboard ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL SeaTalkng Pilot Instrument Wireless base station CANCEL ENTER MENU CANCEL ENTER MENU SeaTalkng Monitor Navstation, (e.g. Bridge) Charger point ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Wireless keyboard GPS GPM 400 DVI or VGA l g n k a T a e S o T Digital radar SeaTalkhs switch DSM digital sounder A G V r o I V D A G V r o I V D l g n k a T a e S l g n k a T a e S C/lines for plugs/sockets l s h k a T a e S SeaTalkhs Transducer D9988-1 SeaTalk or NMEA 0183 SeaTalkhs SeaTalkhs G-Series Installation & Commissioning 18 Network system, Single Nav station (Dual processor) SeaTalkng backbone Monitor Monitor Instrument Instrument l g n k a T a e S l g n k a T a e S Keyboard ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL l s h k a T a e S l s h k a T a e S GPM400 SeaTalkhs switch GPM400 Data Master l g n k a T a e S CANCEL ENTER CANCEL ENTER MENU MENU Digital radar DSM digital sounder Video module DVI or VGA DVI or VGA SeaTalkhs SeaTalkng AV Camera Sat TV SeaTalkhs SeaTalkhs SeaTalkhs S-video D9989-1 Note: Each display at a Nav station must be connected to a different GPM400. DIsplays sharing a GPM will both display identical information. 19 Chapter 2: Typical systems Dual Nav station (Dual processor 2) Navstation 1 (e.g. Bridge) Monitor Monitor Monitor Monitor Navstation 2 (e.g. Flybridge) Keyboard charge point ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Keyboard charge point l g n k a T a e S o T A G V r o I V D l s h k a T a e S l s h k a T a e S DVI or VGA GPM400 SeaTalkhs switch GPM400 (data master) l s h k a T a e S l s h k a T a e S A G V r o I V D l g n k a T a e S SeaTalkhs SeaTalkhs DVI or VGA Other SeaTalkhs equipment
(radar,DSM) SeaTalkhs SeaTalkhs SeaTalkhs DVI or VGA Wireless Base station SeaTalkng backbone SeaTalkng devices D9990-1 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 20 Entertainment system Plasma Television Keyboard charge point SeaTalkng backbone SeaTalkhs switch Video module Basestation l g n k a T a e S o T ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Wireless Keyboard GPM 400 (Central processor) DVI or VGA SeaTalkng SeaTalkhs Audio out l g n k a T a e S AV AV Camera Camera Sat TV SeaTalkhs S-video D9991-1 Note: The system may include up to 2 Video modules to provide additional video capacity. 21 Chapter 2: Typical systems System limits The following quantities of G-Series components may be connected within a single system:
G-Series component Max. number on system GPM400 processor module Monitors Keyboards GVM400 video module DSM digital sounder Digital radar scanner See also 4
(of which 1 must be set as master GPM) 8
(2 per GPM400 processor) 8 2 1 2 For limitations associated with ancilliary components and systems, refer to the separate manufacturers documentation. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 22 Chapter 3: Packs and contents This section contains details of pack contents for the G-Series system components. Chapter contents 3.1 GPM400 processor on page 24 3.2 GVM400 video module on page 25 3.3 G-Series Keyboard on page 26 3.4 Keyboard wireless upgrade kit on page 27 3.5 SeaTalkng wireless basestation on page 28 3.6 Marine monitors on page 28 3.7 Alarm buzzer on page 29 See also For peripheral components (e.g. GPS antenna) refer to the separate instructions supplied with the equipment. 3 3.1 GPM400 processor Pack items Description Part No. GPM400 Processor module - US version GPM400 Processor module - EU version GPM400 Processor module - ROW version 1.5 m (4.9 ft) Power cable 1.5 m (4.9 ft) NMEA 0183 cable 1 m (3.3 ft) SeaTalkng spur cable 1.5 m (4.9 ft) SeaTalk/Alarm Out cable 3 m (9.8 ft) G-Series Audio out cable Install pack User documentation CD Commissioning and installation guide Quick reference guide Warranty booklet E02042 E02047 E02048 R08003 R08004 A06039 E55054 R08266 R08295 47018 87070 86126 80017 GPM400 Processor Module Handbook/documentation GPM400 Power cable GPM400 NMEA cable SeaTalkng spur cable GPM400 SeaTalk/Alarm cable GPM400 Audio cable 1
2 6 0 0 1 D G-Series Installation & Commissioning 24 Description GVM400 Video Module 1.5 m (4.9 ft) S-Video cable 1.5 m (4.9 ft) Audio cable Install pack Installation sheet Warranty booklet Part No. E02043 R08274 R08275 R08318 87068 80017 3.2 GVM400 video module Pack items GVM400 S-video cable GVM400 audio cable GVM400 Audio/Visual server unit 1
3 6 0 0 1 D 25 Chapter 3: Packs and contents 3.3 G-Series Keyboard Pack items Description Part No. E02044 R08307 A06039 A06033 A06028 R08308 R08309 87084 80017 Handbook/
Documentation Sun cover G-Series command center keyboard 1 m (3.3 ft) SeaTalkng/NMEA2000 cable 400 mm (15.75 in) SeaTalkng backbone cable SeaTalkng T-piece connector Suncover Rear cover / mounting bracket Screw pack Installation sheet Warranty booklet Command center keyboard Panel seal Rear clamp assembly Stud (x4) Finger nut (x4) 1
5 6 0 0 1 D SeaTalkng T connector SeaTalkng backbone cable SeaTalkng spur cable G-Series Installation & Commissioning 26 3.4 Keyboard wireless upgrade kit Pack items Description Part No. SeaTalkng bulkhead mounting cable 2.5 m (8.2 ft) keyboard charge cable Battery pack Battery pack Mounting plate 4 x allen head M3 screws Connector cover Allen head screw (x4) Mounting plate Connector cover Allen key Screw (x3) Handset dust cover Mounting screws (self tapping) x 3 SeaTalkng bulkhead mounting cable SeaTalkng Command Center charge cable Dust cap (covers dash mount cnx) Allen key Installation Sheet 1
6 6 0 0 1 D R08311 R08310 R08312 R08313 R08314 R08315 R08316 R08317 R08338 87085 27 Chapter 3: Packs and contents 3.5 SeaTalkng wireless basestation 3.6 Marine monitors Pack items Pack items SeaTalkng wireless basestation SeaTalk T connector Marine display SeaTalkng backbone cable SeaTalkng spur cable Description Wireless basestation Part No. E02045 1 m (3.3 ft) SeaTalk NG spur cable - stripped ends A06043 400 mm (15.75 in) SeaTalkng backbone cable SeaTalk NG T-connector Installation instructions A06033 A06028 87086 Sun cover Mounting brackets x 2 1.5 meter Power Cable 5 meter VGA cable assembly 1
3 6 3 0 1 D Part No. E02036 E02037 Part numbers depend on the display model. Refer to your display handbook for details 1
7 6 0 0 1 D Description 17 Marine Display 19 Marine Display Sun cover 2 x mounting brackets 5 m (16.4 ft) VGA cable 1.5 m (4.9 ft) Power cable G-Series Installation & Commissioning 28 3.7 Alarm buzzer Pack items 1
3 6 3 0 1 D Description Alarm buzzer Part No. E26033 29 Chapter 3: Packs and contents G-Series Installation & Commissioning 30 Chapter 4: Cables and connections This section contains details of cables and connections. Use it to plan your system wiring and ensure that you have the necessary cables available. 4 Chapter contents 4.1 General instructions on page 32 4.2 Power distribution on page 33 4.3 GPM400 processor on page 37 4.4 Monitor connections on page 38 4.5 Keyboard connections on page 40 4.6 Video and Entertainment on page 43 4.7 SeaTalkhs network on page 47 4.8 GPS Connection on page 49 4.9 SeaTalk & Alarm connection on page 50 4.10 NMEA 0183 connections on page 51 4.11 SeaTalkng connections on page 54 4.12 NMEA 2000 connections on page 55 4.1 General instructions Strain relief Cable types and length Follow the guidelines given in this section to determine appro-
priate cable types and length. Unless otherwise stated use only standard cables of the correct type, supplied by Raymarine. Ensure that any non-Raymarine cables are of the correct quality and gauge. For example, longer power cable runs may require larger wire gauges to minimize any voltage drop in a cable. Ensure adequate strain relief is provided. Protect connectors from strain and ensure they will not pull out under extreme sea conditions. Circuit isolation For installations using both AC and DC current:
Always use isolating transformers or a separate power-inverter to run PCs, processors, displays and other sensitive electronic instruments or devices. Always use an isolating transformer with Weather FAX audio Routing cables cables. No acute bends. Minimum bend radius of 100mm. Always use and RS232/NMEA converter with optical isolation Minimum bend 200 mm (8 in) diameter Minimum bend of cable 100 mm (4 in) radius 1
6 9 5 0 1 D on the signal lines. Always make sure that PCs or other sensitive electronic devic-
es have a dedicated power circuit. Cable shielding Ensure that all data cables are properly shielded that the cable shielding is intact (e.g. hasnt been scraped off by being squeezed through a tight area). Protect all cables from physical damage and exposure to heat. Schematic diagram Use trunking or conduit where possible. Avoid running cables through bilges or doorways, or close to moving or hot objects. When planning your connections and cabling, produce a schematic diagram to assist you. Secure cables in place using tie-wraps or lacing twine. Coil any extra cable and tie it out of the way. EMC installation guidelines Where a cable passes through an exposed bulkhead or deck-
head, a watertight feed-through should be used. You should always route data cables:
as far apart from other equipment and cables as possible, as far away from high current carrying AC and DC power lines as possible, as far away from antennas as possible. Raymarine equipment and accessories conform to the appropriate Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) regulations. This minimizes electromagnetic interference between equipment, which could oth-
erwise affect the performance of your system. Correct installation is required to ensure that EMC performance is not compromised. Ensure you comply with the EMC guidelines detailed on page 58 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 32 4.2 Power distribution Typical distribution Distribution Panel Monitor Monitor Radar GPS DSM 400 GPM400 GPM400 GPM400 GPM400
+VE bar
-VE bar All GPM400 processors must be powered from a single breaker. In line fuse protection must be provided for each individual power circuit. Circuit breaker Fuses 33 Chapter 4: Cables and connections D10145-1 Power distribution notes:
Raymarine recommend that you have a dedicated distribution panel for your G-Series system. All GPM400 processor units must be powered from a single breaker or switch, with appropriate circuit protection. All monitors and ancillary equipment should where possible be wired to individual breakers. Sharing a breaker Where more than 1 piece of equipment shares a breaker you must provide protection for the individual circuits. E.g. an in-line fuse for each power circuit
+VE bar
-VE bar Monitors and ancilliary equipment where possible be wired to individual breakers. Where this not possible an inline FUSE can be used to provide additional portection. Circuit breaker Circuit grounding Grounding The power cable screen and all Ground terminals MUST be connected to ships ground. Failure to connect to ships ground may cause it, or other on-board electronics to function incorrectly. No positive ground The G-Series system is NOT intended for use on positive ground boats. The power input cable earth screen connections must be connected directly to the boats ground. No ground loops Ground loops may cause galvanic corrosion. Avoid using the ships structure (metal) as an earth point, as this could result in ground loops. Grounding notes Use a dedicated earthing plate (e.g. dynaplate) in contact with the water. Ground cables may be routed to a common point (e.g. within the switch panel. With a single (appropriately rated) copper braid connecting to the earthing plate. Use flat tinned copper braid, 30 A rating (1/4 inch) or greater. Equivalent stranded wire diameter 4mm or greater. Keep the length of the earth braid as short as possible. Fuse Fuse Installations using both AC and DC current should have a sepa-
rate ground circuit for each. See Circuit isolation on page 32. 1
4 6 1 0 1 D The fuse must be of an appropriate type and rating for the load to be protected. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 34 Circuit protection GPM400 processor All GPM400 processors must be switched via a single breaker. Number of GPM400 units Supply voltage Thermal breaker
(Overall) Fuse
(Individual) Equipment GVM400 Video Module Supply voltage Thermal breaker Fuse 12 V 24 V 1.2 A 1 A 2 A 1 A For other ancillary equipment, refer to the separate installation instructions for circuit loading and protection information. Power cables Cable must be of a suitable gauge for the circuit load. Each unit should have its own dedicated power cable wired back to the distribution panel. All GPM400 processors should be connected to the same breaker. Power cable must include a separate screen wire. 1 2 3 4 12 V 24 V 12 V 24 V 12 V 24 V 12 V 24 V 10 A 5 A 20 A 10 A 25 A 15 A 35 A 20 A 10 A 5 A 10 A 5 A 10 A 5 A 10 A 5 A General circuit protection The following loads and protection ratings apply to G-Series dis-
plays and ancillary equipment:
Equipment G190 marine display G170 marine display Supply voltage Thermal breaker Fuse 12 V 24 V 12 V 24 V 8 A 4 A 8 A 4 A 12 A 6 A 12 A 6 A 35 Chapter 4: Cables and connections GPM400 power cables Length (max) Supply voltage Cable gauge
(AWG) 0-5 m
(0-16.4 ft) 5-10 m
(16.4-32.8 ft) 10-15 m
(32.8-49.2 ft) 15-20 m
(49.2-65.6 ft) 12 V 24 V 12 V 24 V 12 V 24 V 12 V 24 V 18 20 14 18 12 16 12 14 Each unit should have its own dedicated power cable wired back to the distribu-
tion panel. All GPM400 processors should be connected to the same breaker. Power cable must include a separate screen. GVM400 Video Module power cables Length (max) Supply voltage Cable gauge
(AWG) 0-5 m
(0-16.4 ft) 5-10 m
(16.4-32.8 ft) 10-15 m
(32.8-49.2 ft) 12 V 24 V 12 V 24 V 12 V 24 V 20 20 20 20 20 20 Length (max) Supply voltage Cable gauge
(AWG) 15-20 m
(49.2-65.6 ft) 12 V 24 V 18 20 The GVM400 should have its own dedicated power cable wired back to the distribution panel. Power cable must include a separate screen. G170/G190 Marine monitor power cables:
Length (max) Supply voltage Cable gauge
(AWG) 0-5 m
(0-16.4 ft) 5-10 m
(16.4-32.8 ft) 10-15 m
(32.8-49.2 ft) 15-20 m
(49.2-65.6 ft) 12 V 24 V 12 V 24 V 12 V 24 V 12 V 24 V 12 12 9 9 7 7 6 6 Monitor connection notes:
Each monitor should have its own dedicated power cable. Equipment which is susceptible to noise (such as VHF radios) should not be wired to the same distribution panel as the monitors. If in doubt the monitors
(or affected equipment) can be wired directly back to the battery/power source via a dedicated breaker. Refer to the separate monitor documentation for more details. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 36 4.3 GPM400 processor The GPM400 has the following connections:
1 2 3 4 5 POWE R A U DIO N M E A 01 8 3 S E A T A LK/AL A R M T U O A T A L K HIGH S P E E D E S S E ATAL K N G N M E A 01 8 3 1 2 8. SeaTalkhs network connection (see page 47). 9. NMEA 0183 connection (see page 51) 10. NMEA 0183 connection (see page 51) 11. Audio output (see page 46) Maximum quantity of GPM400 units The G-Series system will support up to 4 GPM400 processors, of which 1 must be set as the Master GPM. Master GPM On a system with more than one GPM400 you must designate one them as a Master GPM. The SeaTalk and SeaTalkng bus must be connected to the Master GPM. Note: The data is passed between multiple GPMs using the MONITOR REPEATER MONITOR MASTER SeaTalkhs network. See also Ensure you record connections to the GPM400 on the schemat-
ic diagram. See Appendix B - Nav Station schematic . For a typical SeaTalkhs system see page 19. For information on SeaTalkhs cables and connections see page 47. 11 10 9 8 7 6 1
3 6 1 0 1 D 1. 12/24V Power in (see page 33) 2. Status LED (see page 99) 3. SeaTalk / Alarm output (see page 50) 4. SeaTalkng connection (see page 54) 5. DVI display connection - repeater (see page 38) 6. DVI display connection - master (see page 38) 7. USB connection (for chart and software upgrade only) 37 Chapter 4: Cables and connections 4.4 Monitor connections Connect the G-Series marine displays to both the GPM400 proces-
sor and SeaTalkhs switch. Monitors may be connected to the GPM400 using either VGA or DVI cable. Camera Camera HS switch Monitor Repeat Monitor (optional) o e d v i e t i s o p m o C GPM 400 o e d v i e t i s o p m o C SeaTalkhs SeaTalkhs Monitor SeaTalkhs switch DVI or VGA DVI or VGA l s h k a T a e S SeaTalkhs SeaTalkhs G-Series Installation & Commissioning 38 Network selector switch
(in UP position) VGA Input DVI Input Power Cable Repeat displays Repeat displays (if used) show the same information / page as the master display. For this reason each display within a Nav Station must be connected to a different GPM400. Note: During start-up only the master display will show the boot sequence and start-up information. 1
4 7 0 0 1 D Maximum quantity of monitors The G-Series system will support up to 8 monitors (2 per GPM400). GPM 400 VGA input adaptor cable VGA Input OR DVI Input 1
5 7 0 0 1 D Screen resolution and aspect ratio Each GPM will output the same screen resolution to all connected displays. Therefore where multiple displays are connected to a single GPM they should have the same aspect ratio and screen resolution. For example we recommend that wide screen televisions and standard displays are connected to separate GPMs. IP Address When connecting a display to the processor, note its IP address on your system diagram. You will need to refer to this during the com-
missioning process. (See Appendix B for sample diagrams.) Selector Switch Raymarine G-Series displays have a selector switch located by the SeaTalkhs connector. This must be in the UP position for connec-
tion to the SeaTalkhs network. 3rd party displays Ensure that any 3rd party (non-Raymarine) displays have electrical isolation between the video connections and power supply (and any other 0 V referenced connection). This is to avoid 0 V loops which can cause interference issues. Marine display cables The following cables can be used with marine displays:
Cable Part No Notes DVI Connection To ensure optimum signal quality use only Raymarine cables. 5 m (16.4 ft) DVI to DVI (digital) cable E06021 10 m (32.8 ft) DVI to DVI (digital) cable E06022 Cable VGA 500 mm (19.69 in) DVI-VGA converter 1.5 m (4.9 ft) VGA cable 5 m (16.4 ft) VGA cable 10 m (32.8 ft) VGA cable 20 m (65.6 ft) VGA cable Display to SeaTalkhs 1.5 m (4.9 ft) SeaTalkhs cable 5 m (16.4 ft) SeaTalkhs cable 10 m (32.8 ft) SeaTalkhs cable 20 m (65.6 ft) SeaTalkhs cable Power 1.5 m (4.9 ft) Power cable Part No Notes To ensure optimum signal quality use only Raymarine cables. Required for any VGA connec-
tion to the GPM400. Supplied with Raymarine G-Series Marine Displays. Required for keyboard control of display functions. E06053 R08130 R08174 R08296 R08297 E55049 E55050 E55051 E55052 R08173 Supplied with product 39 Chapter 4: Cables and connections Cable Part No Notes Power cable extension Not supplied You may extend the power cable if required. See page 35. See Appendix C for other cables and accessories. See also 4.5 Keyboard connections The G-Series Keyboard communicates using the SeaTalkng sys-
tem. It may be connected directly to the backbone (wired) or use a remote basestation (wireless). Note: You should have at least one permanently wired keyboard. In the event that any wireless keyboards are lost, the wired keyboard can be used to control the system. For more detailed installation information refer to the separate users guide supplied with the display. Ensure you record connections to the GPM400 on the schemat-
Maximum quantity of Keyboards The G-Series system will support up to 8 keyboards. ic diagram. See Appendix B - Nav Station schematic . Schematic diagram When connecting a keyboard to the system, record its details on your system/schematic diagram. You will need this information dur-
ing commissioning. (See Appendix B for sample diagrams.) Wired keyboard system Monitor SeaTalkng backbone GPM 400 r u p s l g n k a T a e S Keyboard ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL r u p s l g n k a T a e S 1
8 6 0 0 1 D G-Series Installation & Commissioning 40 Wired keyboard connection details Wireless keyboard system SeaTalkng instrument, e.g. ST70 SeaTalkng backbone OR SeaTalkng spur SeaTalkng spur Monitor SeaTalkng backbone GPM400 r u p s l g n k a T a e S Keyboard ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL SeaTalkng charge cable Basestation r u p s l g n k a T a e S SeaTalkng spur Keyboard 1
0 7 0 0 1 D Charge point 1
9 6 0 0 1 D For cable part numbers see page 42. 41 Chapter 4: Cables and connections Wireless keyboard connection details SeaTalkng backbone Wireless basestation Wireless basestation Charge point OR SeaTalkng bulkhead mounting r u p s g n k a T a e S l Keyboard SeaTalkng instrument
(e.g. ST70) 1
1 7 0 0 1 D SeaTalkng connection White Blue Screen Red Black D10208-1 Keyboard cables The following cables can be used with the Keyboard:
Cable Part No Notes Keyboard to SeaTalkng 400 mm (15.75 in) SeaTalkng spur cable A06038 1 m (3.3 ft) SeaTalkng spur cable*
A06039*
Suppled with the keyboard 3 m (9.8 ft) SeaTalkng spur cable A06040 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 42 4.6 Video and Entertainment Video and entertainment is connected and distributed to the G-Series system using 2 system components:
GVM400 Video Module SeaTalkhs switch. Note: Video equipment may also be connected directly into the displays, although this will not be distributed around the system. Cable Part No Notes 5 m (16.4 ft) SeaTalkng spur cable A06041 Wireless basestation to SeaTalkng 1 m (3.3 ft) SeaTalkng spur cable
(bare ends) 3 m (9.8 ft) SeaTalkng spur cable
(bare ends) Dashboard / Charging 2.5 m (8.2 ft) charging cable 3 m (9.8 ft) SeaTalkng bulkhead mounting cable A06043 A06044 R08311 R08310 Included with wireless basestation. Included with the wireless upgrade kit. See Appendix C for other cables and accessories. See also Ensure you record connections to the GPM400 on the schematic diagram. See Appendix B - Nav Station schematic . 43 Chapter 4: Cables and connections Typical video system SeaTalkhs network GVM400 video module e t i s o p m o C e t i s o p m o C e t i s o p m o C l s h k a T a e S l s h k a T a e S S-Video and Audio SeaTalkhs switch Sat TV OR DVD Maximum quantity of GVM400 video modules The G-Series system will support up to 2 GVM400 video modules. D10076-1 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 44 Video / Entertainment connection details Video module SeaTalkhs switch Screened power cable Video module connections SeaTalkhs S-Video Audio Sat TV OR DVD Earth Power supply G-Series and SeaTalkhs devices D10077-1 45 Chapter 4: Cables and connections Video/Entertainment system cables Entertainment / Audio from the Video processor. (Associated The following cables are used to connect the GVM400 video module:
with the Comp4 or S-Video connection) Alarms and other system alerts. Cable S-Video 1.5 m (4.9 ft) adapter cable Audio 1.5 m (4.9 ft) audio cable AV cables Part No Notes Note: The audio output is line level only and must be connected to a suitable 3rd party amplifier in order to be heard. R08274 Included with GVM400. GPM 400 R08275 Included with the GVM400 N/A Installer to supply suitable cables. Video and audio equipment should be supplied with appropriate cables to connect to the G-Series system. SeaTalkhs Power Use SeaTalkhs Patch cables. See page 47 Power cables are not included with GVM400. You must supply appropriate power cables to suit your system requirements (see page 35). Audio cables To ship's audio system D10190-1 See Appendix C for other cables and accessories. The following cables are available to connect to the audio output:
Video output connection The video output is obtained from the GPM400 processor using DVI or VGA cables. See Monitor connections on page 38 for details. Audio output connection G-Series audio output is obtained from the GPM400. The following audio signals are obtained through this output.:
G-Series Installation & Commissioning 46 Cable Audio 3 m (9.8 ft) Audio out cable 15 m (49.2 ft) G-Series Audio out cable Part No Notes R08266 Supplied with GPM400. R08298 4.7 SeaTalkhs network The SeaTalkhs network has 2 main purposes:
Connection of digital devices. Networking of G-Series equipment. For a typical SeaTalkhs system see page 19. SeaTalkhs devices The following digital devices communicate via the SeaTalkhs network:
SeaTalkhs Switch The hub of the network, this routes all network traffic. GPM400 processors For sharing data over the network. GVM400 Video Module For video distribution over the G-Series network. See page 43 Digital radar Digital sounder (e.g. DSM400) For fishfinding applications. Refer to the separate instructions supplied with the sounder. G-Series marine displays (G190, G170 etc.) To allow control of display functions at the G-Series keyboard. See page 38 SR100 Sirius weather/audio receiver (North America only.) To receive sirius satellite weather and audio services. See also For a typical SeaTalkhs system see page 19. For more details on the connections refer to the separate instruc-
tions supplied with the digital devices and the SeaTalkhs switch. SeaTalkhs Network cables All devices are wired individually back to the SeaTalkhs switch using the following cables:
Notes Network cables are used to connect the GPM400 to the SeaTalkhs switch. Cable SeaTalkhs network 1.5 m (4.9 ft) SeaTalkhs network cable 5 m (16.4 ft) SeaTalkhs network cable 10 m (32.8 ft) SeaTalkhs network cable 15 m (49.2 ft) SeaTalkhs network cable 20 m (65.6 ft) SeaTalkhs network cable SeaTalkhs patch E55049 E55050 E55051 A62135 E55052 47 Chapter 4: Cables and connections Cable Notes Patch cables are used to connect the following devices to the SeaTalkhs switch:
GVM400 video module SeaTalkhs Switch (connecting to other SeaTalkhs switches). G-Series marine displays. 1.5 m (4.9 ft) SeaTalkhs patch cable E06054 5 m (16.4 ft) SeaTalkhs patch cable E06055 10 m (32.8 ft) SeaTalkhs patch cable E06056 15 m (49.2 ft) SeaTalkhs patch cable A62136 20 m (65.6 ft) SeaTalkhs patch cable E06057 Example: DSM400 connection DSM400 HS switch Power Power cables are not included with the SeaTalkhs switch. You must supply appropriate power cables to suit your system requirements (see page 35). See Appendix C for other cables and accessories. Increasing network capacity For increased capacity the network may contain multiple SeaTalkhs switches, connected together using SeaTalkhs network patch cables. SeaTalk HS D10201-1 Maximum quantity of DSM sounders The G-Series system will support 1 DSM sounder. See also For more information refer to the installation guide supplied with the DSM unit. DSM digital sounder connection The G-Series system can be used with the following DSM units:
DSM300 DSM400 The DSM connects to G-Series system via the SeaTalkhs switch. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 48 Digital radar connection The digital radar scanner connects to the SeaTalkhs switch using dedicated digital radar cables Radar HS switch Cable Part No Notes 10 m (32.8 ft) Digital cable 15 m (49.2 ft) Digital cable 25 m (82.0 ft) Digital cable A55077 A55078 A55079 A5080 A55081 Required if you wish to extend the cable distance. VCM100 Digital extension cable 5 m(16.4 ft) extension cable 10 m (32.8 ft) extension cable The maximum cable length including all extensions is 55 m (180 ft) Power D10202-1 See also For more information refer to the installation guide supplied with the radar scanner. Maximum quantity of Radar scanners The G-Series system will support up to 2 digital rader scanners. 4.8 GPS Connection Digital radar cables The following cables are used to connect the digital radar scanner:
Cable Part No Notes Digital cable 5 m (16.4 ft) Digital cable A55076 Depending upon your GPS type it may be either connected via SeaTalk or NMEA 0183. For SeaTalk connection refer to:
SeaTalk & Alarm connection on page 50. Separate instructions supplied with your GPS unit. For NMEA 0183 connection refer to:
NMEA 0183 connections on page 51 Separate instructions supplied with your GPS unit. 49 Chapter 4: Cables and connections 4.9 SeaTalk & Alarm connection Alarm output Other SeaTalk devices connected Alarm No other SeaTalk devices connected Alarm The alarm output is used to alert the operator to alarms and other audible warnings. Note: Alarms are global and as such will be sounded across all audio and alarm outputs across the system. d e R n w o r B 12v supply w o l l e Y k c a B l d e R Other SeaTalk devices k c a B l e t i h W Drain or d e R k c a B l n w o r B k c a B l d e R e t i h W Drain Yellow l m r a A
k a T a e S l GPM 400 The alarm output and SeaTalk are combined into a single connec-
tor. This includes a 12 V fused power supply. D10144-1 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 50 SeaTalk connection The SeaTalk connection allows the G-Series system to receive data from Raymarine SeaTalk compatible devices such as:
Autopilot The G-Series can receive and display autopilot information and act as a repeat controller. Refer to the separate reference guide for operation details. Instruments The G-Series can receive and display data received from instru-
ments, such as wind, speed and depth. GPS Required for chart applications. Master GPM The SeaTalk bus must be connected to the Master GPM (see page 37). Note: SeaTalk connection to other GPMs for the purposes of redundancy is allowed. 12 V power supply The SeaTalk connection provides a 12 V supply rated at 125 mA. This is suitable to supply 1 sounder module. Note: SeaTalk instruments will usually be powered from a sepa-
rate power supply, e.g from a Raymarine autopilot course computer. You should not power a SeaTalk bus from more than one supply. SeaTalk / Alarm output cables The following cable is used to connect the SeaTalk / Alarm output:
For example: Your system should have GPS connected to one place only. Duplicated GPS data will produce erratic behavior within the system. Connection /
Cable Alarm / SeaTalk 1.5 m (4.9 ft) SeaTalk/Alarm Out cable Part No Notes GPM 400 E55054 Supplied with GPM400 processor. See Appendix C for other cables and accessories. 4.10 NMEA 0183 connections The GPM400 processor has 2 NMEA 0183 connectors. Dual speed: 38.4 or 4.8 Kbps as required. These may be used for connection of NMEA compliant devices for data such as:
Fastheading, from an autopilot or fastheading sensor. This is required for Radar target acquisition (MARPA). See page 52 and your separate autopilot instructions. AIS information (for radar target identification). See page 53 and your separate AIS receiver instructions. Other NMEA data (such as 3rd party GPS or autopilot sys-
tems). For other NMEA device connections refer to the separate man-
ufacturers instructions. Multiple NMEA devices You may connect NMEA devices to any GPM400 including the master GPM. You should only connect 1 device of any particular type to the G-Series system (including any connected databus or networked electronics). Green
-ve IN White
+ve IN Yellow Brown Screen
+ve OUT
-ve OUT
(not connected)
-ve OUT
+ve OUT
+ve IN
-ve IN NMEA DEVICE D10193-1 51 Chapter 4: Cables and connections NMEA 0183 connection cables Fastheading connection The following cables are used to connect to NMEA 0183 devices. Connection /
Cable 1.5 m (4.9 ft) NMEA 0183 cable Other NMEA connections Part No Notes R08004 N/A Supplied with GPM400 processor unit. Installer to supply suitable data cable. Use a shielded twisted pair cable to mini-
mise interference. See Appendix C for other cables and accessories. NMEA 0183 Raymarine cable cores:
Fastheading data required for radar target acquisition (MARPA) may come from either the autopilot or a separate Raymarine Fast-
heading sensor. GPM 400 Autopilot NMEA0183 Function
(at GPM400 processor) NMEA Input (-ve) common NMEA Input (+ve) NMEA Output (+ve) NMEA Output (-ve) common Not connected Color Pin no. Pilot control head Fluxgate compass Green White Yellow Brown Screen 1 2 3 4 5 CANCEL ENTER MENU D10191-1 Note: Input and outputs are crossed. Input GPM400 is connected to output at NMEA device and vice versa. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 52 AIS connection VHF antenna AIS receiver VHF radio GPM 400 NMEA0183 4.8 (GPS data to VHF radio) NMEA0183 4.8
(fast heading) NMEA0183 (38.4) For more information refer to separate AIS instruction documents. D10192-1 53 Chapter 4: Cables and connections 4.11 SeaTalkng connections The G-Series system will use SeaTalkng to communicate with:
SeaTalkng instruments (e.g. ST70), SeaTalkng autopilots (e.g. ST70 with SPX course computer), G-Series keyboard. SeaTalkng cables The SeaTalkng system uses the following cables and connections. Connection /
Cable Notes Backbone cables
(various lengths) The main cable carrying data. Spurs from the back-
bone are used to connect SeaTalkng devices. T-piece connectors Used to make junctions in the backbone to which devices can then be connected. Terminators Spur cables Required at either end of the backbone. Used to connect devices. Devices may be daisy chained or connected directly to the T-pieces. Typical SeaTalkng system CANCEL ENTER MENU CANCEL ENTER MENU GPM 400 Keyboard ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Autopilot (Course Computer) Power Supply For more information refer to the separate SeaTalkng reference manual. 12 V / 24 V dc 12 V dc + Data SeaTalkng power The SeaTalkng bus requires a 12 V power supply. This may be provided from:
Raymarine equipment witha regulated 12 V supply. (e.g. a SmartPilot course computer) Other suitable 12 V supply. (Note the grounding requirements for the G-Series system, see page page 34. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 54 SeaTalkng backbone D10195-1 4.12 NMEA 2000 connections NMEA 2000 devices are connected using the SeaTalkng bus. The G-Series system can display data received from NMEA 2000 devices (e.g. for displaying data from compatible engines). You may connect NMEA 2000 compatible devices using appropri-
ate adaptor cables. See also For more information refer to the separate SeaTalkng reference manual. e n o b k c a b g n k a T a e S l SeaTalkng to DeviceNet cable NMEA 2000 equipment
(e.g. engine via appropriate manufacturers interface) D10599-1 NMEA 2000 cable The following cable is used to connect the NMEA 2000 devices to the SeaTalkng bus:
Connection /
Cable Part No Notes 1.5 m (4.9 ft) SeaTalkng to DeviceNet male A06046 55 Chapter 4: Cables and connections G-Series Installation & Commissioning 56 Chapter 5: Installation and mounting This section gives details for installation and mounting of the core components of the G-Series system. Use this information when planning and installing your system. 5 Chapter contents 5.1 General instructions. Page 58 5.2 GPM400 Processor module. Page 59 5.3 G-Series Keyboard. Page 60 5.5 GVM400 Video Module. Page 66 5.6 Alarm buzzer. Page 67 See also Monitor installation. Refer to the separate instructions supplied with the monitor. Peripheral equipment. Refer to the instructions supplied with the individual packs. Cabling and connections - Chapter 4: Cables and connections. Page 31. 5.1 General instructions Any specific requirements for each system component are provided later in this chapter. Equipment location Cable entry When deciding on the location of system components, consider the following:
Ignition hazards Ventilation Mounting surface Cable entry EMC installation guidelines Ignition hazards Potential ignition sources The equipment in these instructions is NOT approved for use in hazardous/flammable atmo-
spheres such as an engine room. Ventilation To ensure adequate airflow:
Ensure that equipment is mounted in a compartment of suitable size. Ensure that ventilation holes are not obstructed. Allow adequate separation of equipment. Any specific requirements for each system component are provided later in this chapter. Mounting surface Ensure the unit is mounted in a location which allows proper routing and connection of cables:
Minimum bend radius of 100 mm (3.94 in). Use cable supports to prevent stress on connectors. EMC installation guidelines Raymarine equipment and accessories conform to the appropriate Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) regulations. This minimizes electromagnetic interference between equipment, which could oth-
erwise affect the performance of your system. Correct installation is required to ensure that EMC performance is not compromised. For optimum EMC performance, we recommend that:
Raymarine equipment and the cables connected to it are:
i. At least 3 ft. (1 m) from any equipment transmitting or cables carrying radio signals e.g. VHF radios, cables and antennas. In the case of SSB radios, the distance should be increased to 7 ft. (2 m). ii. More than 7 ft. (2 m) from the path of a radar beam. A radar beam can normally be assumed to spread 20 degrees above and below the radiating element. The product is supplied from a separate battery from that used for engine start. This is important to prevent erratic behavior and data loss which can occur if the engine start does not have a separate battery. Ensure equipment is adequately supported on a secure surface. Raymarine specified cables are used. Do not mount units or cut holes in places which may damage the structure of the vessel. Cables are not cut or extended unless doing so is detailed in the installation manual. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 58 Remember 5.2 GPM400 Processor module Where constraints on the installation prevent any of the above recommendations:
Always allow the maximum separation possible between differ-
ent items of electrical equipment. This will provide the best conditions for EMC performance for the installation. Suppression ferrites Raymarine cables may be fitted with suppression ferrites. These are important for correct EMC performance. Any ferrite removed to facilitate installation must be replaced in the original position imme-
diately after the installation is complete. Use only ferrites of the correct type, supplied by Raymarine au-
thorized dealers. Connections to other equipment If Raymarine equipment is to be connected to other equipment using a cable not supplied by Raymarine, a Raymarine suppres-
sion ferrite MUST always be attached to the cable near the Raymarine unit. 125 mm (4.92 in)
) n i 0
. 9
m m 0 3 2 Air vents Minimum radius bend of cable
(100mm) Cable clip 1
0 0 1 0 1 D 335 mm (13.2 in) Minimum ventilation clearance of XXX mm around total perimeter 59 Chapter 5: Installation and mounting 5.3 G-Series Keyboard The Keyboard can be installed for 2 different types of use:
Wired operation (flush mounted). Wireless operation, using the wireless upgrade kit and SeaTalkng basestation. Note: You should have at least one permanently wired keyboard. In the event that any wireless keyboards are lost, the wired keyboard can be used to control the system. Mounting and environment The following conditions apply:
Do NOT install near sources of heat or vibration (e.g. engine). The unit is NOT designed for use in a sealed enclosure. Access to the unit is required, e.g. for chart updates. Must be mounted on a vertical surface. Sides and top must be level. Mounting surface must be firm, secure and capable of support-
ing the weight of the unit. Install below decks in a dry area. Install the unit well away from potential sources of ignition. Mounting clearances Allow the following clearances from other equipment and surfaces. Side Top Left Right Bottom Front Cables Distance 100 mm (3.94 in) 100 mm (3.94 in) 100 mm (3.94 in) To allow cable entry 150 mm (5.91 in) Minimum bend radius of 100 mm (3.94 in) All cables must be secured within 150 mm (5.91 in) of the unit. This will prevent undue strain on the connectors. See also Ensure you record connections to the GPM400 on the schematic diagram. See Appendix B - Nav Station schematic. For connection details, see page 31. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 60 Wired operation - flush mounted Dimensions Mounting arrangement G-Series keyboard Sun cover Keyboard
) n i 5 3
. 2
m m 8
. 9 5 l e c n a r a e c m u m n m i i Panel seal
(adhesive side up) SeaTalk NG cable Rear clamp assembly 1
1 0 1 0 1 D Stud (x4) Finger nut (x4) 297 mm (11.69 in) Mounting and environment The keyboard is suitable for mounting both above and below decks. It is waterproof to CFR-46 standard. Use the cutting template provided with the keyboard. Connect cable into keyboard before clamping in place. The following conditions apply:
Do NOT install near sources of heat. (e.g. engine). Install the unit well away from potential sources of ignition. 61 Chapter 5: Installation and mounting
) n i 5 8
. 3
m m 8 9
) n i 8 3
. 1
m m 5 3
) n i 1 8
. 1
m m 6 4 D10226-1 Cables 1. Install charge point. Minimum bend radius of 100 mm (3.94 in). See also Note: Remove protective cover from each side of gasket Ensure you record your keyboard details on the schematic dia-
gram. See Appendix B - Nav Station schematic. Ensure flat edge is located to left side for correct orientation Wireless upgrade kit Allows wireless operation of the keyboard. Mounting and environment The should be within sight of G-series monitors. This will allow a keyboard to operate the system whilst on charge. Cut 25 mm diameter hole No.4 x 3/8"screw
) n i 6
. 2
m m 9 4 25 mm
(1 in) 25 mm diameter hole 1
1 6 1 0 1 D G-Series Installation & Commissioning 62 2. Fit splash cover. 3. Fit the battery, taking care to avoid contamination of the cover seal. 1
2 6 1 0 1 D D10518-1 63 Chapter 5: Installation and mounting 4. Fit the rear cover. Wireless basestation Required for wireless operation of the keyboard. 5. For charging and wired operation use the cable provided Note: The keyboard should be charged for 6 hours before use. 1
9 8 1 0 1 D
) n i
. 1 6 4
m m 7 1 1 66 mm (2.6 in) 36 mm (1.42 in) G-Series Installation & Commissioning 64
| 1 | Gseries Installation Part 2 | Users Manual | 1.99 MiB | May 02 2008 |
Mounting and environment The following conditions apply:
Repeat basestation A repeat basestation may be used to optimize wireless coverage. You must perform a site survey to find an appropriate location and ensure good wireless reception around the boat. Do NOT install near sources of heat or vibration. (e.g. engine). Install in a dry area as high on the vessel as possible. Mount on a vertical surface. Install the unit well away from potential sources of ignition. Mount at least 1 m (3 ft) away from devices which may be af-
fected by radio transmission (e.g. compass) Site survey (wireless coverage) Note: Only the master basestation is connected to SeaTalkng. The repeat basestation requires a power connection only. D10207-1 You will need to survey the wireless coverage to ensure that wire-
less devices can operate around the vessel. Note: Only the master basestation is connected to SeaTalkng. The repeat basestation requires a power connection only. Fit Base Station as high up as possible, in a dry location 5.4 G-Series Monitors To install your monitor refer to the separate instructions provided. See also Ensure you record your monitor details on the schematic diagram. See Appendix B - Nav Station schematic. D10205-1 65 Chapter 5: Installation and mounting 5.5 GVM400 Video Module Mounting and environment Mount below decks in a dry area Install on a vertical surface. Do NOT mount near sources of heat or vibration. (e.g. engine) Install well away from potential sources of ignition. Cables Minimum bend radius of 100 mm (3.94 in). Power cable should be fixed to the plastic case using the cable tie provided. All video / data cables must be secured within 150 mm (5.91 in) of the unit using a suitable cable clip. This will prevent undue strain on the connectors. 56 mm
(2.2 in)
) n i
. 7 6
m m 0 7 1 237 mm (9.33 in) Minimum radius bend of cable
(100mm) Cable clip 1
7 9 1 0 1 D G-Series Installation & Commissioning 66 5.6 Alarm buzzer The alarm is used to alert the operator to alarms and other audible warnings. 38 mm
(1.5 in) 18 mm
(0.7 in) r e t e m a d i
) n i
. 6 3 2
m m 0 6
) n i 5 2
. m m 0 6 D10203-1 Mounting and environment Mount below decks in a dry area Install on a vertical surface. Do NOT mount near sources of heat or vibration. (e.g. engine) Install well away from potential sources of ignition. 67 Chapter 5: Installation and mounting G-Series Installation & Commissioning 68 6 Chapter 6: Initial test This section gives details for the initial tests and checks to be carried out once installation is complete. Chapter contents Turn on breakers on page 70 Marine monitor checks on page 70 Keyboard checks on page 70 GPM400 processor checks on page 70 GVM400 video processor checks on page 70 SeaTalkhs switch on page 70 See also For help with diagnosing and rectifying faults, refer to Chapter 9: Troubleshooting. Before powering up Before proceeding with the power on test of your system please ensure that:
Radar and all ancillary equipment has been installed and connected in accordance with the manufactur-
ers instructions. All G-Series equipment has been installed and connected in accordance with the G-Series installation instructions. 6.1 Power up test It is advisable to perform an initial power-up test to help ensure that the system is wired correctly. Perform the following initial checks before proceeding to the com-
missioning stage:
On a healthy system all monitors will:
show the G-Series set-up wizard screen on the appropriate in-
put channel. Note: Only the master monitors will show the initial boot sequence. The repeat monitors may not begin to operate until the system has ran through its start-up sequence
(approximately 2 minutes after power on). Turn on breakers Keyboard checks Turn on the power to the equipment at the distribution panel:
1. Monitors and ancillary equipment. 2. GPM400 processors. Power up sequence You can check that each keyboard is correctly connected by look-
ing at its LCD monitor. On a healthy system all keyboards will:
Display the message NOT ASSIGNED. Power up the monitors first to allow the boot sequence and start-up information to be shown at master monitors. GPM400 processor checks Check that each GPM is correctly connected by looking at its LED
(found next to the SeaTalk/alarm output). Check system:
Wait for 2 minutes whilst the boot sequence is completed, then check each of the following:
Monitors Keyboards GPM400 processors GVM400 Video Modules SeaTalkhs Switch On a healthy GPM400:
LED will flash Green. For a full LED status listing see page 99. GVM400 video processor checks Check that each GPM is correctly connected by looking at its LED
(found next to the SeaTalk/alarm output). On a healthy GVM400:
DSM sounder module. (refer to separate instructions supplied LED will flash Green. with the DSM) Marine monitor checks You will need to select the appropriate input on each monitor. On a G-Series marine monitor:
Press the power key (if required) Press the Left/Right arrow keys to scroll through the inputs. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 70 For a full LED status listing see page 100. SeaTalkhs switch Use this to check the status of your SeaTalkhs network connections. On a healthy SeaTalk Switch:
Each connected channel will have one flashing and one steady green LED. For a full LED status listing see page 98. 71 Chapter 6: Initial test G-Series Installation & Commissioning 72 7 Chapter 7: Initial Setup This chapter provides information for the initial setup of a new system Chapter contents 7.1 Power up the system on page 74 7.3 Select Master GPM on page 75 7.2 First time configuration on page 74 7.4 Configure Nav Stations on page 77 7.5 Assign Keyboards on page 78 Schematic diagram You will need details of the equipment connections and serial numbers. You should have entered these onto the Nav Station schematic diagrams during the installation. Nav station information Nav station name Bridge nav Nav station location Bridge Name Location Bridge - Left Bridge IP address (When on SeaTalkhs only) Display 1 Display 2 (if applicable) Name Bridge - Right Location Bridge IP address (When on SeaTalkhs only) Video connection (delete as appropriate) 10-2-0-14 DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO
10-2-0-2 Video connection (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO
Keyboard Serial number ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 02070016 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Location Bridge SeaTalkng Wireless (delete as appropriate)
YES / NO GPM400 processor SeaTalkhs switch GPM400 processor Serial Number 1006021 Location Left (switch cupboard) Serial number Location Serial number 1006024 Location Right (switch cupboard) Master GPM (delete as appropriate) YES / NO
Master GPM (delete as appropriate)
YES / NO D10029-1 7.1 Power up the system 7.2 First time configuration Before powering up Before proceeding with the power on test of your system please ensure that:
Radar and all ancillary equipment has been installed and con-
nected in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. There is an automatic menu sequence when you set up the system for the very first time (i.e. for systems which do not yet have any Nav Stations configured). This will automatically display the appro-
priate menus at power up, to help you to configure your Nav Stations. All G-Series equipment has been installed and connected in ac-
First time configuration, automatic sequence cordance with the G-Series installation instructions. Turn on breakers Turn on the power to the equipment at the distribution panel. 1. Monitors and ancillary equipment 2. GPM400 processors. Power up sequence Power up the monitors first to allow the boot sequence and start-up information to be shown at master monitors. See also Select Master GPM To set the Master GPM on page 76 Create Nav Station To create a new Nav Station on page 77 To assign monitors to a Nav Station on page 77 Assign Keyboards Assign Keyboards on page 78 Appropriate set-up menus will automatically appear on the monitor. Note: First time configuration must be done at a monitor connected to the master GPM (see page 75). For information on repeat / master monitors see page 38. Nav Station A Nav Station is a group of monitors, GPM processors and Key-
boards. This provides a location from where users can view and control the G-Series system. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 74 Typical Nav station arrangement See also For more information on nav station connections, see Chapter 2: Typical systems. 7.3 Select Master GPM The GPM400 master handles the data from the marine electronics installed around the boat. It receives data (e.g. via SeaTalkng) and transmit this around the G-Series system via the SeaTalkhs network. Note: The initial set up should be done at a monitor connected to the master GPM. See page 74. Nav Station 1
(Flybridge) ENTER 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Nav Station 2
(Bridge) ENTER 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Below decks components
(GPM400, GVM400 etc..) Each display within a Nav Station must be connected to a different GPM400. This is because the master and repeat displays con-
nected to any single GPM400 will both show the same information or page. D10239-1 75 Chapter 7: Initial Setup To open the Set Master GPM menu:
Current Master This is the GPM currently set at the master. To set the Master GPM 1. Select the appropriate GPM from those displayed. 2. Press the SET AS MASTER softkey. To identify the correct GPM SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SET MASTER GPM If you are unsure of which GPM to select, press the DISCOVER GPM softkey to show a message on every monitor which identifies the GPM to which it is connected. MENU SYSTEM SETUP 1
4 3 3 0 1 D Select Master GPM - menu and soft keys SET AS MASTER 1
5 3 3 0 1 D GPM-XXXXXXXXX The available GPMs are listed by serial number. Cross refer these with the Serial numbers on your Nav Station schematic diagrams. Local GPM Indicates the GPM to which the monitor is physically connected. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 76 7.4 Configure Nav Stations For a definition of a Nav station see First time configuration on page 74. To open the Configure Nav Stations menu:
MENU SYSTEM SETUP 1
6 3 3 0 1 D SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Nav Stations - menu and soft keys 1. Press CREATE NAV STATION softkey/
2. Enter the name for the Nav Station. i. Press SELECT NAME to select from the list of pre defined names. OR ii. Press EDIT NAME to use a custom name. 3. Press OK when complete. To assign monitors to a Nav Station from the Configure Nav Stations menu:
1. Select the appropriate Nav Station from those displayed 2. Press ASSIGN MONITORS. 3. Select the monitors to be added. i. Press ADD RAY Monitor to select from the Raymarine monitors connected to the system. OR CONFIGURE NAV STATIONS ii. Press ADD OTHER MONITOR to select a non Raymarine monitor. 4. Enter the appropriate information for the monitor type selected. Assign monitors Information required Monitor type(s) Name Press SELECT NAME to select from the list of pre ALL defined names. OR Press EDIT NAME to use a custom name. ALL GPM From the list displayed, select the GPM to which the monitor is connected. DISCOVER GPM If you are unsure of which GPM to select, press the DISCOVER GPM softkey to show a message on every monitor which identifies the GPM to which it is connected. 1
7 3 3 0 1 D ASSIGN MONITORS... CREATE NAV STATION DELETE NAV STSTION EDIT NAME To create a new Nav Station from the Configure Nav Stations menu:
77 Chapter 7: Initial Setup Assign monitors Information required IP Address From the list displayed, select the IP address of the monitor being assigned. DISCOVER IP If you are unsure of which monitor to select, press this softkey to identify the IP address of each monitor. IDENTIFY MONITOR You can confirm that the correct monitor has been assigned by pressing this softkey. The selected monitor will then display its OSD menus, allowing it to be identified. Input Select the monitor input to which the G-Series cable is connected (e.g. VGA 1) RAY monitors only To identify the correct monitor Monitor type(s) RAY monitors only 7.5 Assign Keyboards Introduction You must assign each G-Series Keyboard to control a Nav station or an individual monitor. To open the Assign Keyboards menu:
MENU SYSTEM SETUP 1
8 3 3 0 1 D SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ASSIGN KEYBOARDS Softkeys are provided to help you identify the correct monitor. Keyboard Configuration - menu and soft keys DISCOVER IP If you are unsure of which monitor to select, press this softkey to identify the IP address of each monitor. IDENTIFY MONITOR You can confirm that the correct monitor has been assigned by pressing this softkey. The selected monitor will then display its OSD menus, allowing it to be identified. ASSIGN TO NAV STATION ASSIGN TO MONITOR KBD-XXXXXXXXX The available Keyboards are listed by serial number. Cross re-
1
9 3 3 0 1 D G-Series Installation & Commissioning 78 fer these with the Serial numbers on your Nav Station schematic diagrams. Assigned to Shows the assignment of the selected keyboard. To assign a Keyboard to a Nav Station from the Assign Keyboards menu:
1. Select the desired keyboard from those displayed. 2. Press ASSIGN TO NAV STN. Then either:
i. Select from the list of available Nav Stations. OR ii. Press the ASSIGN TO ALL NAV STNS softkey. 3. Press OK when complete. To assign a Keyboard to an individual monitor from the Assign Keyboards menu:
1. Select the desired keyboard from those displayed. 2. Press ASSIGN TO MONITOR. 3. Select from the list of available Monitors. 4. Press OK when complete To identify the correct keyboard If you are unsure of which keyboard to select, press the IDENTIFY KEYBOARD softkey to show a message on the monitor to identify the keyboard being used. 79 Chapter 7: Initial Setup G-Series Installation & Commissioning 80 8 Chapter 8: Commissioning This chapter provides information for the commissioning of a system once the initial setup is complete. Chapter contents 8.1 Language setting on page 82 8.2 Compass heading setup on page 82 8.3 Radar setup on page 83 8.4 GPS checks on page 85 8.5 Fishfinder checks on page 86 8.6 Set up video on page 87 8.7 NMEA 0183 on page 88 8.8 Data checks on page 89 See also For details of how to operate the G-Series system or general navigation of the menus and pages, refer to the separate user reference guide. 8.1 Language setting Check heading The system will operate in the following languages:
English (US) English (UK) Danish French Icelandic Korean Russian Dutch German Italian Norwegian Spanish Chinese Finnish Greek Japanese Portuguese Swedish To select a language:
MENU SYSTEM SETUP Provided that the system has a compass connected, the compass heading is displayed in the data bar at the top of the screen:
Compass Heading D10351-1 If no heading is displayed this could indicate a problem with the autopilot or compass connection. See Chapter 9:
Troubleshooting. Page 91 for more information. Linearize (swing) the compass If your system has a Raymarine compass (e.g ST80 or Fasthead-
ing sensor) which is not connected to an autopilot system, then you will need to linearize (swing) the compass using the G-Series system. To linearize your compass:
1
0 4 3 0 1 D LANGUAGE Select the required language from those displayed. 8.2 Compass heading setup The G-Series system provides options to set up a Raymarine compass. Note: If the compass is connected to a Raymarine autopilot, you should calibrate the compass heading using the autopilot controller, and proceed to the Radar setup (page 83). MENU COMPASS SETUP 1
9 4 3 0 1 D LINEARIZE COMPASS 1. Once you have selected LINEARIZE COMPASS, follow the on-
screen instructions. 2. When instructed to align heading, press the ALIGN HEADING soft key and then turn the rotary control one click at a time to fine tune the heading. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 82 8.3 Radar setup Initialize radar and set to transmit Electromagnetic energy The radar scanner transmits electromagnetic energy. Ensure all personnel are clear of the scanner before switching to Tx (transmit mode). You will need to:
Initialize the radar Select a scanner (2 scanner systems only) 2 scanner systems The system may have 2 digital scanners connected. You can select the scanner to be used for each radar window. For 2 scanner systems you must repeat the instructions in this
(Radar setup) section, once for each scanner. Radar 2 Radar 1 Set radar to transmit To initialize the radar Select a Radar page by either:
i. Press the PAGE key to select from the current page set. OR ii. Press and hold the PAGE key to select from all available pages. The Radar scanners will now initialize in standby mode, this pro-
cess will take approximately 70 seconds. If the radar fails to initialize, refer to Chapter 9:
Troubleshooting. Page 91. To assign scanners (2 scanner systems only) For 2 scanner systems you must select which scanner is to be used for the current radar view. Radar 1 (long range) Radar 2 (short range) Radar 1 Radar 2 OR MENU RADAR SETUP 1
0 4 3 0 1 D ASSIGN SCANNERS Scanners are listed by serial number (or name if assigned). D10513-1 1. Select the appropriate scanner from those displayed. 2. Press OK when done. Note: The EDIT NAME softkey allows you to assign a name to each scanner connected 83 Chapter 8: Commissioning To set radar to transmit 1. Press the Power button on the Keyboard. 2. Press the RADAR TX/STDBY softkey and set to TX. Note: For 2 scanner systems there are individual ON/OFF and TX/
STDBY keys for each scanner. Check and adjust bearing alignment Check and adjust the radar bearing alignment to ensure that radar objects appear at the correct bearing relative to your boats bow. You will need to check the radar bearing alignment for any scanner installation that is not aligned with the boat. Check radar operation Typical radar page Ship's Heading Marker
(SHM) Radar status icon 1
2 4 3 0 1 D Points to check:
Radar scanner aligned Radar scanner NOT aligned
(bearing alignment should not be required)
(bearing alignment will be required) D10514-1 Note: Bearing alignment should only be done after the compass heading has been checked (page 82). To check the bearing alignment Radar sweep with echo responses are shown on screen With your boat under way:
Radar status icon rotating in top right hand corner If either of the above are not present this could indicate a fault. Refer to the radar troubleshooting section for information. 1. Align your boats bow with a stationary object identified on the Radar display An object between 1 & 2 NM distant is ideal. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 84 2. Note the position of the object on the radar display. If the target is not under the Ships heading marker (SHM), there is an align-
ment error and you will need to carry out bearing alignment adjustment. To adjust the bearing alignment 8.4 GPS checks The GPS is required to show your boat position on the chart. You can set up your GPS and check its status using the GPS status icons and the GPS Status page of the Setup menu. With a radar window active select the bearing alignment menu:
Check the GPS Status icon This is located in the top right hand corner of the screen. BEARING ALIGNMENT If NO FIX is displayed refer to the GPS status page (below) and Troubleshooting section on page 95. MENU RADAR SETUP 1
3 4 3 0 1 D From the menu:
GPS Status page MENU GPS STATUS 1. Press the BEARING ALIGNMENT softkey. 2. Use the rotary control to place the selected target under the SHM. 3. Press OK when complete. Parking settings (open array scanners) To ensure the scanner parks (rests) in the correct position when rotation stops, you may need to adjust the radar offset angle. To adjust radar parking settings From the Radar setup menu (radar in standby mode):
1. Select the PARKING OFFSET option, then adjust the offset angle required to park the radar so that the antenna comes to rest facing forward (you should see the Raymarine logo wording from the front of the boat) when you place it in either standby or switch it off. 2. Press OK when complete. 1
6 4 3 0 1 D 1
4 4 3 0 1 D 85 Chapter 8: Commissioning Typical GPS status screen 8.5 Fishfinder checks 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001.0 SD-FIX 122 HDOP FIX STATUS SATELLITE DIFFERENTIAL WGS 1984 1
5 4 3 0 1 D DIFF GPS ON OFF DIFF SETUP OTHER SETUP RESTART GPS This screen may help diagnose a NO FIX status. It provides infor-
mation for each for each tracked GPS satellite. HDOP The HDOP (Horizontal Dilution Of Position) value shown on screen provides an indication of the positional accuracy. This will vary depending upon the relative position of the GPS satellites and the prevailing conditions. An ideal figure is 1.0. which indicates optimum accuracy. A consistently high value (6 or above) may be associated with NO-FIX occurring frequently. Check that the GPS antennae has a clear view of the entire sky and refer to the troubleshooting section on page 95. See also For further information and details regarding differential GPS, refer to the separate user reference manual. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 86 For the fishfinder window to function the system must be connected to a digital sounder (e.g. DSM400). To select a fishfinder screen:
Press the PAGE key to select from the current page set. Press and hold the PAGE key to select from all available screens. Typical fishfinder screen Fishfinder status icon 1
1 5 3 0 1 D Points to check:
Fishfinder screen is scrolling and showing graphical information. FIshfinder status icon animated in top right hand corner. Valid depth and frequency values on screen To select a video page If any of the above are not present this could indicate a fault. Refer to Chapter 9: Troubleshooting. Page 91. Press the PAGE key to select from the current page set. OR Fault indications:
No Data This is displayed if the system cannot detect a compatible DSM sounder with appropriate transducer. Invalid custom configuration Indicates an invalid manual override of switch settings at the trans-
ducer. Refer to your DSM and Transducer documentation for further information. 8.6 Set up video To ensure correct operation of the video and entertainment system you should setup and test all video and audio channels. Before proceeding ensure that the video sources are operating. For audio you should ensure that the amplifier is turned on with the appropriate input selected. Check the video and audio output You will need to:
Set up and select a video page Set up the video inputs To set up a video page 1. Open the system Setup menu. 2. Open the Select Page Set screen. 3. Highlight the page set you want to edit. 4. Press the EDIT PAGE SET softkey:
5. Follow the on-screen instructions and select the video page type as appropriate. 6. Press OK. Press and hold the PAGE key to select from all available page sets. The audio (associated with input 4) will be heard through the con-
nected amplifier or television. To set up video inputs MENU VIDEO SETUP MENU D10352-1 This menu provides the following options:
Setup video cycle You may set up display cycles for multiple video sources. Setup softkey shortcuts You can set up the softkeys used to view the video channels on the monitor. Configure video system Set up S-Video and other video options (S-Video is only avail-
able on input 4). See Configure the video system . Reset GVM Reset all options associated with the GVM400 video server(s) to the factory default settings. 87 Chapter 8: Commissioning Configure the video system MENU VIDEO SETUP MENU CONFIGURE VIDEO SYSTEM D10600-1 Select the required video input, then adjust the following options as required:
Rename GVM400 video unit By default, the GVM video modules are labelled by their serial number, e.g. GVM400-0471123. You can change these la-
bels to make them more descriptive. Rename video By default, the video sources are labelled Comp1 to Comp3 and S-Video. You can change these labels to make them more descriptive, for example: engine room, stern, or bow. 1
3 5 3 0 1 D If any channel does not display correctly check the video and SeaTalkhs connections. Also refer to Chapter 9: Troubleshooting 8.7 NMEA 0183 If you have a Navtex or AIS receiver connected to a NMEA 0183 port, you will need to change the NMEA Port Setting. Set up the NMEA port using a monitor physically connected to the correct GPM400 processor. (Refer to the details on your Nav Sta-
tion schematic diagrams) MENU SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM INTEGRATION Type (Input 4 only) By default input 4 is set to S-Video. If you want to use input 4 for composite video, change this setting accordingly. Orientation Use this option to change the orientation of the video image. For example to display a mirror-image of the video feed if you have a rear-facing camera linked to a forward-facing display. Aspect ratio The video application automatically detects the appropriate as-
pect ratio for each input source. If an image appears distorted
(squashed or stretched), you can override the automatic setting to choose the appropriate aspect ratio manually. An aspect ratio of 4:3 is standard format, while 16:9 is wide-
screen format. See also Please refer to the Reference Manual for more details. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 88 NMEA Port settings Setting NMEA equipment Additional information NMEA 4800 General Default setting Navtex receiver Navtex 4800 or Navtex 9600 Please refer to your Navtex receiver manual for appro-
priate settings. AIS 38400 AIS receiver AIS checks 1. Check the AIS Status icon This is located in the top right hand corner of the screen. Typical AIS window AIS target AIS status icon 1
6 5 3 0 1 D If NO AIS is displayed, please refer to the Troubleshooting section on page 97. 2. Check that AIS targets are available Use the chart window with radar overlay to check the AIS operation. Note: For dockside or dry-dock commission, you may not see targets. Use these softkey functions to view AIS targets VRM/EBL TARGET TRACKING GAIN ENHANCE ECHOES PRESENTATION Monitor in zones Zone 1 on/off Setup zone 1 Acquire target 1
7 5 3 0 1 D Zone 2 on/off Setup zone 2 MARPA & AIS options Options window MARPA list window MARPA list Cancel all targets Cancel target 8.8 Data checks Use the data window to check that the G-Series system is receiving all necessary information from the marine electronics system. This includes:
Instrument and other data received via SeaTalkng. Engine data. Compatible engines may send information using NMEA 2000. This can be then connected into the SeaTalkng bus. Other data on the system (e.g. received via SeaTalk and NMEA 0183). To select the digital data page Press the PAGE key to select from the current page set. 89 Chapter 8: Commissioning Press and hold the PAGE key to select from all available pages. Typical instrument data window 1
4 5 3 0 1 D To set up the digital data to be displayed Open the Panel Setup Menu MENU PANEL SETUP MENU D10334-1 Use this menu to add or remove types of data from the display. Refer to the user reference manual for additional information. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 90 Chapter 9: Troubleshooting This section gives details for the troubleshooting the system. It covers common problems that may occur during test and commissioning. 9 Chapter contents Power up on page 92 Marine Monitors on page 92 Keyboards on page 93 Radar on page 94 GPS on page 95 Video on page 96 Data on page 97 Fishfinder on page 98 SeaTalkhs Switch LED indications on page 98 GPM400 LED indications on page 99 GVM400 LED indications on page 100 DSM400 LED indications on page 100 9.1 Troubleshooting Power up Problem Possible causes Possible solutions The system (or part of it) does not power up. Power supply problem Check relevant fuses and breakers. Check that the power supply cable is sound and that all connections are tight and free from corrosion. Check that the power source is of the correct voltage and sufficient current. Marine Monitors Problem Monitor is blank. Possible causes Possible solutions The monitor is in standby mode. Press the standby/power key on the monitor. The monitor has no power supply. Refer to troubleshooting Power up on page 92. Monitor shows Searching or No signal A repeat monitor during system start-up Wait for a couple of minutes and see if the problem clears. message. The monitor is set to an incorrect input channel. Press the channel select keys on the monitor to check all input channels. A faulty connection to the GPM400 processor Check the cable/connection between the monitor and the GPM400 processor. The GPM400 processor is not operating Check the GPM400 power supply. correctly. Refer to troubleshooting Power up on page 92. Check the GPM400 status LEDs. Refer to troubleshooting GVM400 LED indications on page 100. Monitor picture is out of proportion GPM has 2 monitors with different screen Ensure that monitors connected to a single GPM have the resolutions same screen resolution and aspect ratio. Monitor resolution is incorrect (display looks pixelated or stretched/squashed) GPM has 2 monitors with different aspect ratio G-Series Installation & Commissioning 92 Problem Possible causes Possible solutions The keyboard does not operate monitor setting SeaTalkhs network problem menus. On or more monitors are not listed when config-
uring the monitors or Nav Stations. Check the status of the SeaTalkhs Switch. Refer to troubleshooting SeaTalkhs Switch LED indica-
tions on page 98 Check the marine monitor and ensure that the network selector switch is in the up position (required when connected to the SeaTalkhs network). Check that the monitor and GPM400 are both connected to the SeaTalkhs switch. Check that SeaTalkhs cables are free from damage. The monitor is not a Raymarine G-Series unit. Only G-Series marine monitors are compatible with the SeaTalkhs network required for this functionality. Software mismatch between equipment may Contact Raymarine technical support prevent communication. Keyboards Problem Keyboard LCD is blank.
(Monitor may also show no keyboards connected message) Possible causes Possible solutions The Keyboard is not connected to SeaTalkng or Check keyboard wiring and power to SeaTalkng bus. has no power. Wireless keyboard is not charged up. Connect wireless keyboard to charge point. Keyboard LCD shows low battery Wireless keyboard battery requires charging Degraded / old keyboard battery requires Charge keyboard battery at appropriate charge point. Replace battery replacing Keyboard LCD shows sw version message. The Keyboard cannot communicate with a GPM400 processor Ensure GPM400 processors are connected to the SeaTalkng system. e.g 86/78 F64D V0.6A
(Monitor may also show no keyboards connected message) Wireless basestation is not operating or is disconnected from SeaTalkng. Check power and connections to SeaTalkng wireless basestation. Wireless basestation is out of range Re-survey wireless coverage and move / add repeat basestations if necessary. 93 Chapter 9: Troubleshooting Problem Possible causes Possible solutions Keypresses result in improper or no action at Software mismatch between equipment may Contact Raymarine technical support the display. prevent communication. Keyboard does not control the expected monitor Keyboard is not assigned to the correct Nav Assign keyboard to Nav station (see Assign Keyboards or Nav Station. Station(s). on page 78). Incorrect monitor is selected at Keyboard Check the Keyboard LCD to see which monitor is currently being used. Use the left/right arrow keys to select between the available monitors. Keyboard does not operate monitor setting Refer to troubleshooting Marine Monitors on page 92 menus. Radar Problem Possible causes Possible solutions No Data or No scanner message. Radar scanner power supply SeaTalkhs network problem Check that the scanner power supply cable is sound and that all connections are tight and free from corrosion. Check relevant fuses and breakers. Check power source is of the correct voltage and suffi-
cient current (using voltage booster if appropriate). Check that all radar scanners are correctly connected to the SeaTalkhs switch. Check the status of the SeaTalkhs Switch. Refer to troubleshooting Status LEDs on page 98. Check that SeaTalkhs cables are free from damage. Radar scanner fault Refer to the radar scanner handbook. Software mismatch between equipment may Contact Raymarine technical support prevent communication. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 94 Problem Possible causes Possible solutions Radar will not initialize Intermittent or poor power connection. Check power connection at VCM.
(Voltage control module (VCM) stuck in sleep mode) Switch at scanner pedestal in OFF position. Ensure scanner pedestal switch is in ON position.
(Voltage at input = 12 V, Voltage at output = 40 V) The bearing given on the radar window differs The radar bearing alignment requires Perform the bearing alignment procedures. (See Check from the actual bearing. correcting. and adjust bearing alignment on page 84). GPS Problem Possible causes Possible solutions No Fix GPS status icon is displayed. GPS equipment fault Ensure that the GPS is functioning correctly (refer to manufacturers handbook). GPS connection fault Ensure that GPS connections and cabling are correct. GPS antenna in poor position GPS installation problem Ensure GPS antenna has a clear view of the sky. Refer to manufacturers handbook for installation details. Geographic location or prevailing conditions Check periodically to see if a fix is obtained in better preventing satellite fix. conditions or another geographic location. 95 Chapter 9: Troubleshooting Video Problem Possible cause / solution Possible solutions Video picture is unavailable at some or all Nav stations. Video signal is not reaching the GVM400 video Check the video source equipment. module. Check the video connections to the GVM400 unit. GVM400 video module or power supply Check the GVM400 status. problem. SeaTalkhs network problem See troubleshooting GVM400 LED indications on page 100. Check the GVM400 power supply. Refer to troubleshooting Power up on page 92. Check that all GVM400 and all GPM400s are connected to the SeaTalkhs switch. Check the status of the SeaTalkhs Switch. Refer to troubleshooting Status LEDs on page 98 Check that SeaTalkhs cables are free from damage. Software mismatch between equipment may Contact Raymarine technical support prevent communication. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 96 Data Problem Instrument or other system data is unavailable at all Nav Stations. Instrument or other system data is missing from some but not all Nav Stations. Possible cause / solution Possible solutions Data not received at Master GPM. Check the data bus (e.g. SeaTalkng) wiring and connec-
tion to the master GPM. Check the overall integrity of the data bus (e.g. SeaTalkng) wiring. If available refer to the reference guide for the data bus.
(e.g. SeaTalkng reference manual) Data source (e.g ST70 instrument) is not Check the source of the missing data (e.g. ST70 operating. instrument) Refer to the manufacturers handbook for the equipment in question. Software mismatch between equipment may Contact Raymarine technical support prevent communication. SeaTalkhs network problem Check that all GPM400s are connected to the SeaTalkhs switch. Check the status of the SeaTalkhs Switch. Refer to troubleshooting Status LEDs on page 98. Check that SeaTalkhs cables are free from damage. Software mismatch between equipment may Contact Raymarine technical support prevent communication. 97 Chapter 9: Troubleshooting Fishfinder Problem Possible cause / solution Possible solutions No data source for the fishfinder. DSM power supply fault. Check the DMS power supply. Refer to troubleshooting Power up on page 92. Other DSM fault. Refer to the instructions supplied with the DSM unit. SeaTalkhs network problem. Check that the DSM is correctly connected to the SeaTalkhs switch. Check the status of the SeaTalkhs Switch. Refer to troubleshooting Status LEDs on page 98. Check that SeaTalkhs cables are free from damage. Software mismatch between equipment may Contact Raymarine technical support prevent communication. Invalid custom configuration message Indicates an invalid manual override of switch settings at the transducer Refer to your DSM and Transducer documentation for further information 9.2 Status LEDs SeaTalkhs Switch LED indications LED State (Connected channels only) Causes For all connected channels:
1 steady and 1 flashing green LED. No LEDs are illuminated Some LEDs are not illuminated No problem detected
(Steady LED indicates network connection Flashing LED indicates network traffic) No power to SeaTalkhs switch Cable / connection faults on the channels with non-illuminated LEDs. Equipment connected to non-illuminated LEDs may be faulty. G-Series Installation & Commissioning 98 GPM400 LED indications Color Operation Causes Normal operation Green Green Flashing 500 / 500 ms Flashing 750 / 250ms Warnings and Errors Off Amber Amber Amber Amber Off < 2 minutes Off for > 2 minutes On steady Flashing x 1 Flashing x 2 Flashing x 3 Normal operation (Heartbeat) Standby mode Startup No power Power on Lamp test No link between processors (network fault) No network / cable unplugged Over temperature warning Amber/Green Alternating 750/250 ms Bootloader awaiting to be upgraded or downloading code Amber/Red Alternating 750/250 ms DOBII Download. This condition remains until a valid application is available Red Red Red Red Red Flashing x 1 Flashing x 3 Flashing x 4 Flashing x 5 Flashing x 8
(May be followed by Flashing amber) from Flash Fan fault Over temperature error Flash write error No application programmed Hardware fault 99 Chapter 9: Troubleshooting GVM400 LED indications Color Operation Causes Normal operation Green Flashing
(various rates, depending upon system data) Normal operation Warnings and Errors Amber Amber Amber Amber On steady Flashing x 1 Flashing x 2 Flashing x 3 Power on Lamp test Acquisition failure No network / cable unplugged Other network error Amber/Red Alternating 750/250 ms Software upgrade. This condition remains until a valid application is available Red Red Red Red Red Flashing x 1 Flashing x 4 Flashing x 6 Flashing x 7 Flashing x 8
(May be followed by Flashing amber) from Flash Unit can no longer poll input status Flash write error Video stopped Video error Hardware read failure DSM400 LED indications Color Operation Causes Normal operation Green Green Flashing 500 / 500 ms Flashing 750 / 250ms Normal operation (Heartbeat) Standby mode G-Series Installation & Commissioning 100 Color Operation Causes Warnings and Errors Off Amber Amber Amber Amber Amber Off < 2 minutes Off for > 2minutes On steady Flashing x 1 Flashing x 2 Flashing x 3 Flashing x 8 Startup No power Power on Lamp test Input transducer No network / cable unplugged Over temperature warning Watchdog restart Amber/Red Alternating 750/250 ms Software upgrade. This condition remains until a valid application is available Red Red Red Red Red Flashing x 1 Flashing x 3 Flashing x 4 Flashing x 5 Flashing x 8
(May be followed by Flashing amber) from Flash Voltage error Over temperature error Flash write error No application programmed Hardware read failure 101 Chapter 9: Troubleshooting G-Series Installation & Commissioning 102 Appendix ATechnical specification GPM400 Processor module GPM400 Processor module 12 V / 24 VDC 10.7 V to 32 V DC GPM400 Processor module Dimensions:
Width = 335 mm (13.19 in) Height =230 mm (9.06 in) Depth = 125 mm (4.92 in), Weight 6.5 kg (14.33 lb) Data connections NMEA 0183 (x2) SeaTalk SeaTalkng SeaTalkhs Compact flash USB (software upgrade only) DVI x 2
(Optional VGA adaptor available) Stereo line out (rated 1 V rms) 12 V supply:
10 A fuse protection at distribution panel 10 A thermal circuit breaker protection at distribution panel 24 V supply:
4 A fuse protection at distribution panel 5 A thermal circuit breaker protection at distribution panel Video Audio SeaTalk / alarm power output 250 mA at 12 V CE approvals -
conforms to:
89/336/EEC as amended by 92/31/EEC, EN60945:2002 No external loads 3 A @ 12 V 1.5 A @ 24 V With external loads 5 A @ 12 V 2.5 A @ 24 V operating temperature: -15C to 55C (5F to 131F) non-operating temperature: -25C to 70C (-13F to 158F) relative humidity limit: 80%
water protection: drip resistant when mounted vertically Nominal supply voltage Operating voltage range Fuse / Breakers Typical Power consumption Environmental conditions:
Storage conditions for packaged unit:
Temperature: -25C to 55C (-13F to 158F) relative humidity: 75%
G-Series Installation & Commissioning 103 GVM400 Video module Video inputs Inputs 1-3: Composite video
(PAL 626 Line, NTSC 525 Line) Input 4: S-Video or Composite video Audio inputs Stereo audio line in (rated 1 V rms)
(associated with Input 4 (S-Video or composite) CE approvals -
conforms to:
89/336/EEC as amended by 92/31/EEC, EN60945:2002 GVM400 Video module GVM400 Video module Nominal supply voltage Operating voltage range Fuse / Breakers Typical Power consumption Environmental conditions:
12 V / 24 V DC 10.7 V to 32 V DC 12 V supply:
2 A fuse protection at distribution panel 1.2 A thermal circuit breaker protection at distribution panel 24 V supply:
1 A fuse protection at distribution panel 1 A thermal circuit breaker protection at distribution panel 650 mA @ 12 V 330 mA @ 24 V operating temperature: -15C to 55C (5F to 131F) non-operating temperature: -25C to 70C (-13F to 158F) relative humidity limit: 80%
water protection: drip resistant when mounted vertically Storage conditions for packaged unit:
Temperature: -25C to 55C (-13F to 158F) relative humidity: 75%
Dimensions:
Width = 237 mm (9.33 in) Height = 170 mm (6.69 in) Depth = 56 mm (2.20 in) Weight 0.8 kg (1.76 lb) Data connections SeaTalkhs G-Series Installation & Commissioning 104 G-Series Keyboard G-Series Keyboard Nominal supply voltage Operating voltage range 12 V DC (From SeaTalkngbus) 9 V to 16 V DC Power consumption
(standby) 1.5 W Environmental conditions:
operating temperature: -15C to 55C (5F to 131F) non-operating temperature: -25C to 70C (-13F to 158F) relative humidity limit: 95%
water protection: waterproof to CFR-46 standard Storage conditions when packed:
Temperature: -25C to 55C (-13F to 158F) relative humidity: 75%
Dimensions:
(width, height, depth) 297 mm (11.69 in), 98 mm (3.86 in), 46 mm (1.81 in) Weight 0.65 kg (1.43 lb) Data connections Approvals:
SeaTalkng SeaTalkng RF (requires wireless upgrade kit and sepa-
rate basestation) CE:
EN60945, EN300-440-2 FCC:
CFR47 PART 15 Other IC-RSS-210 105 G-Series marine monitors C B A D E G-Series marine monitors Nominal supply voltage Operating voltage range Power consumption
(standby) 12 V / 24 V DC 10.2 V to 32 V DC G170 - 7.6 amps at 12 V 3.5 amps at 24 V G190 - 7.7 amps at 12 V 3.6 amps at 24 V Dimensions - mm (in) Display A B C D E G120 - 12 inch 330 (13.00) 284 (11.18) 307 (12.08) 257 (10.10) 118 (4.64) G150 - 15 inch 380 (14.97) 315 (12.39) 357 (14.07) 292 (11.50) 118 (4.64) G170 - 17 inch 415 (16.34) 358 (14.10) 394 (15.51) 335 (13.19) 100 (3.94) G190 - 19 inch 454 (17.87) 389 (15.31) 432 (17.00) 366 (14.41) 100 (3.94) G-Series marine monitors Weight Video inputs Data connections G120 - 4.6 kg (10 lbs) G150 - 5.8 kg (12 lbs) G170 - 6.4 Kg (14 lbs) G190 - 7.3 Kg (16 lbs) 3 VGA 2 DVI-D 3 Composite video 1 S-Video SeaTalkhs/Ethernet Serial Port Native resolution G120 / G150: 1024 x 768 (XGA) G170 / G190: 1280 x 1024 (SXGA) Environmental conditions:
operating temperature: -10C to 50C (14F to 122F) non-operating temperature: -20C to 70C (-4F to 158F) water protection: waterproof to IP66 (from the front) Storage conditions when packed:
Temperature: -25C to 55C (-13F to 158F) relative humidity: 75%
Dimensions:
Refer to separate operators handbook for model dimensions G-Series Installation & Commissioning 106 G-Series marine monitors Resolutions and refresh rates Approvals:
See also VGA - 60,72, 75 and 85 Hz SVGA - 56, 60, 72, 75 and 85 Hz XGA - 60, 70, 75 and 85 Hz SXGA - 60, 75 and 85 Hz UXGA - 60, 65, 70, 75 and 85 Hz All timings in accordance with VESA Monitor Timing Standards CE:
1999/5/EC, EN60945:2002 FCC:
Part 80 (47CFR) and Part 2 (47CFR) For additional specifications, refer to the documentation sup-
plied with the individual equipment. 107 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 108 Appendix B - Nav Station schematic Plan the connections and arrangement of your core system. This information is required when commissioning. Nav station information Nav station name Bridge nav Nav station location Bridge Name Location Bridge - Left Bridge IP address (When on SeaTalkhs only) Display 1 Display 2 (if applicable) Name Bridge - Right Location Bridge IP address (When on SeaTalkhs only) Video connection (delete as appropriate) 10-2-0-14 DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO
10-2-0-2 Video connection (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO
Keyboard Serial number ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 02070016 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Location Bridge SeaTalkng Wireless (delete as appropriate)
YES / NO GPM400 processor SeaTalkhs switch GPM400 processor Serial Number 1006021 Location Left (switch cupboard) Serial number Location Serial number 1006024 Location Right (switch cupboard) Master GPM (delete as appropriate) YES / NO
Master GPM (delete as appropriate)
YES / NO D10029-1 109 If required use multiple sheets, as shown in the example system below. Nav station information Nav station name Bridge nav Nav station location Bridge Nav station information Nav station name Name Location Bridge - Left Bridge IP address (When on SeaTalkhs only) Display 1 Display 2 (if applicable) Name Bridge - Right Location Bridge Name Location Bridge - Radar 1 Bridge IP address (When on SeaTalkhs only) IP address (When on SeaTalkhs only) Video connection (delete as appropriate) 10-2-0-14 DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO
Video connection (delete as appropriate) Video connection (delete as appropriate) 10-2-0-2 DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO
10-2-0-20 DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO
Display 1
Bridge nav Nav station location Bridge 3 Display 2 (if applicable) Name Location IP address (When on SeaTalkhs only) Video connection (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO Keyboard Serial number ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 02070016 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Location Bridge Keyboard Serial number ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 02070016 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Location Bridge SeaTalkng Wireless (delete as appropriate)
YES / NO SeaTalkng Wireless (delete as appropriate)
YES / NO GPM400 processor SeaTalkhs switch GPM400 processor GPM400 processor SeaTalkhs switch GPM400 processor Serial Number 1006021 Location Left (switch cupboard) Serial number Location Serial number 1006024 Serial Number 1006026 Location Right (switch cupboard) Location Middle (Switch cupboard) Serial number Location Master GPM (delete as appropriate) YES / NO
Master GPM (delete as appropriate)
YES / NO D10029-1 Master GPM (delete as appropriate) YES / NO
Serial number Location Master GPM (delete as appropriate) YES / NO D10029-1 Example notes:
Bridge (Above) 3 displays all controlled by a single keyboard. Flybridge (Right) 2 repeat displays with a single keyboard. In this example system, the flybridge does not repeat the dedicated radar display used on the bridge. Nav station information Nav station name FlyBridge Nav station location Fly Bridge Name Location FlyBridge - Left Bridge IP address (When on SeaTalkhs only) Display 1 Display 2 (if applicable) Name FlyBridge - Right Location Bridge IP address (When on SeaTalkhs only) Video connection (delete as appropriate) 10-2-0-36 DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO
Video connection (delete as appropriate) 10-2-0-37 DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO
Repeat Repeat Keyboard Serial number ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 03070030 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Location Bridge SeaTalkng Wireless (delete as appropriate)
YES / NO GPM400 processor SeaTalkhs switch GPM400 processor Serial Number 1006021 Location Left (switch cupboard) Serial number Location Serial number 1006024 Location Right (switch cupboard) Master GPM (delete as appropriate) YES / NO
Master GPM (delete as appropriate)
YES / NO D10029-1 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 110 Nav station information Nav station name Nav station location Name Location IP address (When on SeaTalkhs only) Video connection (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO Display 1 Display 2 (if applicable) Name Location IP address (When on SeaTalkhs only) Video connection (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO Keyboard Serial number ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Location SeaTalkng Wireless (delete as appropriate) YES / NO GPM400 processor SeaTalkhs switch GPM400 processor Serial Number Location Master GPM (delete as appropriate) YES / NO Serial number Location 111 Serial number Location Master GPM (delete as appropriate) YES / NO D10029-1 Nav station information Nav station name Nav station location Name Location IP address (When on SeaTalkhs only) Video connection (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO Display 1 Display 2 (if applicable) Name Location IP address (When on SeaTalkhs only) Video connection (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO Keyboard Serial number ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Location SeaTalkng Wireless (delete as appropriate) YES / NO GPM400 processor SeaTalkhs switch GPM400 processor Serial Number Location Master GPM (delete as appropriate) YES / NO Serial number Location Serial number Location Master GPM (delete as appropriate) YES / NO D10029-1 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 112 Nav station information Nav station name Nav station location Name Location IP address (When on SeaTalkhs only) Video connection (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO Display 1 Display 2 (if applicable) Name Location IP address (When on SeaTalkhs only) Video connection (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO Keyboard Serial number ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Location SeaTalkng Wireless (delete as appropriate) YES / NO GPM400 processor SeaTalkhs switch GPM400 processor Serial Number Location Master GPM (delete as appropriate) YES / NO Serial number Location 113 Serial number Location Master GPM (delete as appropriate) YES / NO D10029-1 Nav station information Nav station name Nav station location Name Location IP address (When on SeaTalkhs only) Video connection (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO Display 1 Display 2 (if applicable) Name Location IP address (When on SeaTalkhs only) Video connection (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO Keyboard Serial number ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Location SeaTalkng Wireless (delete as appropriate) YES / NO GPM400 processor SeaTalkhs switch GPM400 processor Serial Number Location Master GPM (delete as appropriate) YES / NO Serial number Location Serial number Location Master GPM (delete as appropriate) YES / NO D10029-1 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 114 Nav station information Nav station name Nav station location Name Location Name Location Name Location Name Location IP address (when on SeaTalkhs only) IP address (when on SeaTalkhs only) IP address (when on SeaTalkhs only) IP address (when on SeaTalkhs only) Video (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA Video (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA Video (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA Video (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO Display 1 Display 2 Display 3 Display 4 Keyboard Serial Number Keyboard Serial Number ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Location ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Location Wireless (delete as appropriate) Wireless (delete as appropriate) SeaTalkng YES / NO SeaTalkng YES / NO GPM400 processor GPM400 processor SeaTalkhs switch GPM400 processor GPM400 processor Serial Number Serial Number Serial Number Serial Number Location Location Serial Number Location Location Master GPM (delete as appropriate) Master GPM (delete as appropriate) Location Master GPM (delete as appropriate) Master GPM (delete as appropriate) YES / NO YES / NO YES / NO YES / NO 115 D10575-1 Nav station information Nav station name Nav station location Name Location Name Location Name Location Name Location IP address (when on SeaTalkhs only) IP address (when on SeaTalkhs only) IP address (when on SeaTalkhs only) IP address (when on SeaTalkhs only) Video (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA Video (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA Video (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA Video (delete as appropriate) DVI / VGA SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO SeaTalkhs (delete as appropriate) YES / NO Display 1 Display 2 Display 3 Display 4 Keyboard Serial Number Keyboard Serial Number ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Location ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL Location Wireless (delete as appropriate) Wireless (delete as appropriate) SeaTalkng YES / NO SeaTalkng YES / NO GPM400 processor GPM400 processor SeaTalkhs switch GPM400 processor GPM400 processor Serial Number Serial Number Serial Number Serial Number Location Location Serial Number Location Location Master GPM (delete as appropriate) Master GPM (delete as appropriate) Location Master GPM (delete as appropriate) Master GPM (delete as appropriate) YES / NO YES / NO YES / NO YES / NO D10575-1 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 116 Appendix C - Spares and accessories Note: Parts marked with an asterisk * are supplied as standard with certain G-Series equipment. See Chapter 3: Packs and contents. Page 23 for details. Cables The following cables are available as accessories:
Description Part No. Marine monitor cables 5 m (16.4 ft) DVI to DVI (digital) cable 10 m (32.8 ft) DVI to DVI (digital) cable E06021 E06022 500 mm (19.69 in) DVI to VGA (analogue) cable E06053 1.5 m (4.9 ft) VGA to VGA cable 5 m (16.4 ft) VGA to VGA cable*
10 m (32.8 ft) VGA to VGA cable 20 m VGA to VGA cable SeaTalk R08130 R08174*
R08296 R08297 1.5 m (4.9 ft) SeaTalk/Alarm Out cable*
E55054*
SeaTalkhs cables 1.5 m (4.9 ft) SeaTalkhs network cable 5 m (16.4 ft) SeaTalkhs network cable 10 m (32.8 ft) SeaTalkhs network cable 15 m (49.2 ft) SeaTalkhs network cable 20 m (65.6 ft) SeaTalkhs network cable E55049 E55050 E55051 A62135 E55052 Description Part No. 1.5 m (4.9 ft) SeaTalkhs patch cable 5 m (16.4 ft) SeaTalkhs patch cable 10 m (32.8 ft) SeaTalkhs patch cable 15 m (49.2 ft) SeaTalkhs patch cable 20 m (65.6 ft) SeaTalkhs patch cable SeaTalkng cables / connectors 400 mm (15.75 in) SeaTalkng backbone cable 400 mm (15.75 in) SeaTalkng spur cable 1 m (3.3 ft) SeaTalkng spur cable*
3 m (9.8 ft) SeaTalkng spur cable 5 m (16.4 ft) SeaTalkng spur cable 1 m (3.3 ft) SeaTalkng spur cable (bare ends) 3 m (9.8 ft) SeaTalkng spur cable (bare ends) SeaTalkng T-Piece connector*
NMEA 2000 cables E06054 E06055 E06056 A62136 E06057 A06033 A06038 A06039*
A06040 A06041 A06043 A06044 A06028*
1.5 m (4.9 ft) SeaTalkng to DeviceNet male A06046 NMEA 0183 cables 1.5 m (4.9 ft) NMEA 0183 cable*
R08004*
Power cables 1.5 m (4.9 ft) Power cable*
R08003*
117 Part No. GPM400 internal Fan Assembly R08299 Description Audio/Entertainment 1.5 m (4.9 ft) GVM400 Audio cable*
1.5 m (4.9 ft) GVM400 S-Video cable*
3 m (9.8 ft) G-Series Audio out cable*
15 m (49.2 ft) G-Series Audio out cable Spare parts R08275*
R08274*
R08266*
R08298 Service and Maintenance This product contains no user serviceable components. Please refer all maintenance and repair to authorized Raymarine dealers. Unauthorized repair may affect your warranty. GPM400 processor module spares Description Part No. US Cartography Hard Drive EU Cartography Hard Drive ROW Cartography Hard Drive Hard Drive Cable R08267 R08268 R08269 R08270 COM Express CPU Module Assembly R08271 GPM400 Baseboard R08272 GPM400 Connector Panel Assembly R08273 Chart Door (encl. seal) R08002 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 118 GPM400 Main Fan Assembly R08300 SeaTalk NG Locking Collar (white) A06051 GPM400 Install Pack R08295 Keyboard spares Description Part No. Keyboard Sun cover Rear cover / mounting bracket Screw pack Wireless upgrade kit R08307 R08308 R08309 Keyboard Charge Cable 2.5m R08310 STNG Bulkhead Mounting Cable R08311 Battery pack Allen Head M3 Screws (4x) Mounting Plate Connector Cover R08312 R08313 R08314 R08315 Mounting Screws (self tapping) 3x R08316 Dust Cap Allen key R08317 R08338 GVM400 video module spares Description Part No. GVM Connector Cover GVM install pack R08276 R08318 SeaTalkhs Switch module spares Description SeaTalkhs Swtich Part No. E55058 119 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 120 Index Numerics 3rd party monitors 39 A Accessories 117 AIS checks 88 connection 53 Alarm cables 51 connection 50 Alarm buzzer 29, 67 installation 67 Alarm output 50 Audio cables 46 Audio output connection 46 Autopilot SeaTalk connection 50 AWG 36 B Bearing alignment 84 Breaker rating 35 sharing 34 Breakers turn on 70, 74 C Cable audio 46 charging 43 digital radar 49 gauge 36 general instructions 32 keyboard 42 NMEA 0183 52 power 35 routing 32 SeaTalk / alarm 51 SeaTalkhs 47 shielding 32 strain relief 32 types and length 32 Cable entry 58 Cables 31 spares 117 video/entertainment 46 Cables and connections 31 Cautions 7 Charging cable 43 keyboard 64 Check system 70 Chinese 82 Circuit isolation 32 protection 35 Cleaning 7 Clearances GPM400 60 Command Center Keyboard - see Keyboard Commissioning 81 introduction 13 Compass swing 82 Compass heading 82 Configuration 74 Connection digital radar 49 DSM 48 121 keyboard 40 monitor 38 NMEA 2000 55 SeaTalkng 54 Connections 31, 37 Contents pack 23 Current Master 76 D Danish 82 Dashboard cable 43 Data digital data 89 troubleshooting 97 Digital radar cables 49 connection 49 Digital sounder connection 48 Disclaimer 9 Displays - See monitors DSM400 connection 48 LED indications 100 Dutch 82 DVI 39, 46 E EMC installation guidelines 7, 32 English (UK) 82 English (US) 82 Entertainment cables 46 connections 43 Entertainment system 21 Environment GPM400 60 keyboard 61 keyboard - wireless upgrade 62 F Fastheading connection 52 ferrites 8 Finnish 82 Fishfinder checks 86 troubleshooting 98 French 82 Fuse 35 in-line 34 G Gauge cable 36 German 82 GPM400 checks 70 connections 37 installation 59 LED indications 99 master 37 pack items 24 power cable 36 Spares 118 specification 103 GPM400 processor 37 GPS checks 85 connection 49 SeaTalk connection 50 status icon 85 troubleshooting 95 Greek 82 Grounding 34 GVM400 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 122 checks 70 installation 66 LED indications 100 Pack items 25 power cable 36 spares 119 specification 104 GVM400 Video Module 66 H Handbook information 12 HDOP 86 High voltage warning 7 I Icelandic 82 Ignition hazards 58 Initial Setup 73 Initialize radar 83 In-line fuse 34 Install introduction 12 Installation warning 7 Installation and mounting 57 Instruments SeaTalk connection 50 IP Address monitor 39 Isolation 32 Italian 82 J Japanese 82 K Keyboard assign 78 cables 42 checks 70 connections 40 dimensions 61 installation 60 pack items 26 spares 118 specification 105, 106 troubleshooting 93 wired 40, 41 wireless 41 wireless upgrade kit 27 Keyboard Configuration 78 Korean 82 L Language setting 82 LEDs 98 Linearize the compass 82 Loads circuit 35 Local GPM 76 Location equipment 58 Loops ground 34 M Master GPM 37, 50 select 75 Monitor 3rd party 39 cables 39 checks 70 connections 38 123 power cable 36 repeat 38 Monitor connections 38 Monitors assign to a nav station 77 installation 65 pack items 28 troubleshooting 92 Mounting 57 alarm buzzer 67 GPM400 60 GVM400 66 keyboard 61 surface 58 N Nav Station 74 configure 77 typical arrangement 75 Navtex 88 Network SeaTalkhs 47 Network system 19 NMEA 0183 cables 52 connections 51 GPS 49 set up 88 NMEA 2000 connections 55 Norwegian 82 P Packs and contents 23 Parking radar 85 Patch cable 48 Plan your installation 12 Portuguese 82 Positive ground 7, 34 Power cables 35 distribution 33 Power supply SeaTalk / alarm output 50 Power up test 70 Powering up 74 precautions 69, 74 sequence 70 Power-up troubleshooting 92 R Radar cables 49 checks 84 connection 49 initialize 83 setup 83 troubleshooting 94 warning 7 Repeat monitors 38 Routing cables 32 Russian 82 S Schematic diagram 12, 32, 73 example 109 SeaTalk cables 51, 55 connection 50 GPS 49 SeaTalkhs cables 47 compatible devices 47 connections 47 devices 47 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 124 LED indications 98 Switch 47 switch checks 70 video connection 43 SeaTalkhs network 47 SeaTalkhs Network cables 47 SeaTalkng connections 54 keyboard connection 42 typical system 54 Wireless basestation 28 Select Master GPM 76 Setup initial 73 Shielding 32 Site survey 65 Spanish 82 Spares 117 Specification 103 monitors 106 Status icon GPS 85 Status LEDs 98 Status page GPS 85 Strain relief 32 Sun covers 7 Suppression ferrites 8 S-Video cable 46 Swedish 82 System checks 70 System overview 16 T Technical specification 103 Thermal breaker 35 Transmit radar 83 Troubleshooting 91, 92 Typical systems 15 V Ventilation 58 VGA 39, 46 Video cables 46 connections 43 set up 87 troubleshooting 96 Video output connection 46 W Warnings and cautions 5, 7 Warranty 8 WEEE 8 Wired keyboard 40 Wireless keyboard 41 Wireless basestation 43, 64 installation 64 pack items 28 Wireless coverage 65 Wireless upgrade installation 62 Wireless upgrade kit 62 pack items 27 125 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 126 Raymarine plc Anchorage Park, Portsmouth, Hampshire, PO3 5TD, UK Tel: +44 (0) 23 9269 3611 Fax: +44 (0) 23 9269 4642 www.raymarine.com Raymarine Inc. 21 Manchester Street, Merrimack, New Hampshire 03054 USA, Tel: +1 603 881 5200 Fax: +1 603 864 4756 www.raymarine.com
| 1 | Gseries Reference Part 1 | Users Manual | 1.98 MiB | May 02 2008 |
G-Series Systems Reference Guide G-Series System Reference Guide Document Number: 81276-1 Date: June 2007 Trademarks and registered trademarks Autohelm, HSB, Raymarine, RayTech, Sail Pilot, SeaTalk and Sportpilot are registered trademarks of Raymarine Limited. Apelco is a regis-
tered trademark of Raymarine Holdings Limited (Registered in all major marketing territories). AST, Autoadapt, Auto GST, Autoseastate, Autotrim, Bidata, Marine Intelligence, Maxiview, On Board, Raychart, Raynav, Raypilot, Raystar, ST40, ST60, Seaclutter, Smart Route, Tridata and Waypoint Navigation are trademarks of Raymarine Limited. Maptech is a registered trademark of Maptech. All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks (if applicable) of their respective companies Raymarine plc 2007 G-Series Reference Manual 4 Contents Chapter 1: System Overview ............................ 13 1.1 Hardware overview .................................................. 14 1.2 Display and keyboard .............................................. 15 1.3 Installing and commissioning ................................... 17 1.4 System applications ................................................. 17 Chapter 2: Operating Principles ........................ 21 2.1 Introducing Nav Stations .......................................... 22 2.2 Using the applications .............................................. 22 2.3 Displaying applications ............................................ 25 2.5 Simulator mode ........................................................ 29 2.6 Emergencies and warnings ...................................... 29 Chapter 3: Nav Station Setup ........................... 31 3.2 Monitor settings ........................................................ 32 3.3 Keyboard settings .................................................... 33 3.4 Setting language, date and time, and units of measure-
ment ............................................................................... 33 3.5 Local settings ........................................................... 33 Chapter 4: Using Waypoints ............................. 35 4.1 Introducing waypoints .............................................. 36 4.3 Waypoint list ............................................................. 38 4.4 Placing waypoints .................................................... 38 4.5 Navigating to waypoints ........................................... 39 4.6 Waypoint information ............................................... 39 4.7 Editing waypoints ..................................................... 39 4.8 Sorting the waypoint list ........................................... 41 4.9 Waypoint groups ...................................................... 41 Chapter 5: The Chart Application ...................... 43 5.1 Warnings and cautions .............................................44 5.2 Supplied cartography ...............................................44 5.4 Chart setup ...............................................................46 5.8 Heading and course information ..............................62 5.10 Showing and hiding waypoints ...............................64 5.11 Chart layers ............................................................64 5.12 Chart mode and orientation ....................................66 5.13 Chart view ..............................................................68 5.14 Chart detail .............................................................68 5.15 Journey planning ....................................................69 5.16 Measuring distance, range and bearing .................73 Chapter 6: 3D Chart .......................................... 75 6.1 Safety notice .............................................................76 6.2 3D chart requirements ..............................................76 6.3 Setting up the 3D chart .............................................76 6.4 The 3D chart view ....................................................76 6.5 Operation modes ......................................................77 6.8 Tuning the view ........................................................81 6.9 Using the standard and 3D charts together ..............83 6.10 Aerial photography overlay .....................................84 Chapter 7: Autopilot Integration ........................ 85 7.1 Emergency disengage ..............................................86 7.2 Enabling and engaging the autopilot ........................86 7.3 Autopilot Status Indicator .........................................86 7.4 The autopilot control screen .....................................87 7.5 Waypoint arrival ........................................................87 5 Chapter 8: The Fishfinder .................................91 8.1 The fishfinder display ............................................... 92 8.2 Background information ........................................... 92 8.3 Operating the fishfinder ........................................... 92 8.4 Explaining the readout ............................................. 93 8.5 Factors influencing the readout ............................... 93 8.8 Adjusting gain and power ...................................... 102 8.9 Measuring depth and distance .............................. 103 8.10 Fishfinder alarms ................................................. 105 8.11 Editing presets ..................................................... 105 8.12 Fishfinder configuration ....................................... 107 Chapter 9: Sirius Weather (US only) ...............111 9.1 Disclaimer .............................................................. 112 9.2 Weather application pre-requisites ........................ 112 9.3 Weather application setup ..................................... 112 9.4 The weather display .............................................. 113 9.5 Moving around the weather map ........................... 113 9.6 Placing waypoints .................................................. 113 9.7 Weather symbols ................................................... 113 9.9 Viewing data for a specific position ....................... 119 9.10 Animated weather graphics ................................. 120 9.11 Viewing weather reports ...................................... 120 9.12 Troubleshooting ................................................... 121 Chapter 10: Navtex .........................................123 10.1 Setting up Navtex ................................................ 124 10.2 Selecting message alert categories ..................... 124 10.3 The Navtex message window .............................. 124 10.4 Managing Navtex messages ............................... 124 Chapter 11: Radar ...........................................127 11.1 Radar setup ......................................................... 128 11.3 Radar range and image quality ........................... 131 11.5 Using waypoints with the radar ............................ 135 11.9 Radar range ......................................................... 144 11.10 Measuring distance, range and bearing ............ 145 Chapter 12: Automatic Identification System ..157 12.1 Background .......................................................... 158 12.2 System requirements ........................................... 158 12.3 System settings .................................................... 158 12.4 AIS setup ............................................................. 158 12.5 Using AIS ............................................................. 159 12.6 The AIS data display ............................................ 159 12.7 Displaying AIS vectors ......................................... 160 12.8 Displaying safety-critical AIS data ........................ 160 12.9 Safe zones ........................................................... 161 12.10 MARPA and AIS options .................................... 162 12.11 AIS alarms ......................................................... 163 12.12 Simulator mode .................................................. 163 Chapter 13: Video ...........................................165 13.1 Video overview ..................................................... 166 13.2 Setting up the video application ........................... 166 13.3 Using composite video on input 1 ........................ 166 13.4 Setting a name for the video feed ........................ 166 13.5 Selecting a video input ......................................... 166 13.6 Cycling through video feeds ................................. 167 13.7 Adjusting the image ............................................. 167 Chapter 14: Sirius Audio (US only) .................169 14.1 Using Sirius Radio ............................................... 170 14.2 Tuning to a channel ............................................. 170 14.3 Browsing channels ............................................... 170 14.4 Scanning channels ............................................... 171 14.5 Hiding or showing channels and categories ........ 171 14.6 Presets ................................................................. 171 14.7 Parental locking ................................................... 172 14.8 Favourite song alerts ........................................... 172 Chapter 15: Course Deviation Indicator ..........175 15.1 The CDI display ................................................... 176 15.2 Using the CDI application ................................... 176 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 6 Chapter 16: The Data Application ................... 179 16.1 The data display ................................................... 180 16.2 Using the data application .................................... 180 Chapter 22: Disclaimers and Licenses ........... 217 22.1 Sirius Weather ......................................................218 22.2 Navionics license agreement ...............................219 Chapter 17: Engine Monitor ............................ 183 17.1 The engine monitor .............................................. 184 17.2 Setting up the engine monitor .............................. 184 17.3 Available data ...................................................... 184 17.4 Engine monitor alarms ......................................... 185 Chapter 18: System Setup and Customizing .. 187 18.1 Page sets ............................................................ 188 18.2 Databar ................................................................ 188 18.3 Compass bar ........................................................ 189 18.4 Compass Setup ................................................... 190 18.5 GPS Setup ........................................................... 190 18.6 System-wide settings ........................................... 191 Chapter 19: CompactFlash Cards and Managing Data ................................................................ 197 19.1 Cautions ............................................................... 198 19.2 Card insertion and removal .................................. 198 19.3 Saving and retrieving data ................................... 199 19.4 Sending and receiving data from a personal computer 199 19.5 Password protecting your waypoints ................... 200 Chapter 20: Maintenance and Troubleshooting .... 203 20.1 Maintenance procedures ..................................... 204 20.2 Resetting the monitor ........................................... 204 20.3 Troubleshooting ................................................... 205 20.4 Getting technical support ..................................... 209 20.5 Navionics contact details ..................................... 210 20.6 Sirius contact details ............................................ 210 Chapter 21: Shortcuts ..................................... 211 21.1 System shortcuts ................................................. 212 7 G-Series Installation & Commissioning 8 Warnings and Cautions High voltage The system described in this book may form part of a marine navi-
gational radar or GPS-based system intended for use on (non-IMO/
SOLAS class) leisure vessels or small workboats. This handbook contains important information on the operation and maintenance of your G-Series system. To get the best results in operation and performance, please take the time to read this hand-
book thoroughly. For full details of installation and system integration, refer to the G-Series Installation Guide and the G-Series Commissioning Guide. Navigation Aid This product is intended to serve only as an aid to naviga-
tion. Use of specific features such as AIS overlay, radar, and various cartographic aids are meant only to aid safety and decision-making. These features cannot be relied upon as complete or accurate as their use and availability may vary locally. It is your responsibility to use caution, sound judgement, official government charts, notices to mariners and proper navigational skill when using this or any other electronic device. Product installation The display unit and scanner unit contain high voltages. Adjustments require specialized service procedures and tools only available to qualified service technicians -
there are no user serviceable parts or adjustments. The operator should never remove the display unit cover or attempt to service the equipment. Electromagnetic energy The radar scanner transmits electromagnetic energy. Ensure that the scanner has been installed according to the recommendations given in the relevant scanner hand-
book. Avoid looking directly at the antenna. Fishfinder sounder module Removing the transducer cable from the rear of the fish-
finder sounder module whilst it is switched on can cause sparks. Only remove the transducer cable after power has been switched off. Ensure that the sounder module is mounted where it is well ventilated and in an area free from flammable vapors. Water ingress This equipment must be installed in accordance with the instructions in the G-Series System Installation Guide. Failure to do so could result in poor product performance, personal injury and/or damage to the vessel. To prevent the ingress of water and consequent damage to the display, ensure that the chart card door is firmly closed. This can be confirmed by an audible click. 9 CompactFlash Cards Disclaimers Removing the CompactFlash card while information is being written to or read from it may cause damage to the card and loss of all data. Use the procedure detailed in this manual to remove the card. Do not save data (waypoints, routes etc.) to a Navionics card as the charts may be overwritten. When archiving use a different CompactFlash card. DO NOT use a metallic instrument such as a screwdriver or pliers to remove a card, as doing this can cause irrepa-
rable damage. Global Positioning System Antenna Do not connect or disconnect the GPS antenna from the display unit whilst power is switched on. Doing this may result in irreparable damage. UV Light To provide protection against the damaging effects of UV light, it is advisable to replace the sun cover provided when the display is not in use. Cleaning the display Take care when cleaning the display. To avoid damaging it:
Do NOT wipe the display screen with a dry cloth, as this could scratch the screen coating. Do NOT use acid, ammonia-based or abrasive products. G-Series Reference Manual 10 Electronic charts are an aid to navigation designed to facilitate the use of authorized government charts, not to replace them. Only offi-
cial government charts and notices to mariners contain the current information needed for safe navigation. The Captain is responsible for their prudent use. The G-Series and its charts do not therefore exclude the user from carrying the required official charts and documents. Raymarine does not warrant that this product is error-free or that it is compatible with products manufactured by any person or entity other than Raymarine. This product uses digital chart data, and electronic information from the Global Positioning System (GPS) which may contain errors. Raymarine does not warrant the accuracy of such information and you are advised that errors in such information may cause the prod-
uct to malfunction. Raymarine is not responsible for damages or injuries caused by your use or inability to use the product, by the interaction of the product with products manufactured by others, or by errors in chart data or information utilized by the product and supplied by third parties. Weather services All information presented by this service is advisory only. You acknowledge the risk of incomplete and erroneous information and assume complete responsibility and risks associated with this device, and accordingly release Raymarine, Sirius Satellite Radio Inc. and WSI Corporation from any and all claims arising from the use of this service. By using this service, you acknowledge and agree that you have read the terms of the subscription agreement for this service and agree to all of the terms contained therein. If you do not have the subscription agreement, you may view a copy on the internet at www.sirius.com/marineweatheragreement or call 1-800-869_5480 for a copy to be sent to you. About this manual Multi-media chart cards This manual describes how to operate your G-Series display in conjunction with Navionics cartography. It assumes that all periph-
eral equipment to be operated with it is compatible and has been correctly installed. The G-Series system comes pre-loaded with Navionics chart data. If you wish to use different chart data, you can insert Navionics chart cards into the Compact Flash slot on the G-Series system unit (GPM400). This manual is intended for users of varying marine abilities, but assumes a general level of knowledge of display use, nautical ter-
minology and practices. To check the current availability of Navionics chart card types and the latest feature sets, visit www.navionics.com or www.navionics.it Raymarine does not necessarily support all the features in particu-
lar Navionics cartography. To obtain Navionics cards, contact your local dealer or visit the Nav-
ionics web site. Technical accuracy To the best of our knowledge, the technical information contained within this handbook, was correct at the time of printing. However, Raymarine cannot accept liability for any inaccuracies or omissions it may contain. In addition, Raymarines policy of continuous product improvement may change specifications without notice. As a result Raymarine cannot accept liability for any differences between the product and this handbook. Raymarine does not support after-sales or technical support for Navionics chart cards. If you wish to file a report of an error or omis-
sion on a Navionics chart, please provide the information to the Navionics web site at the link below:
http://www.navionics.com/DiscrepancyReports.asp EMC conformance All Raymarine equipment and accessories are designed to the best industry standards for use in the recreational marine environment. Their design and manufacture conforms to the appropriate Electro-
magnetic Compatibility (EMC) standards, but correct installation is required to ensure that performance is not compromised. Alternatively, anywhere in North America call Navionics toll-free on 1-800-848-5896 Outside of North America, contact your local dealer or Navionics SpA on:
Phone: (+39) 0584 961696 or Fax: (+39) 0584 961309) When archiving data, Raymarine recommends the use of SanDisk CF memory cards. Other brands of CF memory card may not work in your G-Series system. Disposal Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive The WEEE Directive requires the recycling of waste electri-
cal and electronic equipment. Whilst the WEEE Directive does not apply to some of Raymarines products, we sup-
port its requirements as part of our environmental policy and we ask you to be aware of how you should dispose of this product. The crossed-out wheelie bin symbol found on a product signifies that it should not be disposed of in general waste or landfill. Please contact your local dealer, national distributor or Raymarine Technical Services for information on product disposal. 11 G-Series Reference Manual 12 Chapter 1: System Overview This chapter gives you an overview of the G-Series system components and features. Chapter contents 1.1 Hardware overview on page 14 1.2 Display and keyboard on page 15 1.3 Installing and commissioning on page 17 1.4 System applications on page 17 See also Operating Principles on page 21 for information about how to use G-Series system features. 1 1.1 Hardware overview The diagram below shows a G-Series system with one GPM400 and two monitors (second monitor is a repeater). Navstation 1 Monitor 1 Monitor 2
(repeater) SeaTalk NG SeaTalkNG Instruments/pilot CANCEL ENTER MENU CANCEL ENTER MENU and/or SeaTalk Instruments/pilot CANCEL ENTER MENU CANCEL ENTER MENU l G N k a T a e S Keyboard ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA OUT RANGE IN DODGE STANDBY PILOT OK CANCEL SeaTalkHS switch A G V
I V D A G V
I V D GPM 400 Alarm sounder GPS SeaTalkHS SeaTalkHS SeaTalkHS network devices SeaTalk NMEA 0183 Video/audio sources AV server Digital radar DSM 300 D9985-1 G-Series Reference Manual 14 1.2 Display and keyboard You access the features and functions of a G-Series system through Nav Stations, which comprise monitors and keyboards. This section gives you an overview of the controls in a Nav Station. For detailed information about how to operate the system, see Chapter 2:Operating Principles on page 21. ENTER ENTER 3 DEF 6 MNO 9 WXYZ 1 4 GHI 7 PQRS
. 2 ABC 5 JKL 8 TUV 0 SOFTKEYS SOFTKEYS PAGE WPTS MOB MENU ACTIVE DATA ROTARY CONTROLLER TRACKPAD OUT RANGE IN DODGE DODGE STANDBY STANDB Y TT PILOT PILOT OK CANCEL OSD CONTROLS OSD CONTROLS AUTOPILOT CONTROL KEYS AUTOPILOT CONTROL KEYS D10547-1 Keyboard controls Rotary controller The diagram above shows the layout of controls on a G-Series key-
board. If you have more than one monitor in your Nav Station, you can switch between monitors from the keyboard. You can also use the keyboard at different Nav Stations on your vessel. Power button Controls system power. For further information, see Controlling system power on page 32. Choose items in menus or lists. Turning the controller clockwise or counterclockwise moves the highlight down or up through the list of available options. You also use the rotary controller to select letters when you enter text and to set values on sliders. Trackpad Moves the on-screen cursor. The trackpad provides movement in eight directions. 15 Chapter 1: System Overview You also use the trackpad to navigate system menus: move up or down through option lists and press trackpad-right to select the next menu level if there is one. Softkeys Active In multi-window views, cycle through windows to make each active in turn. Active windows are marked with a red border. Press-and-
hold to make the current active window full-screen. A softkey is a button whose function changes according to your task. The current function of each softkey is indicated in the tool-
bar, the strip of softkey labels along the bottom of the monitor. Softkeys are color-coded with softkey labels. Data Open the data toolbar for the current application and access databar preferences. OK Confirm the selection of a highlighted list, menu or screen object. Cancel Press the cancel button to undo an action or keypress. For exam-
ple, if you make an incorrect menu or toolbar selection, press cancel to go back to the previous screen. Range Change the scale of a chart, radar or fishfinder view. Range in to decrease the scale (closer view), range out to increase the scale
(more distant view). Autopilot control keys If you have a Raymarine autopilot connected to the G-Series sys-
tem, you can control some of its features from the G-Series keyboard. Standby puts autopilot on standby. Dodge to be implemented in future Raymarine product releases. Pilot displays the autopilot control screen. Alphanumeric keys Edit waypoint data. Menu symbol Page Open the on-screen menu when using a Raymarine monitor. Switch to a different page view. Press-and-hold to configure page sets. Up/Down WPTS/MOB Select a different Nav Station if more than one is assigned to the keyboard. Place waypoints (WPTS) or a Man Overboard Marker (MOB) and access waypoint functions. Left/Right Menu Select a different monitor if more than one is assigned to the keyboard. Open menus for changing system- or application-wide settings. Enter Confirm a selection in the on-screen display settings menu. G-Series Reference Manual 16 Display controls If you have a Raymarine monitor you can customize display set-
tings, including choosing between day or night-time color palettes, using the G-Series setup menus. For information about how to do that, see Introducing Nav Stations on page 22. There are also controls on the front of Raymarine displays, summa-
rized below:
VGA 1/
Menu VGA 3/
Scroll UP DVI 2/
Scroll RIGHT Composite Video 2/
Brightness S-Video/
POWER Enter VGA 2/
DVI 1/
Scroll DOWN Scroll LEFT Composite Video 1/
PIP Composite Video 3/
Night mode D10548-1 Some of these controls are replicated on the keyboard and you can use them to adjust Raymarine monitors. 1.3 Installing and commissioning This book assumes that a G-Series system has already been cor-
rectly installed and commissioned on your vessel. If you are about to install or commission a G-Series system, see the following docu-
ments for more information:
Raymarine G-Series Installation Manual Raymarine G-Series Commissioning Guide 1.4 System applications The features and functions of the G-Series system are grouped together in applications. Applications included on the system are summarized on the following pages. 17 Chapter 1: System Overview Chart Radar 3D chart Fishfinder Locate where you are Interpret your surroundings. Monitor where you are going. Record where you have been. Navigate to a specified position (waypoint). Build and navigate routes. View details of nearby features & services. View details of boats equipped with AIS. Distinguish between fixed & moving objects. Measure distances and bearings. D9519-1 Display a 3D view of land, sea & features. Locate where you are. Interpret your surroundings. Monitor where you are going. Go to an existing waypoint. Navigate a route. Synchronize with the 2D chart. Identify fishing spots. See where the fish are. Identify underwater objects. View seabed structure. View sea depth and temperature data. Mark points of interest, like fishing spots or wrecks. 1
0 2 5 9 D 2
1 2 5 9 D Data Video G-Series Reference Manual 18 Detect landmasses & navigation markers. Detect and measure the range and distance of other vessels. Acquire targets and track them for collision avoidance. Navigate to a specified position View details of boats equipped with AIS.
(waypoint). View data generated by the system or by instruments available on NMEA 0183, NMEA 2000, J1939, SeaTalk or SeaTalk2
. View video images from on-board CCTV cameras, DVD or video player. 1 _ 5 2 5 9 D 1
7 2 5 9 D 1
8 2 5 9 D Course Deviation Indicator Navtex Engine Monitor Sirius Weather
'rolling road' in 3D perspective. View real-time display of your vessel on a Give details of any correction required to steer your vessel along a given course. View data about the distance and time to go until you reach a specified point. View engine data e.g. engine temperature, oil pressure, fuel level etc from up to three engines on a compatible engine system. 1
2 2 5 9 D 1
0 3 5 9 D Only available for the US. Superimpose historical and forecasted weather graphics on a world map. Determine conditions in your vicinity or at a particular location. View weather reports. 1 _ 3 2 5 9 D Automatic broadcast of localised Maritime Safety Information (MSI) Receive navigational and meteorological warnings, and search and rescue information. 1 _ 1 3 5 9 D Sirius Audio You can receive and manage radio broadcasts on the G-Series system using Sirius Audio (Sirius SR100 data receiver required). Autopilot If you have a Raymarine autopilot installed, you can make use of the pilot control features of the G-Series system. You can engage the autopilot from the G-Series keyboard instead of the pilot control head. 19 Chapter 1: System Overview G-Series Reference Manual 20 Chapter 2: Operating Principles The first section of this chapter introduces Nav Stations: the networked keyboards and monitors you use to operate the G-Series. The second section describes how you control the applications using the various buttons, softkeys, menus and toolbars. The operating principles described in this section apply to all applications. Understanding them will help you use the system efficiently. 2 Chapter contents 2.1 Introducing Nav Stations on page 22 2.2 Using the applications on page 22 2.3 Displaying applications on page 25 2.4 On-screen information on page 28 2.5 Simulator mode on page 29 2.6 Emergencies and warnings on page 29 All the applications included on the G-Series operate on the same principles. You set them up and use them using a combination of menus and toolbars. This section explains the general operating principles behind these various elements. Detailed application-specific information is given in the subsequent chapters of this book. The cursor In relevant applications, move the cursor over objects or areas on screen to highlight them. Once highlighted, the system recognizes that subsequent actions apply to the highlighted object. Use the trackpad to move the cursor. Standard cursor. 3 _ 6 6 3 7 D 2 _ 8 6 3 7 D 2
9 6 3 7 D WPT If the cursor is not moved for a while, a white circle is put around it to make it easier to locate. When you highlight an object, the cursor changes color. 2.1 Introducing Nav Stations A Nav Station comprises one or more monitors and associated key-
boards grouped at a particular location. For example, you might have one Nav Station on the fly bridge and one at the cockpit. The Nav Station is where you access the functions and features of a G-
Series system. Data is shared over the network and repeater monitors let you see, for example, the same information on the bridge as is available in the cockpit. You can control the system from either location. For information about managing and configuring Nav Stations, see Nav Station Setup on page 31. Monitors For each monitor, you can have a repeat monitor. This is driven by the same GPM400 as the first monitor, but would be placed at a dif-
ferent Nav Station to make information available at two locations. Keyboard A keyboard can be assigned to one or all monitors in your system, but can only control one monitor at a time. You can select which monitor you want to control from the keyboard. When a keyboard is associated with a monitor, this provides full control of the system. For more information about using keyboards with monitors and Nav Stations, see Keyboard settings on page 33. 2.2 Using the applications An application is what you open to use the features of the G-Series system. For a list of applications, see System applications on page 17. G-Series Reference Manual 22 Toolbars and softkeys A toolbar is a set of softkey labels displayed along the bottom of a display. Each label is color-keyed to match the corresponding soft-
key on the keyboard. Pressing a softkey can cause a new toolbar to appear, call up an options window or menu list, or trigger an action such as setting your vessel on a track to a selected waypoint. Some softkeys have sliders or pop-ups associated with them, where you make setting adjustments using the rotary controller or trackpad. It is useful to think of toolbars arranged in tiers. To access some functions, you need to go to a second or third tier. If you acciden-
tally press the wrong softkey, you can go back up a tier by pressing the CANCEL button. If there are tiers below a softkey, the softkey label ends with an ellipsis (). For example, pressing GOTO on the navigation toolbar opens the GOTO toolbar, giving you access to further options. Note: When instructions in this book refer to softkey labels, the ellipsis is not included. Setup menus Menus are where you make system- or application-wide changes. Pressing the MENU button opens the Setup menu. From there you can choose application setup menus or system setup menus. The application setup menus are context-sensitive: if you are in the chart application, for example, the chart setup menu is available. Setup Radar Setup ... GPS Status... Compass Setup... AIS Layer Status... System Setup... Alarm Setup... Display Setup... Databar Set... Select Page Setup... System Diagnostics... Remove CF Card Menus for the active application External equipment/
instruments System-wide menus 1
7 5 5 9 D For more information about the setup menus for each application, see the appropriate chapter of this book. For all other settings, see Chapter 18:System Setup and Customizing on page 187. To change a menu setting 1. Select the appropriate menu:
MENU Setup Cartography Setup Menu Chart Setup... Chart Display Detailed Cartography Setup... GPS Status... Compass Setup... Chart Grid Chart Text On On Chart Boundaries ON Spot Soundings ON 1. Highlight item, using:
1. Highlight item, using:
Trackpad
(up/down) or Rotary control Trackpad
(up/down) or Rotary control 2. Select item, using:
2. Select item, using:
Trackpad
(right) Trackpad
(right) 1
7 9 5 9 D 23 Chapter 2: Operating Principles 2. Change the setting:
Cartography Setup Menu Chart Display Chart Grid Chart Text Chart Boundary Spot Soundings Safety Contour Depth Contour Nav. Marks Detailed On On ON ON 66ft ALL ON Highlight or change value to new setting, using:
Trackpad
(up/down) or Rotary control OFF 7ft 10ft 16ft 20ft 33ft 66ft 1
9 5 5 9 D 3. Press OK to accept your changes, or CANCEL to go back to the previous screen. Dialog boxes Dialog boxes are where you edit or enter data into the system. They appear automatically at appropriate points. For example, when you edit a list of waypoints, a dialog box appears for you to enter or change waypoint names. To enter data into a dialog box 1. Select the appropriate field. e.g. Symbol Name Waypoint 1 Group My Waypoints Comment Highlight field to be edited e.g. waypoint EDIT NAME 2. Enter the data. Press OK to save the changes. OK e.g. Symbol Name Waypoint 1 Group My Waypoints Comment To change character or selection, use:
, To move to next character for editing, use:
or 1
0 6 5 9 D 1
1 6 5 9 D 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 if necessary. You can enter character text in upper- or lower-case but the system is not case sensitive: it considers WAYPOINT 1 to be the same as Waypoint 1. To use special or accented characters, turn on the Extended Char-
acter Set in the System Setup Menu (see page 192). G-Series Reference Manual 24 2.3 Displaying applications Each G-Series application is displayed in a window. The system can display up to four windows at once, on a single page. Page set Video Weather 3D Chart CDI Fishfinder Data Radar Engine monitor 2D Chart Page
(consists of 1, 2, 3 or 4 windows in various configurations) Window You can configure pages to contain the window or windows that best suit your requirements. You can also create page sets, each set comprising up to five customized pages, so that you can switch between different application views easily. or 1. Press MENU to open the system Setup menu. 2. Choose Select Page Set. Choosing page sets Page set configurations apply to the monitor on which you are working. You can display different pages on other monitors in your Nav Station. PAGE Press & hold To select a page set 1. Press and hold PAGE. 2. Select your preferred page set. 3. Press OK. Highlight appropriate pre-configured page set 1
2 3 5 9 D 1
5 3 5 9 D D OK 25 Chapter 2: Operating Principles None of the preconfigured sets includes a page for the engine monitor, weather or video applications. To configure a set that does, or to create a custom set for any combination of applications, see the Setup and Customizing chapter of this book. Selecting application windows When the selected page has more than one window, the window that is currently active has a red border. The toolbar applies to the active window. Selecting an application page Once you have selected the appropriate page set, you can choose the view you want to use. To view an application page 1. Press PAGE. 2. Either select the application page you want from the toolbar or toggle between the applications configured in the page set by pressing PAGE. 3. Press OK or CANCEL. Active window highlighted Soft keys associated with active window 2
7 3 5 9 D To change the active window 1. Press ACTIVE to toggle active status between windows (the red border moves to highlight the active window). To toggle between multiple- and single-window views 1. In a multiple-window view, press and hold the ACTIVE button to display the active window at full-screen. 2. Press ACTIVE once more to return to multiple-window view. G-Series Reference Manual 26 Panning and zooming In the appropriate application windows, you can pan and zoom the view to display a different geographic area (pan) or change the scale at which an area is displayed (zoom). Panning In the chart, 3D chart and weather applications, you move the cur-
sor using the trackpad. When the cursor reaches an edge of the screen, the view automatically pans to display the appropriate area. Zooming In chart, 3D chart, fishfinder, weather or radar windows, you can use the Range In / Out rocker switch to change the scale of the view. When you zoom in, you see a smaller area of the chart in more detail (large scale). When you zoom out, you see a greater area of the chart in less detail (small scale). The level of cartographic detail available at different scales varies. Some charts provide detail at smaller scales than others. If you select a chart scale that does not provide cartographic detail for your chosen area, the chart will use the most detailed level available for the surrounding area and stretch it to fit the selected scale. This means that you will never have blank or hatched areas on your screen. However there may be some mis-alignment of objects which cross the chart boundary in this area. 27 Chapter 2: Operating Principles 2.4 On-screen information Information is displayed on screen in a variety of ways:
Menus (see next page) Used to configure system to your particular needs. Status bar Gives information specific to each application. Cannot be edited or moved. Status icons Confirm status of DSM, GPS, AIS and scanner. Data bar Gives information associated with your boat or the environment. Customisable content*. Vertical or horizontal format*. Display or hide*. Normal or large size*. Data base lists Contain information you have added to the display's memory e.g. waypoints. Highlight an entry using trackpad or rotary control to display related information. Editable using soft keys. Pop-up messages Alert you to a situation e.g. alarm, function not available. Not editable. May require a response e.g. press ACKNOWLEDGE to silence alarms. Dialog boxes Enable data to be edited or entered into a store/list e.g. editing a waypoint.
* For details of how to adjust and edit the data bar, see page 188 Note: To change the size of the text on screen, see page 191. G-Series Reference Manual 28 MARPA ALARM Target lost (on screen) ACKNOWLEDGE D9533-1 2.5 Simulator mode The G-Series Display includes a simulator mode which allows you to practice operating the display without data from a GPS antenna, radar scanner, fishfinder (DSM) unit or an AIS receiver. Once enabled, you can use the simulator:
Before installation: connect the system to a 12V DC power supply, fused at 1 amp by attaching the red core from the power lead to positive (+) and the black core to negative (-). After installation while in a marina or at anchor. Settings made in simulator mode are not transmitted to other equipment. Incoming AIS safety messages are not displayed in simulator mode. To switch simulator mode on 1. Press the MENU button to open the Setup menu. 2. Select Simulator. 3. Select ON. 4. Press OK. 2.6 Emergencies and warnings You can use your G-Series system to mark the position of a man overboard, or to sound warning alarms in particular situations. Man overboard If you lose a person or object overboard and need to return to the spot, activate the Man Overboard (MOB) function immediately. The MOB function is available at all times, whatever application is running on the G-Series system. To activate the Man Overboard function 1. Press and hold the WPTS/MOB key for three seconds. The G-Series can also receive a MOB message from other equip-
ment on the SeaTalk system. Placing a MOB marker initiates a set of actions on the G-Series system:
Waypoint placed at your current position. Alarm sounds in morse, repeated every 30 seconds. Positional information including bearing, range and position are displayed in the databar. These are calculated according to the MOB configuration specified in the System Setup Menu. As-
suming that your boat and the MOB are subject to the same tide and wind effects, dead-reckoning normally gives a more accu-
rate course. Radar range set to 1/8 nm if in transmit mode. Navigation functions are suspended and no new GOTO or route functions are selectable. Motion mode set to autorange if radar/chart synchronization is set to OFF (see page 64). The chart application changes the motion mode to Autorange to display the largest possible scale of chart that will include both the MOB waypoint and your vessel. MOB message transmitted to other Raymarine equipment. Current position to MOB position is represented on screen by a dotted line. Note: To obtain a MOB position, you need either position or heading and speed data from a GPS (or equivalent) device. To pause a MOB alarm 1. Press any key on any instrument on the SeaTalk system. After approximately 10 seconds the alarm will sound again if the MOB function is still active. Pausing an alarm does not deactivate or clear the MOB state. Cancelling a MOB alarm Clearing a man overboard alarm has the following effects:
The motion mode in the chart and radar applications is reset. 29 Chapter 2: Operating Principles The databar mode is reset. GOTO and route functions return. To cancel an alarm 1. Press the ACKNOWLEDGE softkey. If an anchor alarm is silenced but the alarm condition persists, the alarm is repeated every 30 seconds. Note: If you have a MOB keypad fitted, you can also press and hold the MOB key. To cancel a MOB alarm 1. Press and hold the WPTS/MOB key for four seconds. Warning alarms You can configure the G-Series system to sound an alarm when it detects a hazard or a particular situation. When the alarm sounds, a message box is displayed to explain the reason for the alarm. For a full list of alarms available, see Alarm Setup Menu on page 194. To set up alarms 1. Open the Alarms setup menu. 2. Make your desired settings using the appropriate menu options. 3. Press OK to save your settings. Cancelling alarms There are two kinds of alarm: system and external. System alarms are triggered by G-Series applications, like the chart or radar. When you cancel a system alarm, the G-Series can-
cels the alarm and makes appropriate changes to the application that triggered it. For example, if the chart application sounds an arrival alarm, navigation to the next waypoint in the route starts when you cancel the alarm. External alarms are triggered by equipment that is connected to the G-Series system, but which is not part of the G-Series system. When you cancel an external alarm, the alarm stops but no further action is taken. You cancel both types of alarm in the same way. G-Series Reference Manual 30 Chapter 3: Nav Station Setup This chapter describes initial power-on and system setup procedures. Chapter contents 3.1 Controlling system power on page 32 3.2 Monitor settings on page 32 3.3 Keyboard settings on page 33 3.4 Setting language, date and time, and units of measurement on page 33 3.5 Local settings on page 33 3 3.1 Controlling system power The power button on the keyboard controls power to G-Series keyboards and displays. It also controls power to the radar scanners. RADAR 1 TX STBY RADAR 1 ON OFF RADAR 2 TX STBY RADAR 2 ON OFF MONITOR CONTROLS PWR Palette options Monitor power OSD controls D10549-1 To open the power control screen 1. With the system powered on, press the power button once. Note: The power button does not control power to the GPM400 unit. 3.2 Monitor settings If you are using a Raymarine monitor, the power control screen allows you to set the monitor brightness level and color palette. You can also control monitor power states. The power control screen Once power is applied to the system, pressing the power button opens the power control screen which gives you access to:
Power and transmit settings for two radar systems. Brightness and power settings for the monitors. Monitor palette selection. To adjust monitor brightness 1. Open the power control screen. 2. Use the rotary controller to set the brightness level you require. 3. To change the brightness of a monitor in a different Nav Station, press the rotary controller once and select the appropriate Nav Station from the list. 4. To accept your changes, press OK. G-Series Reference Manual 32 To select a different color palette 1. On the power control toolbar, press MONITOR CONTROLS. 2. Toggle to the palette you want to use on the PALETTE softkey. 3. Press OK. 3.5 Local settings The majority of functions, settings, and changes that you make on a Nav Station are detected by all the Nav Stations in the system. There are, however, some local settings that affect only the monitor on which you are working (and its repeater if there is one). 3.3 Keyboard settings These local settings are:
When a system is commissioned, settings are made which associ-
ate keyboards with Nav Stations and displays. This allows you to use one keyboard to control different Nav Stations or monitors (but only one at a time). Page set: selecting a set, name and applications configuration. The active window. The displayed panel in the digital data or engine monitoring application. To use the keyboard at a different monitor Radar and Fishfinder presentation settings. 1. Press the left/right arrows on the keyboard to select the name Radar VRM, EBL and wakes. Chart presentation settings when chart view is set to local. Show/hide waypoints, routes and tracks. Display Setup Menus. Databar on/off and configuration. Chart ruler settings. of the display you want to use. To use the keyboard at a different Nav Station 1. Press the up/down arrows on the keyboard to select the name of the Nav Station at which you want to use keyboard. 3.4 Setting language, date and time, and units of measurement All these settings are configured from the system Setup menu. To configure language, units, date and time format 1. Open the system Setup Menu. 2. Select the settings you want to configure. 3. Make the appropriate changes. 4. Press OK. Note: For information about to change menu settings, see Setup menus on page 23. 33 Chapter 3: Nav Station Setup G-Series Reference Manual 34 Chapter 4: Using Waypoints This chapter introduces waypoints and explains how to use them for navigation with the G-Series system. Chapter contents 4.1 Introducing waypoints on page 36 4.2 The waypoint toolbar on page 37 4.3 Waypoint list on page 38 4.4 Placing waypoints on page 38 4.5 Navigating to waypoints on page 39 4.6 Waypoint information on page 39 4.7 Editing waypoints on page 39 4.8 Sorting the waypoint list on page 41 4.9 Waypoint groups on page 41 4 4.1 Introducing waypoints Waypoints are used to mark points to navigate to, for marking loca-
tions for fishing and diving, and as building-blocks in routes. Waypoints can be created in any application and displayed on the radar, chart and fishfinder windows. They can be viewed on all the displays in a G-Series system. Radar and 2D chart windows A waypoint is represented on a radar or chart window when it is inactive or active (i.e. you are navigating to it). The waypoint symbol can be changed if required. Wpt 2 Wpt 1 Alternative waypoint symbols Active waypoint (boxed) 3D chart and CDI windows A waypoint is represented only when it is active i.e. you are navigating to it. Active waypoint Fishfinder window When a waypoint is created it is represented on fishfinder windows, by a vertical line labelled WPT. This symbology cannot be changed. WPT WPT WPT WPT Weather window A waypoint can be placed when a Weather application window is active but it will not be seen in the weather window. D9496_1 G-Series Reference Manual 36 4.2 The waypoint toolbar Pressing the WPTS/MOB button opens the toolbars shown below:
WAYPOINT AT WAYPOINT AT WAYPOINT AT GOTO WAYPOINT REVIEW AND EDIT CURSOR VESSEL LAT/LON OPTIONS WAYPOINTS Erase waypoints Sort list Set default symbol and group Set up default symbol/group Waypoint groups Edit default Erase groups View and edit details Move between groups Rename group Make new group Edit group name 37 Chapter 4: Using Waypoints D10550-1 WAYPOINT AT WAYPOINT AT WAYPOINT AT GOTO WAYPOINT REVIEW AND EDIT CURSOR VESSEL LAT/LON OPTIONS WAYPOINTS Place waypoint Goto waypoint Advance waypoint Stop goto Restart XTE D10551-1 4.3 Waypoint list Waypoint lists can be password protected. The details of all waypoints, irrespective of the application they were created in, are stored in a dedicated waypoint list which holds up to 3000 waypoints. All waypoints are placed in the MY WAY-
POINTS group by default. You can create new groups and change the default group. You can store waypoints on a CompactFlash card or transfer them to other NMEA-compatible instruments. If the G-Series system receives an active waypoint over SeaTalk or NMEA, it is displayed but cannot be edited. 4.4 Placing waypoints You can place a waypoint at:
The cursor position Your vessels position A point specified by latitude and longitude or Loran TD coordinates. G-Series Reference Manual 38 To place a waypoint at the cursor 1. Press the WPTS/MOB button. 2. Move the cursor to the waypoint position. 3. Press the WAYPOINT AT CURSOR softkey. 4. Press OK. To stop navigating to a waypoint 1. Highlight the waypoint. 2. Press the STOP GOTO softkey. or 1. Press the WPTS/MOB button. To place a waypoint at your vessels position 1. Press the WPTS/MOB button. 2. Press the GOTO WAYPOINT OPTIONS softkey. 3. Press the STOP GOTO softkey. 2. Either Press the WAYPOINT AT VESSEL softkey or press the WPTS/MOB button a second time. 3. Press OK. Note: If the system cannot determine your position, a warning is displayed and the waypoint is not placed. To place a waypoint by latitude and longitude 1. Press the WPTS/MOB button. 2. Press the WAYPOINT AT LAT/LON softkey. 3. Set the position for the new waypoint. 4. Press OK. 4.5 Navigating to waypoints This section explains how to start and stop navigating to a way-
point. When you navigate to a waypoint, the data is sent over the network and can be used by an attached autopilot. A waypoint being navigated to is known as an active waypoint. For detailed information on navigating with waypoints, see page 43. To navigate to a waypoint 1. Highlight the waypoint. 2. Press the GOTO WAYPOINT softkey. or 1. Press either the WPTS/MOB button or GOTO softkey. 2. Press the GOTO WAYPOINT OPTIONS softkey. 3. Select the appropriate waypoint from the list. 4. Press GOTO WAYPOINT. 4.6 Waypoint information Waypoints have information associated with them. You can view the details of any waypoint by either highlighting it with the cursor
(in radar and chart windows) or selecting it from the waypoint list. With the waypoint details open, you can edit the data and change its management options. You can also display navigation details for the active waypoint in the databar (see page 188). To view waypoint information 1. Highlight a waypoint with the cursor. 2. Press the EDIT WAYPOINT softkey. or 1. Press the WPTS/MOB button. 2. Press the REVIEW AND EDIT WAYPOINTS softkey. Note: Use the second method to view details for an active waypoint. 4.7 Editing waypoints The G-Series system allows you to edit and modify the followings aspects of a waypoints details. Change the waypoint name. Change the waypoint symbol. 39 Chapter 4: Using Waypoints Change the waypoint group. Add a comment. Move a waypoint. Erase a waypoint. Change the default symbol and group of newly placed waypoints. Changing the waypoint name, symbol or group When you create a waypoint, the system automatically assigns it a name, symbol and group. You can change these details and add a comment if required. This is particularly useful if you are managing a large quantity of waypoints. The default waypoint symbol is X. You can select different waypoint symbols to mark different types of position (fish or dive locations, for example). When a waypoint is active (being navigated to), the system highlights it by placing a red box around it. Alternative waypoint symbols available are shown below. Default symbol 1 _ 0 4 4 9 D To edit waypoint details 1. Highlight the waypoint or select it in the waypoint list. 2. Press the VIEW AND EDIT DETAILS softkey. 3. Select the field you want to change and press the appropriate softkey. 4. Make changes as required. 5. Press OK to save your changes. Moving waypoints Caution Moving waypoints If you move a waypoint that is used in a route, the new position will be updated within that route. Ensure that this does not present a navigation hazard. G-Series Reference Manual 40 You can move any waypoint except the active one. There are two methods of moving a waypoint: by entering a new set of coordi-
nates for it (under the VIEW AND EDIT DETAILS softkey), or by selecting and dragging it to a new position. To drag a waypoint to a new position 1. Highlight the waypoint. 2. Press the MOVE WAYPOINT softkey. 3. Use the trackpad to drag the waypoint to its new location. 4. Press the PLACE WAYPOINT softkey. 6. Confirm the deletion. 4.8 Sorting the waypoint list You can sort the waypoint list to make it easier to manage. This fea-
ture is particularly useful when you have a large number of waypoints. You can sort the waypoint list by:
Name (default) Range (closest first) Deleting waypoints You can erase any waypoint except an active waypoint or one that is part of a saved route. Note: If a route is hidden, its waypoints can still be displayed. If you attempt to erase a waypoint from a hidden route, a warning message will be displayed. Symbol Group name Date Comment Depth To erase an individual waypoint 1. Highlight the waypoint. 2. Press the ERASE WAYPOINT softkey. 3. Confirm the deletion. or 1. Open the waypoint list. 2. Press the REVIEW AND EDIT WAYPOINTS softkey. 3. Select the waypoint from the list. 4. Press the ERASE WAYPOINT softkey. 5. Confirm the deletion. To erase all waypoints 1. Press the DATA button. 2. Press the ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER softkey. 3. Press the ERASE FROM SYSTEM softkey. 4. Highlight WPT on the SELECT LIST softkey. 5. Select ERASE ALL WAYPOINTS. To sort the waypoint list 1. Press the SORT LIST softkey. 2. Press the SELECT SORT OPTION softkey. 3. Choose a sort method from the list. 4. Press OK. 4.9 Waypoint groups All new waypoints are automatically placed in a group called My Waypoints. To make waypoints easier to manage, you can orga-
nize them into different groups. When fishing, for example, you can choose to see only the waypoints in a fishing group that includes all your good fishing sites. A waypoint can belong to one group only. Waypoint groups are managed from the waypoint group list. 41 Chapter 4: Using Waypoints To open the waypoint group list 1. Press the WPTS/MOB button. 2. Press the REVIEW AND EDIT WAYPOINTS softkey. 3. Press the WAYPOINT GROUPS softkey. You can now:
Make a new group Deleting groups When you erase a group, the group name and all the associated waypoints are removed from the system. If a group contains one or more waypoints that you want to keep, move those waypoints out of the group before you delete it. You can erase any waypoint group, with the following exceptions:
Move waypoints between groups You cannot erase the My Waypoints group. Rename groups Delete groups To make a new waypoint group 1. Open the waypoint group list. You cannot erase a group containing an active waypoint. You cannot erase a group containing waypoints that are part of a stored route. To delete a group 2. Press the MAKE NEW GROUP softkey. 3. If you want to give the group a name other than the default, press EDIT GROUP NAME and set the name. 4. Press OK. 1. Open the waypoint group list. 2. Select the group you want to delete. 3. Press the ERASE GROUP softkey. 4. Confirm the deletion. To move waypoints between groups 1. Open the waypoint group list. 2. Press the MOVE BETWEEN GROUPS softkey. 3. Press SELECT GROUP A and select the group to move the waypoint from. 4. Press SELECT GROUP B and select the group to move the waypoint to. 5. Highlight the waypoint you want to move. 6. Press MOVE WAYPOINT FROM A TO B. 7. Press OK when done. To rename a group 1. Open the waypoint group list. 2. Highlight the group you want to rename. 3. Press the RENAME GROUP softkey. 4. Press the EDIT GROUP NAME softkey. 5. Enter the new name. 6. Press OK. G-Series Reference Manual 42 Chapter 5: The Chart Application The chart application provides navigation, hazard awareness and planning features. Use the chart applica-
tion to establish your position; navigate using waypoints and routes; record your progress; measure distance and bearing; overlay chart and radar data; view AIS data, and view aerial photography. For information about autopilot integration, see page 85. 5 Chapter contents 5.1 Warnings and cautions on page 44 5.2 Supplied cartography on page 44 5.3 Chart Overview on page 45 5.4 Chart setup on page 46 Navigation 5.5 Quick waypoints on page 50 5.6 Building a route on page 52 5.7 Tracking your progress on page 60 5.8 Heading and course information on page 62 5.9 Presentation options on page 63 5.10 Showing and hiding waypoints on page 64 Hazard awareness 5.11 Chart layers on page 64 5.12 Chart mode and orientation on page 66 5.13 Chart view on page 68 5.14 Chart detail on page 68 Planning 5.15 Journey planning on page 69 5.16 Measuring distance, range and bearing on page 73 5.1 Warnings and cautions 5.2 Supplied cartography The G-Series system comes preloaded with Navionics cartography. Depending on your region, different levels of cartography (Platinum or Gold) are available in different areas. You can also use Navionics chart cards. When chart cards are present, the system selects the latest cartography to display. US Europe Rest of world Always check that your route is safe. Use the Range key to zoom in to check for hazards that may not be visible on a larger scale view. Until you are familiar with interpreting the chart display, take every opportunity to compare whats on the chart display with your actual surroundings. Practice harbour and coastal navigation during day-
light hours and in clear weather conditions. You can also use simulator mode to help you gain experience with the unit. Before you use the chart application, make sure you have read and understood Chapter 4:Using Waypoints on page 35. CAUTION:
The Chart application is not a substitute for good navigational practice, nor does it remove the need for official government paper charts. Do not use the G-Series Chart application before you have read this chapter. Requirements 1. For full functionality, the chart application needs to be receiving position and heading data from your vessels Global Positioning System (GPS). 2. For your GPS and chart to correlate accurately with your paper charts, they all need to use the same datum. The default datum for the G-Series system is WGS84. If this is not suitable, you can change the setting in the Chart Setup menu (see page 46). When you adjust the datum of the G-Series system, a Rayma-
rine GPS will automatically correlate. If you have a third-party GPS, you need to adjust it separately. Refer to the instructions that came with your GPS for more information. 3. For the Automatic Identification System (AIS) to function you must have a suitable AIS receiver connected. 4. For full autopilot functionality, you must have a compatible auto-
pilot attached to your G-Series system. G-Series Reference Manual 44 5.3 Chart Overview The illustration below shows the components of a typical chart view. Chart orientation Motion mode Chart view Chart range Current position Carto-
graphic object Status bar Active waypoint Port Services Softkeys 3 _ 5 0 6 6 D Your position Your position is displayed in the data bar under VES POS. If head-
ing or COG data is available, your position is represented on screen by a boat symbol; if heading or COG data is not available, your position is represented by a solid circle. If your position is outside the area of chart currently shown in the chart window, the vessel symbol will not be visible. You can tell the system to locate your vessel and centre the chart display about it. To locate your vessel 1. Toggle to SHIP using the FIND softkey. The display tells you which orientation and motion mode you are in. For more details, see page 66. This puts your vessel on screen, as long as the system has a fix for your location. 45 Chapter 5: The Chart Application 5.4 Chart setup FUNCTION OPTIONS Navionics cartography comes pre-installed on your system. You can also use Navionics chart cards: in that case, the system uses whichever cartography is the latest. Vector Width Sets the width of the COG and HEADING chart vector lines. To suit your particular requirements, you can configure how the Chart application displays cartographic data. There are three ways you can change chart settings:
Record Vessel Track By Thin Normal Wide Auto System automatically creates track points. Time For track point creation by a specified time. Distance For track point creation by a specified distance. Time Specify time between track points. 2/5/10/30 seconds 1/3/5/10/30 minutes Distance Specify distance between track points. 0.02/0.05/0.1/0.2/0.5/1.0 nm Track Interval Option availability depends upon Record Vessel Track By setting. Datum See additional information below. WGS 84. List of datum provided. Chart Offset Corrects positional errors in cartography. ON OFF Datum The Chart application and your paper charts must use the same datum to correlate accurately. The default datum for the display is WGS1984. If that is not suitable, you can change it to one from the set provided under the Datum option on the Chart Setup menu. Chart Setup Menu. Cartography Setup Menu. Presentation softkey (see page 63). Changes are retained when you power off. To open the Chart Setup Menu 1. Press the MENU key on the display unit. 2. Highlight Chart Setup. 3. Press the right-arrow on the trackpad. FUNCTION OPTIONS Object Information OFF No info pop-up is displayed but detailed data can still be displayed by pressing OK. All ON Displays an information pop-up for all objects. Points ON Displays an information pop-up for objects selected with the cursor only. Vector Length Specify a time period for drawing COG and heading vectors. 3 Mins 6 Mins Infinite G-Series Reference Manual 46 If you have a Raymarine GPS attached, it will automatically update when you adjust the datum. If you use a third-party GPS, you need to update its datum separately. CAUTION: Changing the chart datum does not cause any waypoints or routes stored in the chartplotter to move on the display, although their latitude and longitude changes to reflect the new datum. When you add waypoints to the waypoint list, make sure they are referenced to the same datum. Chart offset and cartography setup This feature allows you to move the position of the chart to correct positional errors in the cartography. The adjustment is indicated as a distance north/west (+ve) or south/east (-ve) from your vessel to a maximum of 1000m. An indicator in the chart window tells you when chart offset is enabled. Restore chart offset to zero when you begin using a chart with the correct georeference. Please report chart errors to Navionics (see page 210). To change chart offset 1. Select Chart Offset in the Chart Setup Menu. 2. Toggle OFFSET to ON. 3. Press the SET OFFSET softkey. 4. Adjust the North/South and East/West offset values by pressing the corresponding softkey and using either the trackpad or rotary controller. To restore chart offset to zero 1. Select Chart Offset in the Chart Setup Menu. 2. Press the SET OFFSET softkey. 3. Press CLEAR OFFSET. To open the Cartography Setup Menu 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Highlight Cartography Setup. 3. Press the right-arrow on the trackpad. FUNCTION Chart Display The level of detail shown on the chart. OPTIONS Simple Detailed Extra detailed Chart Grid Grid lines of latitude and longitude. Chart Text Text appearing on the chart e.g. place names etc. Chart Boundaries The line indicating the extent of the chart. Spot Soundings Number on the chart indicating depth. Safety Contour Areas with depths shallower that the speci-
fied value are shaded in a darker blue than those areas with depths greater than the specified value. Depth Contour Set the interval for depth contours. ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 7ft 10ft 16ft 20ft 33ft 66ft
(Contour always drawn at or deeper than the selected depth). OFF 16ft 20ft 33ft 66ft ALL Hide Rocks ON / OFF 47 Chapter 5: The Chart Application OPTIONS FUNCTION OPTIONS ON OFF International US Roads Major coastal roads Additional Wrecks Extended wrecks data for new wrecks ON OFF ON OFF FUNCTION Nav. Marks Nav. Marks Symbols The set of symbology used for navigation marks. Corresponds to paper charts. Light Sectors The sector of light cast by a fixed beacon. Caution & Routing Data Marine Features Cables, nature of seabed points, tide station, current stations and port information. Land Features The cartographic features that are displayed on the land. Colored Seabed Areas In available areas (e.g. Portugal) this gives greater definition of seabed. Background Color The color of background water when there is no Navionics cartography. Business Services The symbols indicating the location of a business ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF White Blue ON OFF Aerial Photo Overlay The area displaying the aerial photo overlay On Land and Sea On Land G-Series Reference Manual 48 Chart scale Use the Range key to change the scale of your chart view. When you zoom in, you see a smaller area of the chart in more detail
(larger scale). When you zoom out, you see a greater area of the chart in less detail (smaller scale). The level of cartographic detail available at different scales varies:
some charts provide detail at smaller scales than others. If you select a chart scale that does not provide cartographic detail for your chosen area, the chart will use the most detailed level available for the surrounding area and stretch it to fit the selected scale. This means that you will never have blank or hatched areas on your screen. However, there could be some misalignment of objects which cross the chart boundary in this area. Alarms With the appropriate equipment installed and powered up, the fol-
lowing alarms may be triggered in the chart application:
System (anchor, timer, alarm clock and temperature) Navigation (arrival and off-track) Radar (guard zones) Fishfinder AIS Weather When an alarm is triggered, a buzzer sounds and a pop-up window describing the alarm and how to clear it is displayed. In some cases, appropriate action is taken automatically by the G-Series system. For example, following an arrival alarm, the next route leg is activated. To configure alarms 1. Press the MENU button to open the Setup menu. 2. Select Alarm Setup. 3. Choose the appropriate sub-menu. 4. For detailed information about alarm configurations, see Alarm Setup Menu on page 194. 49 Chapter 5: The Chart Application 5.5 Quick waypoints The GOTO softkey gives you access to simple navigation functions on the G-Series system and opens the toolbars shown below. FIND GOTO ROUTES TRACKS PRESENTATION Goto cursor Follow route options Route list Follow route Goto waypoint options Reverse and follow Waypoint list Sort list Goto waypoint You can place quick waypoints to navigate to from the default chart toolbar using the GOTO softkey. This lets you set a temporary way-
point at the cursor position and track to it. When you reach the waypoint, it is erased. The waypoint you set is also visible on the radar display. G-Series Reference Manual 50 D10552-1 The WPTS/MOB button gives you access to more waypoint func-
tions. For information about using it, see Placing waypoints on page 38. Note: To set up and store a route consisting of more than one waypoint, use the ROUTES softkey. Resetting XTE sets a new course from your current position to the target waypoint. To reset XTE 1. While you are following a route or navigating to a waypoint, press the RESTART XTE softkey. To navigate to the cursor position 1. Move the cursor to the appropriate position. 2. Press the GOTO softkey. 3. Press GOTO CURSOR. A waypoint is placed at the cursors position and data sent to the autopilot (if attached). See page 85 for more information. Stored waypoints You can navigate to a previously stored waypoint by selecting it either on the chart with the cursor or from within the waypoint list. To use the cursor to select a waypoint 1. Move the cursor over the waypoint. 2. Press GOTO WAYPOINT. To select a waypoint from the waypoint list 1. On the Chart application toolbar, press GOTO. 2. Press GOTO WAYPOINT OPTIONS. 3. 4. Press GOTO WAYPOINT. In the waypoint list, select the waypoint you want to navigate to. To stop navigating to a waypoint 1. Press STOP GOTO. (You must press STOP GOTO before you start a new GOTO request.) Resetting cross-track error Restarting cross-track error (XTE) is useful if you find yourself off track and want to set a direct course to the target waypoint, rather than returning to your original track. 51 Chapter 5: The Chart Application 5.6 Building a route Using routes gives you more flexibility and planning options than the goto feature. FIND GOTO ROUTES TRACKS PRESENTATION Show/hide routes Follow route options Build new route Review and edit routes Place waypoint Use waypoint list Save route Make route Save route Insert waypoint Follow from here Move waypoint Goto waypoint Follow (quick) route Sort waypoint list View and edit details Sort list by Place waypoint Use waypoint list Use cursor D10553-1 G-Series Reference Manual 52 Use the ROUTES softkey to create and manage waypoints that form part of a route. The ROUTES softkey gives you more flexibility than the GOTO softkey; you can build a route for immediate use or build and save a route for later use. A route can consist of new waypoints, existing waypoints or a com-
bination of both. You can build routes in Chart view, or by selecting waypoints from the waypoint list. Route name Sunday Trip Building a route in chart view The chart view lets you build a route from existing waypoints or by placing new waypoints. To build a route using new waypoints 1. Press the ROUTES softkey. 2. Select BUILD NEW ROUTE. 3. Position the cursor where you want to place a waypoint. 4. Press PLACE WAYPOINT. 5. Repeat steps 3-4 to build the set of waypoints needed for your route. Waypoint 6. Press SAVE ROUTE or FOLLOW (QUICK) ROUTE. To build a route using existing waypoints Route destination 1 _ 7 2 3 8 D 1. Press the ROUTES softkey. You can store up to 150 routes, each consisting of up to 50 way-
points. As you add each waypoint it is automatically assigned an index number corresponding to its position in the route. It is repre-
sented on the chart by whichever waypoint symbol you have specified. 2. Select BUILD NEW ROUTE. 3. Highlight the waypoint you want to use in your route. 4. Press USE THIS WAYPOINT. 5. Repeat steps 3-4 to build up your set of waypoints. 6. Press SAVE ROUTE or FOLLOW (QUICK) ROUTE. While a route is being built it is not active and does not affect Building a route from the waypoint list any current navigation. You can include a waypoint more than once in a route. You can create a new route when the route list is full but, upon saving it, you will be prompted to choose an existing route to overwrite. You cannot save a new route if any of the waypoints within it are currently active: make an active route inactive if it contains a waypoint you want to re-use in a new route. The way in which the OK and CANCEL buttons operate is dif-
ferent when you are building and editing routes (see below). To build a route from the waypoint list, you first need to place the waypoints you will need. To build a route using the waypoint list 1. Press the ROUTES softkey. 2. Select BUILD NEW ROUTE. 3. Press USE WAYPOINT LIST. 4. Select the waypoint you want to use in the route. 5. Continue to select waypoints until your route is complete. Making changes to your route If you make an error while building a route you can:
53 Chapter 5: The Chart Application Undo the last waypoint (chart view only). Delete a waypoint from the route list (waypoint list only). Abandon the route build. To remove waypoints from a route in chart view 1. Highlight the waypoint you want to remove from your route. 2. Press the UNDO WAYPOINT softkey. The waypoint and the route to it are removed from the screen and the cursor moves back to the previous waypoint. To remove waypoints from a route in waypoint list view 1. Highlight the waypoint you want to remove from a route. 2. Press REMOVE WAYPOINT. To abandon the route build completely 1. In chart view or in waypoint list view, press CANCEL. 2. Confirm by pressing YES. Saving your route Once you have built your route, you can:
Save and immediately follow the built route. Save the route for later use (and rename it if required). A route that is saved and immediately followed is referred to as a Quick Route. If a Quick Route already exists, it is overwritten unless you rename it (see page 58). To save a route 1. Press the SAVE ROUTE softkey. 2. To assign the route a name and color, press the appropriate softkey; press OK to accept the defaults. G-Series Reference Manual 54 Following routes FIND GOTO ROUTES TRACKS PRESENTATION Route list Route on chart show/hide Waypoint index on/off Show/hide routes Follow route options Build new route Sort list by Review and edit routes Follow route Reverse and follow You select a route to follow either by highlighting it with the cursor or by selecting it within the routes list. When you begin to follow a route it becomes active and is shown on all chart windows and on all Nav Stations. To select a route to follow with the cursor 1. Move the cursor over either the route line or waypoint symbol. 2. Press the FOLLOW THIS ROUTE or FOLLOW FROM HERE softkey. To select a route to follow in the routes list 1. Press either the GOTO or ROUTES softkey. 2. Press the FOLLOW ROUTE OPTIONS softkey. 3. On the Route List menu, select the route you want to follow. 4. Press the FOLLOW ROUTE or REVERSE AND FOLLOW softkey. To stop following a route 1. Press the STOP FOLLOW softkey. D10554-1 55 Chapter 5: The Chart Application This is useful if you find yourself off course and want to go straight to your target, rather than get back onto the original track. Although RESTART XTE causes your vessel to change course, it does not affect the saved route. To restart cross-track error 1. With a route active, press the RESTART XTE softkey. Arriving at a waypoint When the distance to the next waypoint in the route is less than that specified for the arrival alarm radius (see page 194), or your boat reaches the closest point of approach to the target (defined by a line passing through the waypoint and perpendicular to the route leg), a warning dialog is displayed and an alarm sounds (see page 48). When you acknowledge the alarm, the system selects the next waypoint in the route and begins navigating to it. Follow in reverse order This option reverses the waypoint order (the last waypoint in the route becomes the first) and renumbers the waypoints accordingly. The route name moves to the reassigned first waypoint and then the system automatically activates the reverse-follow route function. Advance waypoints You can tell the system to ignore the next waypoint in your route, and advance directly to the waypoint after it. To skip the next waypoint 1. Highlight the route with the cursor, or press the GOTO softkey. 2. Press the ADVANCE WAYPOINT softkey. Note: If the next waypoint is also the last in the route, pressing ADVANCE WAYPOINT takes you to the first waypoint in the route. Cross-track error Resetting the cross-track error (XTE) produces a new course from your position to the target waypoint. G-Series Reference Manual 56 Editing routes When you have built and saved a route, you can make updates or changes to it if necessary. FIND GOTO ROUTES TRACKS PRESENTATION Show/hide routes Follow route options Build new route Review and edit routes Route list Erase route Amend route course Route details Place waypoint Edit name and color Route name Edit route Edit color Time ETA/hours SOG actual/planned Set SOG 57 Chapter 5: The Chart Application D10555-1 You can edit a route in a variety of ways. You can:
To create and add a new waypoint Change the course of a route. Change the name of a route. Change the color of a route. Erase a route. To select the route to edit 1. Highlight the route on the chart display using the cursor. 2. Press the REVIEW AND EDIT THIS ROUTE softkey. or 1. Open the Routes List by pressing ROUTES followed by the REVIEW AND EDIT ROUTES softkey. Editing active routes An active route is one that the system is currently following. All parts of an active route can be edited, except for the current tar-
get waypoint. If a waypoint becomes active (becomes the waypoint you are navigating to) while you are editing it, the system cancels the edit and the waypoints details remain as originally set. Adding waypoints You can add existing waypoints to the route, or set up new way-
points and add them to the route. To add an existing waypoint to the route 1. Press the AMEND ROUTE COURSE softkey. 2. Press the USE WAYPOINT LIST softkey. 3. In the right-hand column, highlight the position for the added waypoint. In the left-hand column, highlight the waypoint you want to add to the list. 4. 5. Press the INSERT WAYPOINT softkey. 6. Press the SAVE ROUTE softkey. G-Series Reference Manual 58 1. Highlight the route you want to add a waypoint to. 2. Press the INSERT WAYPOINT softkey. 3. Move the cursor to the position of the new waypoint. 4. Press PLACE WAYPOINT. Moving waypoints When you move a waypoint, its new position is updated in all routes that use it. To move a waypoint 1. Highlight the waypoint you want to move. 2. Press the MOVE WAYPOINT softkey. 3. Drag the waypoint to its new position. 4. Press OK. Removing waypoints You can remove a waypoint from a route, as long as it is not part of another route. If you try to remove a waypoint that is used in another route, the system will warn you that it cannot be removed. To remove a waypoint 1. Highlight the waypoint you want to remove. 2. Press the REMOVE WAYPOINT softkey. Changing a routes name or color If you have many routes stored in your system, it can be useful to give them individual names or mark them with a color of your choice. If the route was saved by the G-Series system with the name Quick Route, changing its name will prevent it being overwritten by your next quick route. To change a routes name or color 1. Select the route you want to edit. 2. Press the EDIT NAME AND COLOR softkey. 3. Select EDIT NAME or EDIT COLOR. 4. Make your desired changes to the routes details. 5. Press OK. Erasing a route You can delete any route in your system except for the one that you are following. When you erase a route the system deletes way-
points that are used by that route only. Waypoints that are used by other routes are not deleted. To erase a route 1. Select the route you want to delete. 2. Press the ERASE ROUTE softkey. You can also erase all or selected routes, using the ARCHIVE &
TRANSFER function. Timed routes Details of all the routes you create are held in the Route List. You can use the route list, in conjunction with the TIME and SOG options, to display journey time in hours or as an ETA, and the SOG as actual or planned. If the route is active, the data is updated to show bearing, distance and time from your current position. To view TIME and SOG data 1. Select a route with the cursor or from the Routes List. 2. Press the ROUTE DETAILS softkey. 3. Toggle the TIME and SOG settings as required on the appro-
priate softkeys. 59 Chapter 5: The Chart Application 5.7 Tracking your progress The TRACKS softkey opens the toolbars shown below. FIND GOTO ROUTES TRACKS PRESENTATION Show/hide tracks Create route from track Start track Review and edit tracks Track list Track list Track starts Track list Stop track Discard track Save track Cancel stop command About tracks A track is a line that shows the course of your journey. With tracks enabled, the G-Series system stores track points as you progress and automatically joins them up on screen to create the track. You can save the track to review your journey at a later date or to retrace it. You can convert a track to a route, enabling its use with the navigation options of the chart application. You can save up to 15 tracks in the system, with 3000 track points in each. G-Series Reference Manual 60 D10556-1 You can personalize track options to suit your requirements:
Rename a track. Change the color of a track. Specify the time between track points. Specify the distance between track points. Note: The smaller the track interval, the more points a track will use. Creating a track Note: If the power fails while a track is being recorded, or if the position fix is lost, a break will occur in the track. Only the last contiguous segment of a track can be converted into a route. CAUTION: Before following the route, ensure that it is safe for navigation, noting that it may deviate from your actual path travelled. To create a route from the current track This method will take a snapshot of the track to date, convert it to a route and then continue laying the track:
There is a maximum number of tracking points that can be stored by the G-Series system. It will warn you if your track uses the maxi-
mum number of track points and, if you continue to record your track, start to overwrite the earliest track points with newer ones. 1. Highlight the track with the cursor. 2. Press the CREATE ROUTE FROM TRACK softkey. 3. Press YES to give the route a name or NO to store the route with the next default route number. To start recording a track 1. Press the TRACKS softkey. 2. Press the START TRACK softkey. To stop recording a track 1. Press the TRACKS softkey. 2. Press STOP TRACK. 3. Choose between SAVE TRACK and DISCARD TRACK. Creating a route from a track When a track is converted to a route, the system recreates the course of your recorded journey using the minimum number of waypoints. Each waypoint created is saved with the depth and temperature data (if applicable) for that position. On completion, the maximum deviation of the route from the recorded track is displayed and the new route is added to the route list. You can use it in the same way as all your other routes. To create a route from a saved track 1. Press the TRACKS softkey. 2. Press the CREATE ROUTE FROM TRACK softkey to open the Track List. 3. Select the track you want to convert. 4. Press CREATE ROUTE FROM TRACK again. Editing and deleting tracks To change the name and color of a track, or to delete a stored track, you need to use the Review and Edit Tracks function. First you select the track to edit or delete, then you make the changes you want. To select a track for editing 1. Highlight the track to edit on screen. 2. Press the REVIEW AND EDIT TRACKS softkey. or 1. Open the Track List by pressing the TRACKS softkey followed by the REVIEW AND EDIT TRACKS softkey. 61 Chapter 5: The Chart Application You can now choose to edit the name and color of the track, or to delete it from the system. For the wind arrows feature to work, you must have a wind instru-
ment enabled. For tide arrows, you need a GPS and speed through water instrument. 5.8 Heading and course information To use graphical indicators (arrows) 1. Press the DATA button. 2. Press the CHART VECTORS softkey. 3. Toggle graphical indicators to the required setting on the appro-
priate softkeys. You can display a variety of graphical indicators to help monitor your progress:
HDG vector COG vector Wind arrow Tide arrow Course deviation indicator Heading and course-over-ground vectors Your vessels heading (HDG) is displayed as a line with an open arrow head. It does not take account of winds or tides. The course over ground (COG) indicator shows your vessels actual course. It is displayed as a line with two open arrow heads. The length of these lines is determined by the distance your boat will travel in the time you have specified (3 mins, 6 mins or infinite) in the Chart Setup Menu (see page 46) at the current speed. Any times that you specify apply to all chart views and if INFINITE is selected the vector will extend to the edge of the chart window. Note: If either the speed over ground or heading data are unavail-
able, vectors cannot be displayed. Wind and tide arrows Wind and tides are displayed as lines with solid arrow heads in the direction of the wind or tidal set. Wind arrows point into your boat and tidal arrows point away. The width of the arrow indicates strength. G-Series Reference Manual 62 5.9 Presentation options The PRESENTATION softkey gives you control over how data is displayed on a chart window. It opens the toolbars shown below. FIND GOTO ROUTES TRACKS PRESENTATION Show/hide waypoints Show waypoints Chart layers Show by sym/group Aerial overlay On chart show/hide Radar overlay Waypoint name on/off Chart type Chart symbology Chart mode and orientation Chart view local/system Declutter on/off Find Chart sync AIS Range rings 3D locator Orientation Motion mode Vessel offset 63 Chapter 5: The Chart Application D10557-1 5.10 Showing and hiding waypoints Radar overlay This option lets you specify which waypoints are displayed on the screen. You can show all waypoints, or display them by symbol or group. The latter options are useful if you have many waypoints placed in a small area, which can clutter the chart. Note: The show/hide status of a waypoint is a local setting and will therefore only affect the individual display on which you are working. To show or hide waypoints by group or symbol 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Press SHOW/HIDE WAYPOINTS. 3. Toggle between SYM and GROUP on the SHOW BY softkey. 4. Select the relevant group and toggle its setting to SHOW or HIDE on the ON CHART softkey. To show or hide waypoint names 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Press SHOW/HIDE WAYPOINTS. 3. Toggle to the required setting with the WAYPOINT NAME softkey. To show or hide waypoint index numbers 1. Press the ROUTES softkey. 2. Press SHOW/HIDE ROUTES. 3. Toggle settings with the WAYPOINT INDEX softkey. 5.11 Chart layers You can overlay data onto a chart window to give greater depth of information. You can overlay radar, AIS or range rings. Overlaying the chart image with radar data allows for better distinc-
tion between stationary and moving objects. For best results, switch on radar-chart synchronization. You can customize the opacity setting for the overlaid image by twisting the rotary controller. If you have two radar scanners installed, select which one you want to use for the overlay in the setup menu. Note: A radar image cannot be overlaid onto a chart window if dual-range is enabled in the radar application. To switch radar overlay on or off 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Press CHART LAYERS. 3. Toggle radar overlay on or off with the RADAR OVERLAY softkey. To access radar and navigation options from the chart application 1. Press OK twice. 2. Select RADAR options or NAVIGATION OPTIONS with the appropriate softkey. Using radar with the chart You can combine the chart view with the following radar features:
Radar range synchronization MARPA Radar overlay Synchronizing chart scale with radar range When synchronization is switched on:
The radar range changes to match the chart scale. G-Series Reference Manual 64 Sync is indicated in the top left-hand corner of the chart window. Target display Change range (using the Range button) If you change the radar range in any radar window, all synchro-
nized chart views change scale to match. Navigation options:
If you change the scale of a chart window, all radar windows change range to match. To set radar range synchronization 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. Route Track AIS 2. Press the CHART MODE AND ORIENTATION softkey. 3. Select the appropriate synchronization mode on the CHART If you have an automatic identification system (AIS) fitted to your vessel, you can use it to:
Display the position of other craft which are appropriately en-
abled with AIS. Display broadcast AIS information from appropriately-equipped vessels including position, course, speed, rate of turn and other safety-critical data. Set up a safe zone around your vessel. Receive AIS alarms and safety-related messages. This information is displayed in an overlay. Additional data, when available, is displayed in a dialog box. SYNC softkey. Note: Radar range synchronization is not available when the chart motion mode is set to Autorange. The chart can be synchro-
nized with either the 3D chart or the radar but not both. You cannot sync with radar if dual range is enabled in the radar application. Viewing MARPA targets on the chart The Mini Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (MARPA) function is used for target tracking and risk analysis. Although set up in radar mode or radar overlay, all MARPA targets are displayed in the chart win-
dow, from which you can also access MARPA functions. For detailed information about MARPA, see page 152. To access MARPA controls from the chart application 1. Highlight a MARPA target with the cursor. or 1. If radar overlay is switched on, press the RADAR OPTIONS softkey. 2. Press the TARGET TRACKING softkey. Radar options:
Target tracking Gain 65 Chapter 5: The Chart Application Heading Large vessel Direction of turn Small vessel Sleeping target 097T 11.6kt 1.237nm 00h04m33s 5.12 Chart mode and orientation Mode settings control how the chart displays information. You can synchronize the chart display with the radar application; set how movement is represented; set the position of your vessels repre-
sentation on-screen, and choose your preferred chart orientation. Find This is a shortcut softkey that has the same effect as the FIND key on the default toolbar. It centers the chart display on either the cur-
sor or your vessel. Safety critical data COG/SOG vector Safe zone (defined by distance or time) Dangerous target (flashes) 1 _ 6 5 0 9 D Orientation For more information about how to use AIS, see Chapter 12:Auto-
matic Identification System on page 157. To switch AIS overlay on or off 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Press CHART LAYERS. 3. Toggle the AIS LAYER setting to ON or OFF. Range rings Range rings give you an incremental representation of distance from your vessel to help you judge distances at a glance. The rings are always centred on your vessel, and the scale varies to suit your current zoom setting. Each ring is labelled with the distance from your vessel. Orientation settings control the way the chart is drawn in relation to your vessels position and course. North Up (N-up) In North Up mode, the chart is static and oriented with true north upwards. As your heading changes, the boat symbol rotates accordingly. This is the default mode. Heading Up (H-up) In Heading Up mode, the on-screen representation of your vessel remains static, with your current heading facing upwards. When you change heading, the chart rotates accordingly. You cannot select Head Up when the motion mode is set to True. To prevent continual chart rotations as the boat yaws, the chart will only update when your heading changes by at least 10 degrees. To turn range rings on or off 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Press the CHART LAYERS softkey. 3. Select RANGE RINGS ON/OFF. G-Series Reference Manual 66 Course Up (C-UP) Relative motion The default motion mode is relative motion. In this mode, the chart is redrawn relative to your position as you make progress, so that your vessel is always shown in the same place on the screen. The position in which your boat is shown on-screen can be altered with the vessel offset option. True motion (TM) When the motion mode is set to true motion, the chart view remains static and your vessel is shown moving across it as you make progress. As your position approaches the edge of the screen, the chart display is redrawn to include the area ahead of you. You cannot select True Motion when the orientation is set to Head Up. Autorange Autorange selects and maintains the largest possible scale of chart that will display both your vessel and your target waypoint. Autor-
ange is not available if radar-chart synchronization is on. Relative motion with optional vessel offset In relative motion mode you can specify whether the boat is fixed in the centre of the window (0 offset, default) or offset by 1/3 or 2/3. The latter options give you a greater view ahead of your position. In Course Up mode, the chart is static and oriented with your cur-
rent course upwards. When you change heading, the ship symbol moves accordingly. If you select a new course, the chart will reset to display the new course upwards. The reference used for Course Up depends upon the data available at a given time. The system prioritizes data in the following order:
1. Bearing from origin to destination, i.e. intended course. 2. Locked heading from an autopilot. 3. Bearing to waypoint. 4. Instantaneous heading. If heading data becomes unavailable while in this mode, a warning message is shown and the chart shows 0 heading in relative motion mode. To set the chart orientation 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Select CHART MODE AND ORIENTATION. 3. Toggle to your preferred option on the ORIENTATION softkey. Motion mode The motion mode controls how your vessels progress relative to the chart is represented on screen. There are three options on the motion mode softkey:
Relative motion (RM) True motion (TM) Autorange (AR) When you pan the chart or use Find Cursor, the motion mode is suspended. This is indicated in the status bar by putting the motion name in parentheses. Manually changing the range in autorange also suspends motion mode. When a chart window is set to SYSTEM view the motion mode will be set but not synchronized across other system view windows. 67 Chapter 5: The Chart Application 5.14 Chart detail You can adjust the level of detail shown on the chart by choosing to show or hide certain features. To show or hide routes and tracks 1. Highlight a route or track and press the HIDE softkey. or 1. Open the Route or Track list. 2. Highlight a route or track in the list. 3. Toggle between SHOW and HIDE settings with the ROUTE ON CHART or TRACK ON CHART softkey. Note: The active route is always displayed irrespective of the 3 _ 9 3 8 6 D display status. 0 Vessel offset 1/3 Vessel offset 2/3 Vessel offset 5.13 Chart view Decluttering the chart view The chart application defaults to system view which means the fol-
lowing settings apply to all nav stations in your system:
Chart mode and orientation Chart layers (aerial, radar, 3D locator and AIS) Synchronization (radar/chart and 3D/chart) Show/hide waypoints, routes and tracks Declutter Vectors If you change any of these options in one window, ALL system win-
dows will update. When local chart view is selected the presentation for each window is set independently. Sometimes a large number of cartographic objects in a particular area can render the chart view difficult to read. You can reduce the amount of detail by de-cluttering the chart display. Turning declutter on hides the following cartographic objects:
Text Chart boundaries Spot soundings Depth contours Light sectors Caution and routing data Land and marine features Business services (if available on your cartography) To define how the chart windows are presented 1. Toggle between LOCAL and SYSTEM on the CHART VIEW To turn declutter on or off 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. softkey. 2. Toggle between ON and OFF with the DECLUTTER softkey. G-Series Reference Manual 68 If decluttering does not hide a particular feature, you can hide fea-
tures individually from the Cartography Setup menu. 5.15 Journey planning Navionics chart data is preinstalled on the GPM400. The data pro-
vides you with some or all of the following information:
Details for cartographic objects, including source data for struc-
tures, lines, open sea areas etc. Details of ports, port and business services. Tide and current information. Wrecks and obstructions. Panoramic photos. Aerial photographs. Pilot books. Coastal roads. Displaying details for objects and features Many objects shown on the chart have detailed information associ-
ated with them. Some of this information displays automatically whenever you highlight the object with the cursor. Depending on the object type, its additional information might allow you to:
Locate the nearest waypoint, port, port service, tidal and current stations, wreck or obstruction, to the selected position. Search for a named port. View detailed data for the selected port, tidal station or current station. View panoramic photographs. To view detailed object information 1. Move the cursor over an object. If basic information exists for the object, it will be displayed (unless deactivated in the setup menu). For full details of the features available, refer to the Navionics website at www.navionics.com or www.navionics.it 2. Press OK. 3. Detailed information for the object is displayed. Some Navionics data provide detailed bathymetric information in addition to standard chart information. You can choose between the standard chart view, or the view displaying bathymetric contours. To display bathymetric information 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. To change the set-up options for object information, see page 46. Finding nearby features and services You can locate the nearest waypoint, port, port service, tidal and current stations, wreck or obstruction, to the cursor position. 2. Press the CHART LAYERS softkey. 3. Press the CHART TYPE softkey to toggle between FISH and NAV options. To find nearby features and services 1. Move the cursor to the relevant position. The FISH option displays bathymetric information. The NAV option displays the standard chart view. If you select FISH and no data is available for your current position, the databar displays (FISH) to indicate that you are in that mode but without data. 2. Press OK. 3. Press the FIND NEAREST softkey. 4. Select the appropriate options from the on-screen lists. Once located, you can use the softkeys and trackpad to:
Display detailed data for services at the listed ports. Show the selected item on the chart. 69 Chapter 5: The Chart Application GOTO the selected waypoint. View tidal/current data for the selected tidal/current station. Static tide and current data You can display tide and current information using the FIND NEAR-
EST function. Alternatively, you can display tide and current data by highlighting the appropriate diamond on screen. This method provides information including tidal and current curves, and lets you select data by date and time. To show data using tide and current diamonds 1. Highlight the appropriate diamond with the cursor. 2. Press OK. 3. Press the DATA softkey. Animated tide and current data Animated tide and current data is available. The animations provide a visual cue to the movement of currents and tides for times you specify. You can set the date for the animation and choose to see the whole animation from the beginning or start it at any point within a 24-hour period. You can also choose to view the animation continuously or to step through it incrementally. To view animated tide and current data 1. Highlight a tide or current diamond. 2. Press OK. 3. Press the ANIMATE softkey. The Tide/Current Animation screen opens with animation paused. Press the ANIMATION PLAY/PAUSE softkey to start animation. The time and date of the animated data are displayed on the status bar; the animation starts from the current time. Controlling animation When you open the Tide/Current Animation screen, the toolbar pro-
vides softkeys to stop and start the animation; step the animation forwards or backwards in time; set the size of the step, or select a date for the animation. G-Series Reference Manual 70 The animation plays in a loop: when it reaches the end of a 24-hour animation period, it starts again at the beginning. To start or stop the animation 1. Press the ANIMATION PLAY/PAUSE softkey. To view the animation in steps 1. Press either the STEP BACK or STEP FWD softkey. To set the step interval 1. If the animation is playing, press PAUSE. 2. Press the SET TIME INTERVAL softkey. 3. Use the rotary controller to adjust the time interval (within the range of 15 to 120 minutes). 4. Press OK or CANCEL to save the new interval. To set the animation date 1. Press the SET DATE softkey:
TODAYS DATE Set the animation date to the current date. PREV DATE NEXT DATE EDIT DATE Set the animation date to 24-hours previous to current date. Set the animation date to 24-hours ahead of current date. Opens the Edit Date pop-up screen: use the trackpad or rotary controller to enter the date you want to see an animation for. 2. Press OK to save the new date and return to the Tide/Current Animation screen, which will update to display the tide or current for the date you chose. Press CANCEL to ignore the date change and go back to the Tide/
Current Animation screen, leaving the date setting unchanged. Port services You can display details of port services by using the FIND NEAR-
EST function. Alternatively, you can use either of the methods below. To display port services 1. Highlight a port symbol. 2. Press OK. 3. Highlight a service. 4. Press the VIEW DETAILS softkey. or 1. Press OK. 2. Press the SEARCH BY NAME softkey. 3. Press EDIT NAME. 4. Enter the port name (or the first few characters of the port name). 5. Press SEARCH. 6. If the search returns more than one port, select the port you are interested in. 7. Select your service. 8. Press the VIEW DETAILS softkey. Pilot book information The pilot book information option enables you to view detailed infor-
mation normally contained in a nautical pilot book. To view pilot book information 1. Highlight a port symbol. 2. Press OK. 3. Select Pilot Book and press VIEW PILOT BOOK. 4. Use the toolbar to navigate around the pilot book. 71 Chapter 5: The Chart Application Panoramic photography You can view panoramic photography of many ports and marinas. The availability of photography is indicated by a camera symbol on the chart, placed at the point the photograph was taken. The view-
point is indicated by the angle of the camera symbol. You can also access photography from port services information. Business services/points of interest symbols Anchorage Airport Babysitting Barber Bank Camping Car hire Firemen To display panoramic photography 1. Highlight a port symbol. In the Object Info popup, select Photos. 2. Press OK. 3. 4. Select a numbered photograph from the list. 5. Press the VIEW PHOTO softkey. or 1. Hotspot a camera symbol. Fishing equipment Nautical repairs Gas/Petrol Parking Golf Gym Hospital Hotel Laundry Port Museum Police Post Office Restaurant Ship repairs Shop Business services and points of interest Taxi station Tourist information Train Water transport Weather station 1 _ 6 2 2 8 D The location of various business services and points of interest are indicated by the following symbols:
Highlighting any of the above service symbols gives you the follow-
ing information about the business:
Name Address Telephone number Type of business You can switch off the business services symbols from the Cartog-
raphy Setup Menu, or by switching on chart declutter. Aerial photography Aerial photography is available for navigable waters up to three miles inland. Beyond that, land is shown in green (on color charts) and in gray (on black-and-white charts). G-Series Reference Manual 72 To overlay aerial photography 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Press CHART LAYERS. 3. Toggle AERIAL OVERLAY to ON or OFF as appropriate. 4. Use the rotary controller to adjust overlay opacity. 5.16 Measuring distance, range and bearing Options for measuring distance, range and bearing are outlined in the table below. Overlay opacity The opacity level controls how visible the underlying chart view is with photography overlaid. The higher the setting, the stronger the overlay. Overlay area Functions Distance between points Range from vessel Bearing Range Rings Yes (approx.) Yes (approx.) Cursor position
Yes
Yes Yes You can specify whether the aerial photographic overlay is dis-
played for land areas only, or for land and sea areas. Ruler Yes On Land displays a normal chart view for sea areas and over-
lays aerial photography on areas of land. This can help you interpret your surroundings while keeping important navigation-
al data visible. On Land and Sea displays aerial photography of both land and sea areas. This can help you distinguish between deep and shallow water (dark blue and light blue, respectively), and to view land features simultaneously. To specify the overlay area 1. Open the Cartography Setup Menu. 2. Select Aerial Photo Overlay. 3. Choose your preferred setting. Cursor position You can determine the exact position, distance and bearing to the position of the cursor by referring to the cursor position (Csr Pos) data in the databar. Ruler The chart application includes a ruler which accurately measures the distance and bearing between two points. To use the ruler 1. Position the cursor at the start-point of the measured distance. 2. Press the DATA button. 3. Press the RULER softkey. 4. Move the cursor to the end-point of the measured distance. 5. Press OK. To move the ruler 1. To move the start-point, press ADJUST A. 2. To move the end-point, press ADJUST B. 73 Chapter 5: The Chart Application To clear the ruler 1. Press DATA. 2. Press the RULER softkey. 3. Press CLEAR RULER. G-Series Reference Manual 74 Chapter 6: 3D Chart The 3D chart gives you an accurate, three-dimensional view of the area around your vessel. This can help you navigate more confidently if the area is new to you or if visibility is poor. Navigation functions are available in the 3D chart. 6 Chapter contents 6.1 Safety notice on page 76 6.2 3D chart requirements on page 76 6.3 Setting up the 3D chart on page 76 6.4 The 3D chart view on page 76 6.5 Operation modes on page 77 6.6 Using the 3D chart on page 78 6.7 Presentation options on page 80 6.8 Tuning the view on page 81 6.9 Using the standard and 3D charts together on page 83 6.10 Aerial photography overlay on page 84 See also The Chart Application on page 43 Using Waypoints on page 35 6.1 Safety notice The 3D chart setup menu gives you the following options:
The 3D chart is an aid to visualization only. Always check your nor-
mal charts to ensure your route is safe. FUNCTION Description OPTIONS
(Default in bold) Until you are familiar with interpreting the 3D chart display, take every opportunity to compare what you see on-screen with your actual surroundings. Practice harbour and coastal navigation dur-
ing daylight hours and in clear weather conditions. You can use the 3D chart in simulator mode to help you gain experience. Before you use the 3D chart, read Chapter 4:Using Waypoints on page 35 and Chapter 5:The Chart Application on page 43 for infor-
mation about reading chart information and using the G-Series system navigation functions. CAUTION The 3D chart is not a substitute for good navigational practice, nor does it remove the need to use official government paper charts. Do not use the 3D chart before you have read this chapter. Centre-of-view indicator Centre-of-view indicator (marked with a white cross) ON OFF Vessel symbol Style of boat symbol displayed on-screen Vessel Size Size of boat symbol displayed on-screen Aerial Photo Overlay Overlay an aerial photograph on the 3D chart Chart Text Text viewed on the 3Dchart Nav Marks Navigation marks viewed on the 3D chart Sail Power Tiny Small Medium Large Huge ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 6.2 3D chart requirements 6.4 The 3D chart view For the 3D chart application to operate correctly, the G-Series sys-
tem requires heading and position data. An overview of the 3D chart window is given below. 6.3 Setting up the 3D chart The 3D chart setup menu is available from the system setup menu. For information on using the system setup menu, see To change a menu setting on page 23. G-Series Reference Manual 76 Planning mode. Range Horizontal distance across screen (halfway up the window or at center of view). Shown in selected system units. Mode Shows mode application is working iin. Boat symbol Boat's position on chart. Select sail or power boat. Rotation Shows in degrees true, how far the on-screen view has been rotated from your boat's heading. Cartographic objects Select objects for display via the 3D Chart Setup menu. Waypoint With arrival circle Center-of-view White cross indicates center of chart view at sea level. Depth scale Approximate depth beneath your boat. North arrow 3D indication of True North in relation to the chart view. 1 _ 0 5 2 8 D The 3D chart view includes the same cartographic objects and nav-
igation features, like waypoints, as the standard chart. To move around the 3D chart, and to display your chosen area at the required scale, use pan and zoom as normal. In the 3D chart, you can also adjust rotate and pitch settings. Rotate rotates the view between 0 and 359. Pitch adjusts the vertical angle of view between 1 and 90. 6.5 Operation modes You can choose to view the chart in one of two modes:
Active motion mode. Active motion mode This is the default mode. The screen shows an aerial view of the 3D chart with a viewpoint from above your boat, slightly behind it and looking forward. As your position changes, the chart view auto-
matically updates. You can set different viewpoints: see View options on page 81. Rotating or panning the chart puts it into planning mode. Planning mode If you move the view away from your current location, the system enters planning mode. You can view areas from different angles, bearings and ranges but your vessel is no longer kept on screen automatically. The same controls and functions are available in both modes. Or To enter planning mode:
Pan to the area of the chart that you want to view or 1 _ 7 3 7 8 D Turn the rotary control (except if set to CENTRE and ADJUST PITCH). Planning mode is indicated in the status bar by brackets around the mode: (FWD). 77 Chapter 6: 3D Chart 6.6 Using the 3D chart The default toolbar on the 3D chart gives you access to navigation and presentation options. FIND SHIP GOTO ADJUST ON ADJUST EYE CENTER ROTATE PITCH PRESENTATION Follow route options Route list Goto waypoint options Waypoint list Find Ship Adjusting the chart view D10558-1 Pressing the FIND SHIP softkey redraws the chart about your cur-
rent location, with your vessel in view and facing forwards. The default toolbar includes two softkeys dedicated to adjusting the view of the 3D chart application. ADJUST lets you rotate the view and adjust the angle (pitch). ADJUST ON sets the reference point for view settings: either on the center of the image, or on the virtual-
eye position. To adjust rotate and pitch settings 1. Press the ADJUST softkey. G-Series Reference Manual 78 2. Toggle to the setting you want to adjust. 3. Make the adjustment with the rotary controller. 4. Press OK. Note: The rotary controller is always active to adjust pitch and rotation. This is different to most other uses of the rotary controller, which require you to press a softkey to enable adjustment. To set the adjustment reference point 1. Press the ADJUST ON softkey. 2. Toggle to EYE or CENTER as required. 3. Press OK. Navigation options Shortcuts to the Route List and Waypoint List are available under the GOTO softkey. For information about using them, see page 50. Routes and waypoints can only be edited from within the standard chart application, but changes made on the standard chart are reflected on the 3D chart. Waypoint arrival circle Active waypoint Course of route 2 _ 8 5 2 8 D 79 Chapter 6: 3D Chart 6.7 Presentation options The PRESENTATION softkey opens the toolbars shown below:
FIND SHIP GOTO ADJUST ON ADJUST PRESENTATION EYE CENTER ROTATE PITCH Chart layers Depth overlay on/off 3D view options Depth plane value View to forward/starboard/aft/port Waypoint name on/off Trans cone on/off Depth scale on/off Adjust exaggeration Waypoint name on/off D10559-1 G-Series Reference Manual 80 View options There are four view options to choose from: forward, aft, port and starboard. 3. Toggle to your preferred view on the VIEW TO softkey. 4. Press OK. 2.431nm PRT ROTATE 106oT 2.431nm STB ROTATE 280oT Multiple views You can display multiple 3D chart views by creating a page that contains up to four windows. Each window could contain a view of:
The same area from a different angle. Up to four different areas of the chart. For information about setting up application windows, see Selecting application windows on page 26. AFTPRT Port STB AFT Starboard Eye point above and to starboard side of boat, looking to port. Eye point above and to port side of boat, looking to starboard. 1 _ 6 2 7 8 D 6.8 Tuning the view You can tune the 3D chart view using the following features:
2.431nm FWD ROTATE 195oT 2.431nm AFT ROTATE 011oT Exaggeration Declutter FWD Forward Default view. Eye point above and behind the boat, looking forward. Pressing FIND SHIP resets to this view. AFT Aft Eye point above and in front of the boat, looking behind it. 1 _ 5 2 7 8 D The current option is highlighted on the toolbar and displayed in the status bar. To select the view option 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Press the 3D VIEW OPTIONS softkey. 81 Chapter 6: 3D Chart Exaggeration Sometimes it is easier to see certain topographical features if they are exaggerated. Adjusting the exaggeration has the effect of verti-
cally stretching objects on the chart, making it easier to see their shape and position. This could be particularly helpful if you are fish-
ing, for example. The declutter feature removes some chart objects from view to make the chart clearer to read and navigation simpler. Declutter OFF Declutter ON 1 _ 4 5 2 8 D To turn declutter on or off 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Toggle to ON or OFF using the DECLUTTER softkey. Exaggeration factor x1 Exaggeration factor x50 2 _ 3 5 2 8 D To adjust exaggeration 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Press the 3D VIEW OPTIONS softkey. 3. Press ADJUST EXAGGERATION. 4. Use the rotary controller to set your level of exaggeration. 5. Press OK. Press CANCEL at any time to return to the previous exaggeration setting. Declutter In some circumstances, the quantity of information displayed on the chart can render its interpretation difficult. G-Series Reference Manual 82 6.9 Using the standard and 3D charts 3D view locator together If the area in which you are navigating is unfamiliar, or visibility is poor, working with standard and 3D chart windows side-by-side can give you extra confidence and information. With the charts dis-
played side by side, a comprehensive view of the surrounding area is available. The view locator is a polygon displayed on the standard chart which outlines the boundaries of the area shown on the 3D chart. It is shown as a blue line extending from the virtual eye point icon. View locator Eye point icon 1 _ 6 5 2 8 D 1 _ 5 5 2 8 D As you rotate, adjust pitch, pan or zoom the 3D chart view, the loca-
tor updates on the standard chart. As with all multiple page sets, the active window is indicated by a red border. To make changes to an application it must be in the active window. For information about setting up a page set to view two applications together, see page 25. To display the 3D view locator 1. Make a standard (two-dimensional) chart window active. 2. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 3. Press the CHART LAYERS softkey. 4. Toggle the 3D LOCATOR setting to ON. 5. Press OK. Chart synchronization Chart synchronization enables you to synchronize heading, range and position information on the standard and 3D charts. When chart synchronization is ON:
2D/3D synchronization is flagged in the status bars. 83 Chapter 6: 3D Chart Pressing FIND SHIP from any synchronized application returns the 3D chart to the default view and synchronizes the 2D chart to the same view. Changes made to heading, range or position in either 2D or 3D charts are reflected in both windows. If the 2D chart view for the current window is set to SYSTEM, any changes made in a chart window will be reflected in all win-
dows on all displays. If the 2D chart view for the current window is set to LOCAL, no other windows will be affected. You can synchronize the 2D chart with the 3D chart or the radar but not both. 6.10 Aerial photography overlay You can overlay aerial photography onto the 3D image. This can help you interpret the chart view of your surroundings. Aerial pho-
tography is available for the navigable waters up to three miles inside the coastline. Beyond these limits, land appears green (on color charts) or grey (on black-and-white charts). Aerial photo overlay is controlled from the 3D chart Setup Menu. Standard 3D image 3D image with aerial overlay 1 _ 8 4 8 8 D 1 _ 7 5 2 8 D To synchronize the standard chart with the 3D chart 1. Make a 2D chart window active. 2. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 3. Press CHART MODE AND ORIENTATION. 4. Toggle the CHART SYNC mode to 3D. 5. Press OK. G-Series Reference Manual 84 Chapter 7: Autopilot Integration If you have a Raymarine autopilot installed, you can access some of its functions from the G-Series keyboard. The autopilot functions do not replace the autopilot control head. You must have a pilot control head installed before you enable or engage the autopilot. 7 Chapter contents 7.1 Emergency disengage on page 86 7.2 Enabling and engaging the autopilot on page 86 7.3 Autopilot Status Indicator on page 86 7.4 The autopilot control screen on page 87 7.5 Waypoint arrival on page 87 7.1 Emergency disengage To disable the autopilot 1. Press the STANDBY button. 7.2 Enabling and engaging the autopilot To allow the system to control autopilot functions, first enable auto-
pilot control on the setup menu. The default autopilot setting is disabled. If you are navigating to a waypoint or following a route, you can see information for it on the Pilot Control pop-up window. This pop-up gives you softkeys to set the pilot to auto, track or standby. Whenever you initiate a GOTO or FOLLOW ROUTE, the pilot pop-
up gives you a softkey to engage pilot. To enable autopilot control 1. Press the MENU button to open the Setup menu. 2. Select System Setup > System Integration > Autopilot Control. 3. Select Enabled. 4. Press the OK button. To open the pilot control screen 1. Press the PILOT button. If you press OK or CANCEL without engaging the autopilot, you go back to the navigation screen with the autopilot disengaged. When the autopilot is engaged, or you hotspot an active route or waypoint, the toolbar gives you the following options:
STOP GOTO/FOLLOW ADVANCE WAYPOINT Opens the Pilot Control screen. If the autopilot is in track mode, the route complete alarm sounds. Opens the Pilot Control screen and provides the AUTO and TRACK softkeys. The screen stays open until you choose either AUTO or TRACK. Note: You can only perform individual advance waypoint opera-
tions: it is not possible to perform one track command for multiple advance waypoints. To disengage the autopilot 1. Press the STANDBY button. or 1. Use the softkeys provided with the Pilot Control pop-up screen. 7.3 Autopilot Status Indicator An indicator in the top-right corner of the display gives you the cur-
rent status of the autopilot. Icon Autopilot mode Standby. Track. G-Series Reference Manual 86 Icon Autopilot mode Auto. No autopilot detected. Autopilot alarm is active. 7.4 The autopilot control screen The Pilot Control pop-up screen is displayed when you engage the autopilot in track mode, at waypoint arrival, or when you select it via the Pilot key or from the Setup Menu. It gives you:
Autopilot status Live navigation information Toolbar with softkeys to control the autopilot Autopilot toolbar AUTO ENGAGE PILOT
-TRACK-
STANDBY Engage the autopilot and hold the current course
(available when the autopilot is in Track or Standby mode). Engage the autopilot and track to the current target waypoint. Disengages the autopilot (only available when the autopilot is engaged). To close the Pilot Control pop-up without activating AUTO or TRACK, press OK or CANCEL. 7.5 Waypoint arrival when there are more waypoints in your route, the system:
sounds the waypoint arrival alarm displays the Pilot Control screen, with information about the next waypoint The toolbar gives you four options:
Press the ENGAGE PILOT -TRACK- softkey to engage the autopi-
lot and continue to the next waypoint in your route. Press the CLEAR ALARM softkey to silence the alarm and keep the autopilot engaged in auto mode, continuing on the current heading. Press the STANDBY softkey to cancel the alarm and disengage the autopilot. Press the AUTO softkey to cancel the alarm and engage the auto-
pilot in auto mode. Note: If you make no selection within 30 seconds, the Next Waypoint alarm will sound. When you reach the last waypoint in your route, the system:
87 Chapter 7: Autopilot Integration sounds the waypoint arrival alarm displays the Pilot Control screen with Last Waypoint in the Next Waypoint field. The toolbar gives you three options:
Press CLEAR ALARM to silence the alarm and keep the autopilot engaged in auto mode, continuing on the current heading. Press STANDBY to silence the alarm and disengage the autopilot. Press AUTO to silence the alarm and continue on the current locked heading with autopilot engaged. G-Series Reference Manual 88 89 Chapter 7: Autopilot Integration G-Series Reference Manual 90 Chapter 8: The Fishfinder The fishfinder uses acoustic sounding to display fish, seabed structure, and underwater obstructions like wrecks. 8 Chapter contents 8.1 The fishfinder display on page 92 8.2 Background information on page 92 8.3 Operating the fishfinder on page 92 8.4 Explaining the readout on page 93 8.5 Factors influencing the readout on page 93 8.6 Display mode settings on page 95 8.7 Presentation toolbar on page 101 8.8 Adjusting gain and power on page 102 8.9 Measuring depth and distance on page 103 8.10 Fishfinder alarms on page 105 8.11 Editing presets on page 105 8.12 Fishfinder configuration on page 107 See also The G-Series System Installation Guide for fishfinder calibration information. 8.1 The fishfinder display The fishfinder displays a scrolling image of the seabed, updating from the right as your vessel makes progress. A transducer on the bottom of the boat sends pulses of sound waves into the water and measures the time it takes for the sound wave to travel to the bottom and back. The returning echoes are affected by bottom structure and by any other objects in their path, for example reefs, wrecks, shoals or fish. The strength of the echoes is indicated on the display by different colors. You can use this information to determine the shape and make-up of the seabed, or the size of shoals, or of other objects. 8.3 Operating the fishfinder The fishfinder provides you with four preset configurations, avail-
able on the default toolbar. These are tailored to provide optimal operation in different circumstances - you should be able to find a preset that gives you excellent results in any situation. The presets are labelled single, dual, shallow and deep. When you make a fishfinder window active, the title bar shows you which pre-
set is selected, along with its settings. 1
0 6 5 0 1 D The fishfinder status icon is located in the top-right section of the monitor:
Each preset has been configured to provide the best operating parameters for the fishfinder. However, it is possible to adjust the presets if necessary.
(animated icon) Icon animated - connection to a DSM has been successful. Icon static - the DSM is connected but not transmitting. Icon greyed-out - no DSM is connected. 1 _ 4 3 5 9 D To select a preset mode 1. Press the appropriate softkey. 8.2 Background information The fishfinder requires a Digital Sounder Module (DSM) to process acoustic signals and build up a detailed picture of the seabed. G-Series Reference Manual 92 8.4 Explaining the readout Boat speed A hard bottom (sand) produces a thin line A soft bottom (mud or seaweed cover) produces a wide line. The dark layer indicates a strong signal. A rocky or uneven bottom or a wreck produces an irregular image with peaks and troughs The fishfinders reading of the bottom changes as your speed changes. Slower speeds return flatter, more horizontal marks; as your speed increases, the image will tend to thicken and arch, until at high speeds the bottom resembles a double line on the fishfinder display. Depth As sea depth increases, signal strength decreases, resulting in a lighter on-screen image of the bottom. Object size The larger an object is, the stronger its return on the fishfinder dis-
play will be. 2
5 5 8 6 D However, the strength of return from fish depends upon the spe-
cies swim bladder, rather than the body size. The dark layers indicate a good echo; the lighter areas weaker ech-
oes. This could mean that the upper layer is soft and therefore allowing sound waves to pass to the more solid layer below. It is also possible that the sound waves are making two complete trips hitting the bottom, bouncing off the boat, then reflecting off the bottom again. This can happen if the water is shallow, the bot-
tom is hard, or gain is set too high. 8.5 Factors influencing the readout The quality and accuracy of the display can be influenced by a number of factors including boat speed, depth, object size, back-
ground noise and transducer frequency. Background noise The fishfinder readout can be affected by weak echoes from float-
ing or submerged debris, air bubbles, or by your boats movements. This background noise is also known as clutter, and the G-Series system automatically adjusts sensitivity to it based on sea depth and water conditions. You can, however, set the sensitivity manu-
ally by using the gain modes (gain, color gain and TVG). Transducer frequency Lower frequencies scan a wide area and penetrate water well. Use these settings if you want a large coverage beneath your boat or if you are in deep water. 93 Chapter 8: The Fishfinder Higher frequencies (200 Khz) scan a narrow area but produce more detail, especially at high boat speed. They are most useful in shallower waters (up to 1000 feet). Various frequencies may be available on your system, depending on the transducers fitted to your vessel. Viewing single or dual frequencies If the preset you are using includes two frequencies, you can use one fishfinder window to view both frequencies or just one. You can then send the second frequency to a fishfinder window on a second monitor, enabling you to view both frequencies at full screen. G-Series Reference Manual 94 8.6 Display mode settings When a fishfinder preset is selected, its softkey label changes to ADJUST. Pressing this key allows you to configure the display mode settings to suit your requirements. (Changes to the display mode are saved with the preset at power-off.) ADJUST P1 SINGLE PRESET 2 DUAL PRESET 3 SHALLOW PRESET 4 DEEP PRESENTATION Adjust F1 / F2 Select option Zoom Zoom full/split Zoom factor x2/3/4, custom (R) Bottom lock Zoom position auto/manual Full/split Range (rotary) A-Scope Bottom shift (rotary) 1/2/3 D10561-1 95 Chapter 8: The Fishfinder For each preset (and for each frequency within the preset), you can change the following display mode settings:
Zoom Bottom Lock A-Scope To change the settings for a preset 1. Press the ADJUST <preset name> softkey. 2. Select F1 or F2. 3. Select the mode you want to adjust. 4. Make changes using the trackpad or rotary controller. 5. Press OK when complete. Zoom If necessary you can zoom in on the bottom to display more detail. This zoom option lets you:
Replace the standard fishfinder image with the zoomed image, or display the zoomed image alongside the standard fishfinder image. Zoom pane Standard pane 1
2 6 5 0 1 D Set the zoom factor to a pre-defined level, or adjust it manually. To select split-screen or full-screen Reposition the zoomed portion of the image to a different point 1. Select FULL or SPLIT with the ZOOM softkey. in the display. When the range increases, the area shown in the zoom window also increases. Full or split screen You can either replace the standard fishfinder image with the zoomed image or split the screen and display the zoomed image alongside the standard fishfinder image (ZOOM SPLIT). The zoomed section is indicated on the standard fishfinder screen by a zoom box (see illustration below). When the zoom function is active (ZOOM FULL or ZOOM SPLIT), you can either select a predefined zoom factor or adjust it manually. To select the zoom factor 1. Press the ZOOM softkey. 2. On the ZOOM FACTOR key, toggle between pre-defined settings or select xR to set a factor manually. For manual settings, adjust the zoom factor with the rotary controller. 3. Press OK to accept your setting. G-Series Reference Manual 96 Adjusting the position of the zoomed area When the zoom function is selected, the system automatically selects the zoom position so that the bottom details are always in the lower half of the display. If required you can reposition the por-
tion of the image to be zoomed so that an alternative area is displayed. To set the zoom position 1. Press the ZOOM softkey. 2. Select MAN with the ZOOM POSITION softkey. 3. Reposition the zoomed image using the rotary controller. 4. Press OK. Bottom lock and bottom shift The Bottom Lock function applies a filter to flatten the image of the seabed and make any objects on or just above it easier to discern. This feature is particularly useful for finding fish that feed close to the bottom. Bottom Lock is selected for individual fishfinder windows and can replace or appear alongside the standard fishfinder image. Adjusting the range of the bottom lock image allows you to view more bottom details. You can also reposition the image on screen to anywhere between the bottom of the window (0%) and the mid-
dle of the window (50%) by using the Bottom Shift control. Bottom lock range
(distance from bottom) Depth from the surface Freq1: 200 kHz-Auto Freq2: None SHALLOW F1: 200 kHz BL Depth reading Bottom shift D10412-1 ADJUST FREQ1 FREQ2 SELECT OPTION BOTTOM LOCK BOTTOM LOCK FULL SPLIT B-LOCK RANGE BOTTOM SHIFT 50ft 14%
Bottom lock image Standard fishfinder image To adjust bottom lock 1. Toggle to FULL or SPLIT. 2. Use the appropriate softkeys and rotary controller to set the range and bottom-shift values. Using A-Scope to view a live image The standard fishfinder display shows a historical record of fish-
finder echoes. If required, you can display a live image of the bottom structure and the fish directly below the transducer by using the A-Scope feature. The width of the bottom area covered by the A-Scope is indicated by the number at the bottom of the window. The A-SCOPE softkey When A-Scope is on you can select one of three display modes:
97 Chapter 8: The Fishfinder MODE 1 The A-scope image is centred in the window. MODE 2 The left-hand side of the Mode 1 image is expanded to give a more detailed view. MODE 3 The A-scope image angles outward as signal width increases with depth. D6674-3 To display the A-Scope image 1. Select A-Scope on the SELECT OPTION softkey. 2. Choose your mode on the A-SCOPE MODE softkey. G-Series Reference Manual 98 Changing the range You can change the range for each displayed frequency from the Range Adjust toolbar, which gives you control over the range and range-
shift settings. OUT RANGE IN Range auto/manual Range shift Select frequency high/low High frequency shift D10563-1 The DSM automatically adjusts the display to show the shallowest required range. Alternatively, you can range in or out on the image, up to the maximum depth displayed on the scrolling bottom and A-Scope images. Changes to the range affect all fishfinder windows. Range shift The DSM automatically adjusts the display to keep the bottom in the lower half of the display window. Alternatively, you can shift the image within the current range. Changes to the range shift are reflected in all Fishfinder windows. To open the Range Adjust toolbar 1. Press the RANGE button on the G-Series keyboard. To select manual or auto range mode 1. Open the Range Adjust toolbar. 2. Toggle to AUTO or MAN on the RANGE softkey. 3. Press OK. To shift the range image 1. Open the Range Adjust toolbar. 2. Press the RANGE SHIFT softkey. 3. Select your desired setting using the rotary controller or trackpad. 4. Press OK. 99 Chapter 8: The Fishfinder To return to the standard fishfinder image 1. Toggle to AUTO on the RANGE softkey. 2. Press OK. G-Series Reference Manual 100 8.7 Presentation toolbar The PRESENTATION softkey gives you access to VRM features (for measuring depth and distance), frequency view selection and a scroll control. These settings affect the monitor you are working on. ADJUST P1 SINGLE PRESET 2 DUAL PRESET 3 SHALLOW PRESET 4 DEEP PRESENTATION Gain Gain mode auto/manual (low, medium, high) Power Auto/Man Color gain auto/manual TVG auto/manual Color threshold VRM VRM on/off View F1/F2/Both VRM range VRM depth Scroll pause/resume View F1/F2/Both Scroll pause/resume D10564-1 101 Chapter 8: The Fishfinder 8.8 Adjusting gain and power Manually-set gain levels Changing the preset gain settings alters the way the fishfinder pro-
cesses background noise (also called clutter), and can improve the readout on the monitor. You can adjust:
Gain mode (choose from three auto-settings or manual control) Color gain TVG Color threshold If you change settings for any of these modes (except auto gain), the fishfinder applies them to all transducer frequencies. For optimum performance, use the auto settings. If necessary you can set gain levels manually. Manually-set gain levels are applied to the active window and any other fishfinder win-
dows displaying that frequency. To set the gain level manually 1. Press the GAIN MODE softkey. 2. Toggle the setting to MAN. 3. Use the slider to set your required gain value. 4. Press OK. Gain should be set high enough to see fish and bottom detail but without too much background noise. Generally, high gain is better in deep or clear water; low gain is better for shallow or murky water. The default setting for manual gain is 75%. Auto gain settings Color Gain The gain, or sensitivity, of the display adjusts background noise by varying the echo strength for display. The value of the GAIN control determines the strength above which echoes are displayed. There are three AUTO GAIN modes, which are saved with the preset if power is removed from the system:
Low (the default setting) is ideal for viewing fishfinder images with a minimum of background noise while you cruise to your fishing spot. Only the strongest echoes are displayed. Medium is a slightly higher gain setting that displays more detail. High provides the most detail, but also displays the most back-
ground noise and surface clutter. To select an auto gain setting 1. Press the GAIN MODE softkey. 2. Select the auto setting from the pop-up list. 3. Press OK. This sets the lower limit for the strongest echo color. All echoes with a signal strength above this value are displayed in the strongest color. Those with a weaker value are divided equally between the remaining colors. Setting a low value produces a wide band for the weakest color, but a small signal band for the other colors; setting a high value gives a wide band for the strongest color, but a small signal band for the other colors. TVG (Time Varied Gain) The TVG (Time Variable Gain) reduces clutter by varying the gain throughout the water column. This function is useful for reducing the appearance of noise. Increasing the TVG value increases the maximum depth to which TVG is applied; decreasing it reduces the maximum depth. A low TVG value has little effect on gain in shallow water; a high value decreases the gain in shallow water so that only the strongest ech-
oes are displayed. G-Series Reference Manual 102 Power setting The power setting controls the power level of the transducer. Auto This is the default setting. When it is selected the DSM automati-
cally determines the required power setting based on the current depth, speed, and (bottom) signal strength. Manual If you wish to manually adjust the power to suit current conditions, you can adjust the power level between 0% and 100%, in 10%
increments. Lower power levels are normally used in depth ranges less than 8 ft. (2.4 m) and higher power levels are typically selected for depths greater than 12 ft. (3.7 m). VRM marker indicating distance behind boat Depth line VRM marker indicating depth of target Depth reading SHALLOW F1: 200 kHz Freq1: 200 kHz-Auto Freq2: None 1768ft 44 46 49 42.2ft 63 67 70 74 75 74 74 To change the power setting 1. Press the ADJUST softkey for the preset you are using. D10411-1 VRM 1 ON OFF RANGE 0.787nm DEPTH 44.7ft Cursor
(depth indicated in data bar) Depth target ID Depth markers 2. Press to the manual or auto setting on the POWER softkey. 3. In manual mode, use the rotary controller or trackpad to choose the power setting you want to use. 4. Press OK. 8.9 Measuring depth and distance The fishfinder display gives you various methods of measuring depth and distance:
Depth reading - your current depth. The size and position of this readout can be changed in the Fishfinder display Setup menu (see page 107). Depth lines - horizontal dashed lines drawn at regular intervals to indicate the depth from the surface. These are switched on/
off in the Fishfinder Display Setup menu (see page 107). Depth Target ID - depths noted against recognized targets. The sensitivity of these IDs is directly linked to the Fish Alarm sensitivity; the greater the fish alarm sensitivity, the greater the number of labelled returns. These targets are switched on/off in the Fishfinder Display Setup menu (see page 107). Cursor depth - the depth and the distance from your boat marked by the cursor, is indicated in the data bar at the top of the screen. This performs in a similar way to a VRM, but without lines. VRMs - to indicate the distance behind your boat and the depth below of selected objects. 103 Chapter 8: The Fishfinder Note: When multiple fishfinder windows are open, we recommend To return the marker to its previous position, press CANCEL. you have the depth reading displayed in at least one window. Measuring depth and distance with VRM You can use a Variable Range Marker (VRM) to determine the depth and distance-behind-boat of an object. These markers con-
sist of a horizontal (depth) line and a vertical (distance-behind-boat) line; each of which are marked with the appropriate measurement and are controlled individually. Note: VRMs set up in Fishfinder are unrelated to those set up in Radar. To make a measurement using VRM 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Press the VRM softkey. 3. Toggle to ON. 4. Pause the display to make it easier to position the VRM over the object. 5. Take your measurements:
Measuring distance e.g. 1.56nm RANGE 49ft Measuring depth e.g. DEPTH 10ft Press to highlight Move range marker over target and/or 12ft Move depth marker over target OK To save position 1 _ 5 5 4 8 D Adjusting the scroll mode and speed You can adjust the speed at which the display scrolls, but the same section of the bottom is displayed regardless of scrolling speed. A faster speed displays more detail. This is useful when you are look-
ing for fish. If you select a slower speed the information remains on the display for longer. The following options are available:
Manual - This allows you to set the scroll speed as a percent-
age of the maximum scroll rate for that depth. The lower the percentage, the slower the image will scroll. The default is man-
ual adjustment with a full speed scroll (100%). To select the scroll mode and speed 1. Open the Fishfinder Setup Menu. 2. Set your preferred values in the Manual Scroll Speed setting. Pausing scroll You can pause the display to see a snapshot of the image. When a display is paused, scrolling stops but the depth indication continues to be updated.Scroll pause/resume affects the frequency showing on your display (both frequencies if two are selected) while other displays continue to scroll. This allows you to inspect a paused image, place waypoints or VRMs, while the other frequency continues to scroll and detect fish. To pause or resume scrolling 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Toggle settings on the SCROLL key. 3. Press OK. G-Series Reference Manual 104 Viewing frequencies within a preset 8.11 Editing presets If the preset you are using has two frequencies, you can view either one or both of those frequencies in separate windows. To set frequency views 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Toggle to F1, F2 or BOTH on the VIEW softkey. 3. Press OK. Placing waypoints You can pause the scrolling image to place a waypoint at a position or target that you want to return to at a later date. When a waypoint is placed, its details are added to the Waypoint List and a vertical line labelled WPT is placed on screen. You can edit waypoints and navigate to them in an active fishfinder window. 8.10 Fishfinder alarms In addition to the system alarms (see page 194), the following alarms can be set when you are connected to a DSM or when the simulator is on:
Fish Alarms - sound when a target meets the specified sensi-
tivity level and, is within the depth limits (if enabled). The greater the fish alarm sensitivity, the greater the number of tar-
get image depths displayed. Shallow/Deep Alarms - sound when the DSM detects that the depth is less than the shallow limit, or greater than the deep limit. You can switch the alarms on, set the limits and specify the fish alarm sensitivity. You can select frequencies for each preset from the Setup Fre-
quency Preset screen. All available frequencies are detected by the system and made available on this menu. You can:
Specify one or two frequencies for each of the four presets. Edit preset names (EDIT NAME softkey). Reset all presets to factory defaults (RESET ALL softkey). Reset a selected preset to factory defaults (RESET <PRESET>
softkey). The fishfinder can can handle only one set of frequency presets across Nav Stations. It is not possible to set one Nav Station up with a different set of fishfinder frequencies to another. To open the Setup Frequency Preset screen 1. With a fishfinder window active, press the MENU button . 2. Select Configure Frequency Presets. Manual frequency selection If you select a frequency manually, the fishfinder operates at that fixed frequency. To set frequencies manually 1. Open the Configure Frequency Presets screen. 2. Select the frequency use wish to use from the list available. Automatic frequency selection The behaviour of automatic frequency selection varies according to the configuration of your system and whether you are using a DSM300 or DSM400. The table below summarises this behaviour. 105 Chapter 8: The Fishfinder Frequency 1 Behaviour Frequency 2 Behaviour DSM400 AUTO Automatically adjusts to suit depth. NONE/MAN Manual setting is fixed. MANUAL Fixed at selection. NONE/MAN AUTO Manual setting is fixed. Automatically adjusts to suit depth. AUTO DSM300 AUTO AUTO Automatically selects highest frequency and widest beam. Changes with depth; alter-
nate pings of 50 Khz and 200 Khz. Changes with depth; alter-
nates between 50 Khz and 200 Khz. MANUAL Fixed at selection. NONE
AUTO Frequency set to 200 Khz. AUTO Frequency set to 50 Khz. G-Series Reference Manual 106 8.12 Fishfinder configuration This section describes the settings you can change using the fishfinder setup menu. The setup menu contains settings that are likely to be changed infrequently. For information on how to use setup menus, see Setup menus on page 23. Fish nder Setup
> Con gure Preset Frequencies Depth digit size Depth Digit Position Target Depth ID Depth Lines White Line Bottom Fill Color Palette Manual Scroll Speed Transducer Settings > Select Transducer Select Speed Transducer Frequency Calibration Depth Offset (Waterline) To open the fishfinder setup menu 1. Make a fishfinder window active. 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Select Fishfinder Setup. 107 Chapter 8: The Fishfinder DSM and transducer setup Nearby vessels equipped with a fishfinder, or certain physical con-
ditions (like hard seabeds), can affect the DSM. Its setup menus enable you to change settings to allow for this. The system automatically adjusts the following settings to optimize the fishfinder image. Operating frequency. Gain modes (Gain, Color Gain, TVG). Power setting. Note: The setup options available depend upon the DSM fitted to your vessel. Fishfinder settings should not ordinarily require adjustment. Configure preset frequencies Change the settings for one or more of the fishfinder presets. The settings available depend upon the transducer fitted. Target depth ID Depth readings for identified targets. Depth lines Horizontal lines indicating depth. White line and bottom fill Distinguish between echoes from fish near the bottom and from the bottom itself. (See illustration.) 200 kHz: Auto Gain: Auto High 75.9ft 200 kHz: Auto Gain: Auto High 75.9ft 200 kHz: Auto Gain: Auto High 75.9ft 200 kHz: Auto Gain: Auto High 75.9ft Color Palette Standard fishfinder image The standard fishfinder image displays the bottom as a combination of features (mud, sand, fish targets etc) with various sonar signal strengths. White line When this feature is applied, a white lIne is drawn along the bottom (as defined by the digital depth value) and the detail below the bottom removed. Fish near the bottom can now be seen more easily. Bottom fill When this feature is applied, the detail below the bottom is removed and replaced by a single contrasting color. The bottom is now clearly defined and the fish near the bottom can be seen more easily. White line and bottom fill When both White Line and Bottom Fill are applied, the bottom is defined by a white line and the detail below it replaced by a single contrasting color. Both the bottom and fish near the bottom are now clearly defined. 3
3 3 8 6 D 75 75 100 75 100 Choose the color palette to suit your conditions or personal preference. G-Series Reference Manual 108 Manual Scroll Speed Ping Rate Limit (per sec) Provides a speed limiter. It can be useful to adjust ping rate to suit local conditions, for example when you are over a hard seabed or in shallow water. Ping Enable Normally enabled, you can disable the ping when appropriate: to test other equipment, or if there is a diver beneath the vessel, for example. Specify the speed at which the fishfinder view updates and scrolls. Select Transducer When selecting a transducer, the DSM reports to the G-Series whether it sees a 600W or 2kW transducer. This allows you to select an appropriate transducer from the list. Select Speed Transducer This option is only available if the selected transducer is one that does not include an integrated speed transducer. Frequency Calibration Hides the setup menu and brings up a set of soft keys to tune the transducer frequencies. Depth Offset (waterline) Offset represents the depth of the transducer (relative to the waterline) Speed and temperature offsets Calibrate the speed transducer and thermistor (if fitted). DSM Reset Restores all settings to factory default. Trip Counter Reset Zero the trip counter. Interference Rejection Removes spikes caused by interference from other fishfinder-
enabled vessels. 2nd Echo Interference Rejection Finely adjust the ping rate according to the 2nd echo level. 109 Chapter 8: The Fishfinder G-Series Reference Manual 110 Chapter 9: Sirius Weather (US only) Overview The weather application superimposes historical, live and forecast weather data onto a world map. You can use the data to check the weather for your current position or for areas you are planning to visit. For a basic weather glossary, see the appendix at the back of this manual. For types of warnings, watches and advisories, refer to the NOAA website at: www.nws.noaa.gov 9 Chapter contents 9.1 Disclaimer on page 112 9.2 Weather application pre-requisites on page 112 9.3 Weather application setup on page 112 9.4 The weather display on page 113 9.5 Moving around the weather map on page 113 9.6 Placing waypoints on page 113 9.7 Weather symbols on page 113 9.8 Weather toolbar on page 118 9.9 Viewing data for a specific position on page 119 9.10 Animated weather graphics on page 120 9.11 Viewing weather reports on page 120 9.12 Troubleshooting on page 121
| 1 | Gseries Reference Part 2 | Users Manual | 1.38 MiB | May 02 2008 |
2. Select Weather Setup menu. FUNCTION Sirius Weather User ID Details the Weather ID obtained from Sirius and keyed in on your display. Wind Symbol Graphic used for wind symbol Marine Watchbox Alerts Enables alert when watchbox is issued. OPTION
(as advised) Arrow Barb OFF 50nm 150nm 300nm 500nm ALL Specifying meteorological elements You can choose to view textual weather reports or animated graph-
ics for specific weather element. To specify meteorological elements 1. Make a weather window active. 2. Press the DISPLAY GRAPHICS softkey. 3. Select a weather element and make the appropriate setting for each element you are interested in. 4. Press OK. 9.1 Disclaimer For disclaimer see page218. 9.2 Weather application pre-requisites Before you can use the weather application you need to:
Obtain a Sirius ID number. (For full details, see the Sirius Instal-
lation handbook.) Customize a page set to include a weather application. Specify the weather elements that you wish to display. For the G-Series system to display weather data, it must be connected to an SR100 Sirius Receiver which is supplying the appropriate data. For your vessel to be displayed and for weather reports to be available at your position, you need a fix for your boats position and be within range of Sirius satellites. For further information on installing and commissioning a weather receiver, see the SR100 Weather Receiver Installation Guide. Creating a weather window A weather application window is not included in the pre-configured page sets. You therefore need to customize a page set to include one. For information about how to do that, see Selecting an appli-
cation page on page 26. 9.3 Weather application setup With a weather window active, the Weather Setup Menu is avail-
able from the system Setup menu. To open the Weather Setup Menu 1. With a weather window active, press the MENU button. G-Series Reference Manual 112 9.4 The weather display 9.7 Weather symbols The following table summarizes the weather symbols used by the G-Series system. The section after it gives more information about each. Many symbols have additional data associated with them. If this is the case, the object window will contain the text OK for more info. To display additional data for meteorological objects 1. Highlight the object. 2. If a pop-up indicates that additional data is available, press OK to see it. The main features of the weather display are shown below. Range Animation time/data Signal strength 2400 nm 12:00 22/11 Medium Status bar Marine zone Surface observation stations Wave heights FIND SHIP DISPLAY GRAPHICS... ANIMATE WEATHER... WEATHER REPORTS... PRESENTATION... Weather soft keys 1 _ 4 6 5 8 D Note: Time shown can be either for the time of latest data or animation time/date, as appropriate. 9.5 Moving around the weather map When you open the weather application, a world map is displayed. Use the cursor to move around the map and the range button to zoom in and out. To re-centre the map on your boat, use the FIND SHIP softkey. 9.6 Placing waypoints The waypoint button operates as normal when a weather window is active, but you need to make a radar or chart window active to see the waypoints. 113 Chapter 9: Sirius Weather (US only) Weather symbols 24 22 26 22 Storm cast Waves (blues) Canadian radar (Dark greens-yellow) Or Wind Lightning Sea surface temperature
( green-yellow-orange) Surface observation stations (pink) Cities (grey) Storm Tracks symbols NOWRad (green-yellow-red) Snow (Blues),Mixture (Pinks) Hurricane (Category 1-5) Tropical storm Surface pressure Tropical disturbance, tropical depression Precipitation (NOWRad) NOWRad displays the type and level of precipitation:
Color Light green Medium green Dark green Yellow Orange Light red Dark red Light blue Dark blue Light pink Dark pink Precipitation type Intensity (dBz) Rain Rain Rain Rain Rain Rain Rain Snow Snow Mixed Mixed 15-19 20-29 30-39 40-44 45-49 50-54 55 +
5-19 20 +
5-19 20 +
High / low pressure (blue & red) Warm front (red) Cold front (blue) Storm Cast Storm cast arrows indicate the direction and speed of a storm. Occluded front (purple) Stationary front (red-blue) Trough (brown) Squall line (red) Dry line (red) 1010 1012 Isobars (grey) 1 _ 3 1 6 8 D 24 26 22 Speed of storm Direction of storm 1 _ 6 2 9 8 D G-Series Reference Manual 114 Sea surface temperature
(SST) The temperature range of the sea sur-
face is indicated by shading, from low temperatures to higher temperatures through blue-green-
yellow-orange-red. Canadian radar Tracking storms You can use the STORM TRACK function to monitor significant storms in your area. These include tropical disturbances, depres-
sions, storms and cyclones, hurricanes, typhoons and super-
typhoons. The G-Series system displays the path the storm has taken, its cur-
rent and forecast position, the wind radii (for its current position only), and its current direction and speed of travel. 1 _ 0 7 5 8 D Storm Tracks symbols These symbols are displayed on screen in three different colours:
Grey - historical, Red - current, Orange - forecast Canadian radar shows the intensity of precipitation for Canada. Unlike NOWRad, Canadian radar does not show the precipitation type. Hurricane
(Category 1-5) Tropical storm Tropical disturbance, tropical depression Move the cursor over the symbol for additional information. 1 _ 1 3 9 8 D Color Transparent Light green Medium green Dark green Yellow Orange Light red Dark red Intensity (mm/hr) Tropical storm data Tropical storm data can be displayed for a selected storm. The data includes:
The storms name, type, date and time. The position, direction and speed of travel of the storm. The pressure and maximum wind speed and gusts. 0.00-0.20 0.21-1.00 1.01-4.00 4.01-12.00 12.01-24.00 24.01-50.00 50.01-100 100.01 +
115 Chapter 9: Sirius Weather (US only) Lightning Wind The system puts a lightning symbol at every cloud-to-ground strike recorded within the last 5, 10 and 15 minutes. Lightning Strikes More recent strikes overlay older ones Strike recorded in last 0 - 5 minutes Strike recorded in last 5 - 10 minutes Strike recorded in last 10 - 15 minutes 1 _ 5 7 5 8 D Surface observation stations You can view current or historical weather data at surface observa-
tion stations. This option displays the current wind direction and magnitude. You can choose (using the Weather Setup Menu) to display the wind symbol as either an arrow or a wind barb. Wind arrows give an indi-
cation of wind speed - the larger the arrow the stronger the wind. Wind barbs give a more precise representation of wind speed:
Wind speed symbols 3-7 kts 8-12 kts 13-17 kts 18-22 kts 23-27 kts 28-32 kts 33-37 kts 38-42 kts 43-47 kts 48-52 kts 53-57 kts 58-62 kts 63-67 kts 68-72 kts 73-77 kts 78-82 kts 83-87 kts 88-92 kts 93-97 kts 98-102 kts 1 _ 1 7 5 8 D etc. All surface observations stations are represented by a pink symbol:
Waves This option gives you wave period, wave direction and wave height data. Buoy Station C - MAN WSI NWS 1
5 7 9 8 D City forecasts The Cities option gives you access to details of city weather fore-
casts. Forecasts for up to three days may be available. G-Series Reference Manual 116 Wave height is displayed in 16 levels:
Wave height ranges Florida Waves shown in 16 shades of colour from:
Reds Greens - Intermediate waves Blues
- Highest waves
- Lowest waves Cuba 1 _ 3 0 6 8 D Surface pressure This option shows surface pressure data using standard meteoro-
logical symbols. High pressure High pressure
(blue)
(red) Warm front (red) Cold front (blue) Occluded front
(purple) 1010 1012 Stationary front
(red-blue) Trough (brown) Squall line (red) Dry line (brown) Isobars (grey) 1 _ 1 5 6 8 D 117 Chapter 9: Sirius Weather (US only) 9.8 Weather toolbar Options available under the default weather toolbar are summarized in the following two diagrams. FIND SHIP DISPLAY GRAPHICS ANIMATE WEATHER WEATHER REPORTS PRESENTATION Weather reports pop-up Forecast at cursor/ship Watchbox show/hide Marine zone show/hide Tropical statements Marine warnings Marine zone forecasts Watchbox warnings G-Series Reference Manual 118 D10566-1 FIND SHIP DISPLAY GRAPHICS ANIMATE WEATHER WEATHER REPORTS PRESENTATION Weather graphics pop-up Animate type forecast/n-rad Wave Direction Wave Period Forecast win/wav/pres Animate on/off Pause on/off D10566-1 9.9 Viewing data for a specific position It is possible to display the sea temperature, wind speed and direc-
tion, wave height, precipitation intensity and type for a location specified by you. The marine zone is also shown. To view data for a specific position 1. Move the cursor to the required position. 2. Press OK. 119 Chapter 9: Sirius Weather (US only) 9.10 Animated weather graphics The animated weather feature allows you to view an animation from the current time for:
The forecast for wind and wave activity or surface pressure. The weather radar history loop (NOWRad). Marine warnings. Marine zone forecasts. Watchbox warnings. Each report type may contain several bulletins; the window can be scrolled to view all the data. You cannot display information by moving the cursor over a symbol when animation is running. To view weather reports 1. Press the WEATHER REPORTS softkey. The range and trackpad controls do however remain operable, pro-
vided the PAUSE option has not been selected. Ranging or panning causes the animation to restart. The animation stops if you press any of the ACTIVE, PAGE, DATA, WPS/MOB, or MENU buttons, or if you close the window containing the animation. To set up an animated weather graphic 1. Press the ANIMATE WEATHER softkey. 2. Toggle to the required setting on the ANIMATE TYPE softkey. 3. Toggle to the required option on the FORECAST softkey (wind, wave or surface pressure). To run an animation 1. Press the ANIMATE WEATHER softkey. 2. Toggle to ON with the ANIMATE softkey. The status bar indicates the time-frame displayed. The weather radar history provides up to eight images of data covering the last two hours, at 15-minute intervals. To pause an animation 1. Press the PAUSE softkey. 9.11 Viewing weather reports The following weather reports are available:
Tropical statements. G-Series Reference Manual 120 2. Press the appropriate softkey for the type of report you want. If available, select the relevant option on the FORECAST AT 3. softkey (ship or cursor). Watchbox warnings When a tornado or thunderstorm warning is received, the system generates a watchbox alert:
Warning type and period for which warning is valid Watchbox report text 1 _ 6 0 6 8 D Use the trackpad or rotary control to scroll through the report. You can set the range for the watchbox alert to: OFF; 50; 150; 300;
500 and ALL using the weather setup menu. Any watchbox outside of the selected range will not trigger the alarm. (Units vary accord-
ing to the configuration of your system.) You can switch off the marine watchbox alert (using the Weather Setup Menu, see page 112) or set the watchbox status to hide. Reports continue to be added to the database, irrespective of the alert and show/hide status. To clear a watchbox alert 1. Press ACKNOWLEDGE. The alert is removed from the display but you can still see the watchbox warning by using the Weather Reports softkeys. Displaying marine watchboxes When the marine watchboxes feature is ON (default), any regions for which a watchbox is valid are highlighted on the weather map as a red polygon. 9.12 Troubleshooting Problem Reason Boat symbol not displayed No position fix FIND SHIP softkey greyed-out No position fix Boat symbol drawn as a solid circle No heading or COG available No Connection message is displayed in the status bar No signal received from SR100;
check cabling and that SR100 is powered. Watchbox alert warning area 1 _ 8 0 6 8 D To show or hide watchboxes 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Toggle to the appropriate setting on the WATCHBOX softkey. To display watchbox data 1. Highlight the watchbox. 2. Press OK to display the Object Info pop-up screen. 3. Press OK again to display the watchbox data. 121 Chapter 9: Sirius Weather (US only) G-Series Reference Manual 122 Chapter 10: Navtex You can use the G-Series system to view marine safety information (including weather forecasts and marine warnings) if you have a Navtex integrated receiver connected to your system. Major areas of coverage include the Mediterranean Sea, The North Sea, coastal areas around Japan and areas around the North American continent. 10 Chapter contents 10.1 Setting up Navtex on page 124 10.2 Selecting message alert categories on page 124 10.3 The Navtex message window on page 124 10.4 Managing Navtex messages on page 124 10.1 Setting up Navtex 10.3 The Navtex message window Before you are able to view Navtex messages you need to:
Specify the baud rate of your Navtex receiver. Enable the appropriate category of Navtex messaging (see page 125). 10.2 Selecting message alert categories On initial power up, the system provides alerts for all message cat-
egories listed in the Navtex Alert Menu. You can switch off any category except Navigation Warnings (Category A), Meteorological Warnings (Category B) and Search and Rescue information (Cate-
gory D). To select the message alert categories 1. Press MENU to open the Setup menu. 2. Select Navtex Messages and open the Navtex Message List. 3. Press the SETUP ALERTS softkey. 4. Select the appropriate category and toggle its status to the required setting. Once correctly connected to the Navtex unit, the system will display messages it receives from within your chosen categories:
ERASE MESSAGE SAVE MESSAGE 1 _ 0 7 8 8 D When you receive a message, the toolbar gives you the option to erase or save the message as appropriate. The G-Series system can save up to 100 Navtex messages. Once this capacity is reached, it starts to overwrite the oldest messages with newer ones. To view saved messages 1. Press MENU to open the Setup menu. 2. Select Navtex messages. 3. Select the appropriate message from the list. The message text is displayed in the right-hand column. Scroll through it to see the complete text. You also have the option to sort the message list by date, station or category, erase a message, or set up the message alerts. 10.4 Managing Navtex messages Management options for Navtex messages allow you to:
G-Series Reference Manual 124 Select categories for which the G-Series system will show alerts. Erase messages. Sort the message list. Sorting the message list By default the message list sorts by the date and time the message was received (DATE) with the most recent message at the top. If required, you can sort the list by station identifier (STN) or by mes-
sage category (CAT). To sort the message list 1. Press MENU to open the Setup menu. 1. Select Navtex Messages and open the Navtex Message List. 2. Toggle to your preferred sorting method on the SORT LIST softkey. 125 Chapter 10: Navtex G-Series Reference Manual 126 Chapter 11: Radar The G-Series can be used with digital radar scanners. Digital scanners offer:
Improved target definition. Full-color image. Scan-to-scan. SuperHD option. Super HD effectively increases the transmitter power by a factor of at least two, and re-
11 duces the beamwidth by a similar amount. Dual-range operation. Simultaneous operation of two radar scanners. Chapter contents 11.1 Radar setup on page 128 11.2 Controlling power to the scanners on page 130 11.3 Radar range and image quality on page 131 11.4 Radar window overview on page 134 11.5 Using waypoints with the radar on page 135 11.6 Radar display options on page 136 11.7 Tuning the radar display: GAIN on page 140 11.8 Tuning the radar display: ENHANCE ECHOES on page 143 11.9 Radar range on page 144 11.10 Measuring distance, range and bearing on page 145 11.11 Using radar to track objects on page 150 11.1 Radar setup The Radar Setup Menu lets you customize the way the radar operates. Changes you make in this menu are kept when you remove power from the G-Series system. MENU Radar Setup
Select Scanner Scanner Setup >
Dual Range Color Palette EBL Reference Timed Transmit Transmit Period Standby Period Bearing Alignment Radar Advanced Setup Tune Sea Clutter Curve Parking Offset Scanner Size Note: The radar needs to be receiving heading and position data for full functionality. When dual range is enabled, chart overlay and synchroniza-
tion functions are disabled. If you already have chart overlay or synchronization turned on, dual range is not available. Select scanner Selects which scanner is displayed in the active radar window. Tune Scanner setup The scanner setup option lets you customize various aspects of the scanners behavior. Dual range If dual range is set to on, the system allows you to view two ranges simultaneously in one window. Short range gives you a maximum range of 3 nautical miles; long range provides standard ranges. G-Series Reference Manual 128 The tune function is used to fine-tune the scanners receiver for maximum target returns on the display. Auto mode: recommended In AUTO mode, the radar tunes itself automatically on all range scales. This is the default mode and it is recommended that you leave the tune function in auto mode to ensure that the radar receiver is always tuned to receive the maximum signal. Manual (MAN) mode Radar alarms For information about the radar-specific alarms you can configure, see Alarm Setup Menu on page 194. Note: Until you are familiar with interpreting the radar display, take every opportunity to compare the radar display with your physical surroundings. Note the location of boats, buoys and coastal structures and their corresponding echoes on the radar display. Practice harbor and coastal navigation during daylight hours and in clear weather conditions. If you do set the tune function to MANUAL, you will need to adjust it about 10 minutes after you have turned on the radar, since the required setting will change after the magnetron has warmed up. Adjust the control to obtain the maximum signal strength (indicated by the eight-step horizontal bar). If you cannot tune the radar suc-
cessfully, refer to the Installation Guide. Sea clutter curve Adjust the systems sensitivity to sea clutter. The steepest setting is 1 and the shallowest is 8. The default setting is 4. Parking offset The default parking offset is 0 degrees: the scanner aligns with the pedestal, facing forwards. With parking offset selected you can use the rotary controller to adjust the parking offset from 0 to 358 degrees in steps of two degrees. This setting change is only available when the digital radar is set to Off or Standby. The changes you make are applied at the end of the next transmit cycle. To open the radar setup menu 1. Make a radar application window active. 2. Press the MENU button. Edit name The edit name softkey is available when the radar setup menu is open. This option allows you to name scanners. The default names are 1 for the first scanner and 2 for the second scanner if there is one. Names can be up to five characters long, and are displayed on the title bar. 129 Chapter 11: Radar 11.2 Controlling power to the scanners You control power to the radar scanners from the power control toolbar, which you open with the power button on the G-Series keyboard:
RADAR 1 TX STBY RADAR 1 ON OFF RADAR 2 TX STBY RADAR 2 ON OFF MONITOR CONTROLS PWR D10569-1 You can turn the radar scanners off even if there is no display, or if the display is blank for any reason. In this situation, a message on the keyboard LCD screen prompts you. To switch scanners off when the monitor is blank 1. Press the power button. A prompt on the keyboard LCD says To switch radars off press power. 2. Press the power button. There are three power states for the radar scanners:
Off. On and in standby: powered up and ready to transmit. On and in transmit (TX): rotating and transmitting. The default power mode is on and in standby. To change scanner power states 1. Press the power button. 2. Toggle to your desired power state on RADAR 1 or RADAR 2 as appropriate. G-Series Reference Manual 130 Radar status The following table summarizes the various scanner states and associated status icons. 11.3 Radar range and image quality Radar operates by transmitting radio pulses, then detecting the reflections as the pulses bounce back from objects within radar range. The reflections are processed and displayed on-screen as echoes. Icon Description Scanner on and transmitting. This is the usual mode of operation. Range Status Transmit
(TX) Standby
(STDBY) Off 1
0 4 4 7 D
(Rotating icon)
(static icon) 2
4 9 8 6 D 1
1 4 4 7 D
(grayed-out icon) Scanner powered on but not transmit-
ting; antenna not rotating. This is a power-save mode used when radar is not needed for short periods. When you return to transmit mode, the magnetron does not need to warm up. This is the default mode. Scanner powered off. When radar is not required. Timed transmit
(rotating/static icon) 1
2 4 4 7 D Scanner switches between on/trans-
mitting & standby mode. Power save mode when constant use of radar not required. To set up this option, see page 131 Radar range is limited by the height of your scanner and the height of the target, as illustrated below:
h Radar a1 Rmax Earth a2 Rmax = 2.23 ( h + H ) H Cliff Rmax h H maximum radar range radar antenna height target height in nautical miles in metres in metres Rmax = radar horizon of antenna (a1) + radar horizon of target (a2) 3
3 4 6 1 D The table below gives the approximate range for various antenna and target heights. Antenna height
(m) Object height
(m) Range
(nm) 3 3 5 5 3 10 3 10 7.7 10.9 8.8 12 Image quality Not all radar echoes are produced by valid targets. Spurious ech-
oes may be caused by:
131 Chapter 11: Radar Side lobes Indirect echoes Multiple echoes Blind sectors Sea, rain or snow clutter Interference Through observation, practice, and experience, you can generally detect these conditions very quickly and use the radar controls to minimize them. Side lobes Side lobe patterns are produced by small amounts of energy from the transmitted pulses that are radiated outside the narrow main beam. The effects of side lobes are most noticeable with targets at short range (normally below 3 nm) and with large objects. Side lobe ech-
oes form either arcs on the radar screen similar to range rings, or a series of echoes forming a broken arc. Main lobe Side lobe Side lobe Antenna Arc True echo Side echoes 4
8 3 6 1 D G-Series Reference Manual 132 Indirect echoes There are several types of indirect echoes, or ghost images. These sometimes have the appearance of true echoes, but in gen-
eral they are intermittent and poorly defined. False echo True echo True echo Passing ship Mast or funnel False echo 4
1 4 6 1 D Multiple echoes Multiple echoes are uncommon but can occur if there is a large object with a wide vertical surface at a comparatively short range. The transmitted signal bounces between the object and your own vessel, producing multiple echoes. The false echoes are displayed beyond the range of the true target echo, but on the same bearing. True echo Multiple echoes 3
2 4 6 1 D Blind sectors Obstructions such as funnels and masts near the radar antenna can obstruct the radar beam and cause radar shadows or blind sectors. These returns sometimes appear as large hazy areas, depending on the intensity of the rainfall or snow in the storm cell. 4
7 6 9 3 D Mutual radar interference This can occur when two or more radar-equipped vessels are oper-
ating within range of each other. The interference usually appears as a spiral of small dots from the display centre, and is most marked at long ranges. If the obstruction is relatively narrow, there will be a reduction of the beam intensity, though not necessarily a complete cut-off. However, with wider obstructions there can be a total loss of signal in the shadow area. There might also be multiple echoes which extend behind the obstruction. Blind sector effects can normally be minimized by careful selection of the scanner site prior to installation. Sea clutter Radar returns from waves around the vessel can clutter the centre of the radar picture, making it difficult to detect real targets. Such sea clutter usually appears as multiple echoes on the display at short range, and the echoes are not repetitive or consistent in position. In high winds or extreme conditions, sea clutter can produce an almost solid disc on a radar display. 4
8 6 9 3 D Rain or snow clutter Radar detects rain and snow. Returns from storm areas and rain squalls consist of countless small echoes which continually change in size, intensity and position. 133 Chapter 11: Radar 11.4 Radar window overview G-Series Reference Manual 134 may be a mountain several miles inland from the coastline. Al-
though the coastline may be much nearer, it may not appear on the radar until the vessel is closer to shore. Some targets, such as buoys and small boats, can be difficult to discern, because they do not present a consistent reflecting surface as they bob about in the waves. Consequently, these echoes tend to behave erratically on the radar screen. Buoys and small boats often resemble each other, but boats can often be distinguished by their motion. Trees and shrubbery do not reflect radar. Thus, they can dis-
guise the shape of nearby land. 11.5 Using waypoints with the radar You can use waypoints in the radar application for navigation (just like in the chart application), using the WPTS/MOB button. You can also edit waypoints from within the radar application. For full details on using waypoints, see Chapter 4:Using Waypoints on page 35 and Chapter 5:The Chart Application on page 43. Your position By default your boat is shown at the centre of the radar display and your dead-ahead bearing is indicated by a vertical line known as the Ships Heading Marker (SHM). Operation modes The radar gives excellent results in one of the four preconfigured operation modes under the GAIN softkey. Select the mode that best suits your circumstances: attempting to make manual adjust-
ments to the settings could degrade your image. (However, this facility is available.) See page 140 for more information. Other vessels or objects On-screen targets may be large, small, bright or faint, depending on the size of the object, its orientation and surface type. Remember that the strength of an objects echo may not be propor-
tional to the physical size of the object. For example, a nearby object might produce an echo of the same strength as a more dis-
tant, but larger, object. With experience, the approximate size of different objects can be determined by the relative size and brightness of the echoes. Factors affecting echo strength The physical size of the reflecting object. The material from which the object is made. Metallic surfaces reflect signals better than non-metallic. Vertical surfaces, like cliffs, reflect the radar signal better than sloping surfaces, like sandbanks. High coastlines and mountainous coastal regions can be ob-
served at longer radar ranges. Therefore, the first sight of land 135 Chapter 11: Radar 11.6 Radar display options VRM/EBL TARGET TRACKING GAIN ENHANCE ECHOES PRESENTATION Show/hide waypoints Show waypoints menu Show by symbol/group On radar show/hide Radar mode and orientation Waypoint name on/off Range rings on/off Motion mode true (TM)/relative (RM) Vessel offset 0, 1/3, 2/3 AIS layer on/off Orientation heading-up/north-up/course-up Dual range long/short G-Series Reference Manual 136 D10570-1 The presentation softkey on the radar toolbar gives you control over:
Heading-Up (H-UP) This is the default mode for the radar application. Waypoint behavior EBL Radar mode and display orientation Range rings AIS These radar settings are locally applied, which means they affect only the scanner and display on which you are working. Orientation Radar orientation refers to the relationship between the radar dis-
play and your direction of travel. There are three orientation modes:
Head up North up Course up These orientation modes are used in conjunction with motion modes (see page 138) to control how your vessels progress is shown on screen. e.g:
N Ship's Heading Market (SHM)
(indicating the boat's current heading) is upwards As your boat's heading changes:
SHM fixed upwards Radar picture rotates accordingly N North-Up (N-UP) e.g:
N N True north at top As your boat's heading changes:
Radar picture fixed (north up) SHM rotates accordingly 1 _ 8 9 3 8 D 1 _ 9 9 3 8 D If heading data becomes unavailable while in this mode, a warning message will be shown, the status bar shows North-Up in brackets and the radar uses 0 heading in relative motion. When heading data becomes available once more, North-Up mode is reinstated. It is not possible to select Head Up mode when the motion mode is set to True. 137 Chapter 11: Radar Course-Up (C-UP) e.g:
N N Current course upwards As your boat's heading changes:
Radar picture fixed SHM rotates accordingly Setting the motion mode Motion modes control how your progress is represented on the dis-
play. The selected motion mode is displayed in the status bar. If no position data is available, the status bar shows the motion mode in brackets. There are two motion modes:
Relative motion True motion The default setting is relative motion. 1 _ 0 0 4 8 D Relative motion (RM) with optional vessel offset If you select a new course, the picture will reset to display the new course upwards. The reference used for Course-Up depends upon the information available at a given time. The system prioritizes this information in the following order:
1. Bearing from origin to destination (your intended course). 2. Locked heading from an Autopilot. 3. Bearing to waypoint. 4. Instantaneous heading. If heading data becomes unavailable while in this mode a warning message is displayed; the status bar puts Course-Up in brackets to show it is suspended; and the radar uses 0 heading in relative motion mode. When heading data becomes available again, Course-Up mode is reinstated. When the motion mode is set to Relative, the position of your boat is fixed on the screen and all the targets move relative to the boat. You can specify whether the boat is fixed in the centre of the win-
dow (0 offset) or offset by 1/3 or 2/3:
0 offset 1/3 offset 2/3 offset 2
2 4 8 6 D The default vessel-offset value is zero. True Motion (TM) To select an orientation mode 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Press RADAR MODE & ORIENTATION. 3. Choose your preferred setting under the ORIENTATION softkey. The selected orientation mode is displayed in the status bar. When the motion mode is set to True, fixed radar targets maintain a constant position and moving vessels (including your boat) travel in true perspective to each other and to fixed landmasses on the screen. As the boats position approaches the edge of the screen, the radar picture is automatically reset to reveal the area ahead of the boat. G-Series Reference Manual 138 If heading and position data become unavailable when true motion is selected: a warning message is shown; the display reverts to rel-
ative motion; the status bar indicates that True Motion is selected but suspended by showing it in parentheses (TM). It is not possible to select True Motion when the orientation is set to Head Up. To set the motion mode 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Press RADAR MODE AND ORIENTATION. 3. Toggle between True and Relative Motion on the MOTION MODE key. To change the vessel offset 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Press RADAR MODE & ORIENTATION. 3. Toggle to your desired offset using the VESSEL OFFSET softkey. Dual range The G-Series system allows you to view either a short- or a long-
range image in separate radar windows. To allow this, dual range must be enabled in the Radar Setup Menu (see Radar setup on page 128). To set the range 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Press RADAR MODE & ORIENTATION. 3. Toggle between LONG and SHORT on the DUAL RANGE softkey. The default setting is long, which provides a standard scanner range. The short setting provides a maximum range of six or twelve nautical miles. Note: If chart-radar sync is turned on in the chart application, you cannot enable dual range in the radar application. If dual range is on, you cannot turn on chart-radar synchronization. Changing the bearing mode for EBLs The default bearing mode for EBLs is relative to your vessels heading. If heading data is available, you can set the bearing mode to be relative (REL) or magnetic/true (M/T). When M/T is selected, the EBL bearings will be expressed as either true or magnetic, depending on the equipment connected. The cur-
rent EBL bearing is given on the EBL label and on the ADJUST EBL softkey label. To change the EBL reference 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Toggle between M/T and REL on the EBL REFERENCE key. 139 Chapter 11: Radar 11.7 Tuning the radar display: GAIN Gain reduces the effect of false echoes and clutter. For best results, retain the default AUTO setting. You can, however, adjust gain settings manually if required
. VRM/EBL TARGET TRACKING GAIN ENHANCE ECHOES PRESENTATION Buoy mode Adjust harbour mode Gain auto/man Coastal mode Sea auto/man Offshore mode Rain on/off Threshold auto/man Super HD controls Power boost auto/manual Antenna boost auto/manual D10571-1 G-Series Reference Manual 140 Gain presets Rain clutter There are four preset gain modes to give you the best picture in dif-
ferent circumstances. Harbor is the default mode. This setting takes account of land clut-
ter so that smaller targets, like navigation buoys, are not lost. Radar detects echoes from rain or snow. The strength of these ech-
oes depends upon the altitude, range, density and size of the snow flakes or rain droplets and appear on screen as countless small echoes continuously changing size, intensity and position. Coastal accounts for the slightly higher levels of sea clutter you might encounter out of harbor and adjusts the radar display accordingly. Offshore automatically adjusts for high levels of sea clutter. Buoy is a special mode to enhance the detection of small objects like mooring buoys. It is useful at ranges up to 3/4 nm. Manually adjusting gain The gain function makes the radar picture clearer by changing the sensitivity of radar reception. For long ranges select a sensitivity level that gives a slight speckle in the background. Setting the gain too low can cause weak or small targets to disappear, however. Turning the RAIN clutter function on suppresses the bulk effect of rain returns from around your boat, so that recognizing other objects is easier. Sea clutter Radar echoes from waves around your boat can clutter the centre of the radar picture, making it difficult to detect real targets (see page 131). Adjusting the sea mode will reduce this clutter for up to 5 nautical miles (depending on wave and sea conditions) from your boat. This reduces sea echoes to intermittent small dots, while small targets remain visible and persistent. Gain levels further from your boat remain unchanged. For shorter ranges reduce the gain slightly to reduce speckle and improve target definition. Super HD adjustments Note: If you control gain manually, check it each time you change the range scale. To manually adjust gain settings 1. Press the GAIN softkey. 2. Press the ADJUST softkey for the preset mode you are in. 3. Select manual on the GAIN softkey. The changes you make are applied to both the active window and any other radar windows displaying this preset. Gain setting changes are kept at system power-off. You can generally use the default AUTO settings for best results, but two manual controls allow you to explore Super HDs capabilities. Antenna boost This scales the effective antenna size. At zero, the effective antenna size matches its actual size. At 95, the effective antenna size is doubled. Increasing effective antenna size has the effect of separating tar-
gets that appear merged at lower settings. 141 Chapter 11: Radar In some circumstances, a larger effective scanner can be a draw-
back. In particular, if you are in a harbor or close to land, you may see more detail than is useful. For that reason, the AUTO settings for Harbor and Coastal modes provide lower scale factors of about 30% and 60%. Power boost This adjusts effective transmit power. At zero, the radar operates at its standard power (4kW or 12kW). At 90, the effective power is increased by a factor of at least two. Increasing power has the effect of making targets more distinct from noise. For maximum benefit, reduce gain to prevent saturation of strong targets. The default power boost setting for all AUTO modes is 90. G-Series Reference Manual 142 11.8 Tuning the radar display: ENHANCE ECHOES The ENHANCE ECHOES softkey gives you access to further features for tuning the radar display. VRM/EBL TARGET TRACKING GAIN ENHANCE ECHOES PRESENTATION Interference rejection on/off Expansion on/off Wakes on/off Scan to scan on/off D10572-1 Interference rejection Interference rejection automatically reduces mutual radar interfer-
ence when two radar-equipped vessels are operating within range of each other. It is switched on by default. You can adjust the strength of interference rejection in the Radar Setup Menu. Turning interference rejection off altogether allows you to detect the presence of other radars in the vicinity. To turn interference rejection off 1. Press the ENHANCE ECHOES softkey. 2. Toggle the setting to OFF on the INT REJECT softkey. 143 Chapter 11: Radar Expansion Scan to scan The expansion function allows you to either override the pulse length or to give larger returns so targets are easier to see. To override the pulse length 1. Open the Radar Setup Menu. You can either use the MENU button, or press and hold the EXPANSION softkey. 2. Set the magnification level for target expansion to HIGH. To give larger returns 1. Open the Radar Setup Menu. 2. Set the magnification level for target expansion to LOW. Note: Selecting this option may compromise target resolution. Wakes When the wakes function is switched on, you can see the direction and speed of moving targets relative to your boat. Targets are dis-
played in yellow, turning to paler shades of blue as the signal diminishes. The wakes option is a local setting which applies only to the display on which you are working. You can choose to display wakes for a period of 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 5 minutes or 10 minutes. To switch wakes display on 1. Press the ENHANCE ECHOES softkey. 2. Toggle wakes to ON using the WAKES softkey. 3. Select your preferred wakes setting. 4. Press OK. To switch wakes display off 1. Press the ENHANCE ECHOES softkey. 2. Press the WAKES softkey. 3. Press the CLEAR WAKES softkey. When scan to scan is switched on, stationary objects appear stron-
ger with each sweep of the radar. If the object moves, it appears relatively weakly on screen. This can be used to reduce the effects of rain and sea clutter. To switch scan to scan on or off 1. Press the ENHANCE ECHOES softkey. 2. Toggle to ON or OFF using the SCAN TO SCAN softkey. 3. Press OK. 11.9 Radar range You can zoom in or out to view the radar display at different scales. The scale is measured from the centre to the top of the window and is displayed in the left-hand corner of the status bar. Short-range scales show nearby objects in greater detail, and are most suitable as you approach coastlines, harbors, or other vessels. The shortest range available is 1/8 nautical miles. Long-range scales provide the best overview of the vessels relationship to landmasses, weather fronts and large ships with-
in or beyond your field of vision. The longest range available is 72 nautical miles, depending upon the scanner fitted. To change the radar range 1. Zoom to your required scale using the RANGE button on the keyboard. Synchronizing radar range and chart scale The chart application includes an option to synchronize the radar range with the chart scale. When synchronization is switched on:
The radar range in all radar windows changes to match the chart scale. G-Series Reference Manual 144 Sync is displayed in the top left-hand corner of the chart window. If you change the radar range, all synchronized chart views change scale to match. If you change the scale of a synchronized chart window, all ra-
dar windows update to match. Functions Distances between points Range from your boat Bearings Floating VRMs Floating EBLs Yes
Yes To synchronize radar range and chart scale 1. Make a chart window active. 2. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 3. Press CHART MODE AND ORIENTATION. 4. Toggle to RDR on the CHART SYNC softkey. Note: Radar range synchronization is not available when the chart motion mode is set to autorange, nor when the selected scanner is set to dual range. 11.10 Measuring distance, range and bearing Range rings Range rings help you gauge the approximate distance between points at-a-glance. Range rings are centred on your position and displayed on the screen at pre-set intervals. The number and spacing of range rings changes to suit the scale you have set. e.g. You can measure distance, range and bearing in the radar applica-
tion. Options for doing so are detailed in the table below. Range - 1/4 nm Range rings - 1/8 nm apart Range - 3/4 nm Range rings - 1/4 nm apart Range - 11/2 nm Range rings - 1/4 nm apart 1 _ 7 0 4 8 D Functions Distances between points Range from your boat Bearings To show or hide range rings 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Toggle to ON or OFF using the RANGE RINGS softkey. Range Rings Yes (approx.) Yes (approx.)
Cursor Variable Range Markers (VRMs) Electronic Bearing Lines (EBLs)
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes Bearing and range The radar display shows you bearing and range data to any object you highlight. To find the bearing and range to an object 1. Move the cursor to the objects position. 2. Read off the bearing and range in the databar. 145 Chapter 11: Radar Bearing and range from your vessel to cursor Cursor 1 _ 2 0 4 8 D G-Series Reference Manual 146 The Variable Range Marker (VRM) and Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) The VRM/EBL softkey opens the toolbars shown below:
VRM/EBL TARGET TRACKING GAIN ENHANCE ECHOES PRESENTATION VRM/EBL on/off Adjust VRM Adjust EBL Floating EBL Adjust Float Center Setup VRM/EBL 2 D10573-1 147 Chapter 11: Radar Variable Range Marker A Variable Range Marker (VRM) is a circle of variable radius cen-
tred on your vessels position. You can use the VRM to measure the distance from your vessel to a selected object by adjusting the radius of the marker so that it intersects the objects position. The range is displayed on the ADJUST VRM softkey label when you highlight the VRM. VRM EBL 1 _ 5 2 4 8 D To change the EBL reference from relative to magnetic or true, see page 139. Combined range and bearing You can combine a VRM and an EBL to measure range and bear-
ing simultaneously:
1 _ 8 0 4 8 D VRM Target EBL Electronic Bearing Marker An Electronic Bearing Line (EBL) is an on-screen marker drawn from your position to the edge of the window. When this line is rotated to align with a target, the bearing relative to your current heading is measured and displayed on the ADJUST EBL softkey label. The data is also displayed if you select the EBL with the cursor. G-Series Reference Manual 148 1 _ 3 0 4 8 D Tracking a target with a VRM or EBL You can tell which direction an object is travelling in by tracking its movement in relation to the EBL. If it continues travelling towards the EBL, it could be on a collision course with your boat. 3. Press the ADJUST EBL softkey. 4. Adjust the direction and start point of the EBL using the trackpad and rotary controller. 5. The bearing is shown on the ADJUST EBL softkey label. To use a second floating VRM or EBL 1. Press SET UP VRM/EBL 2. 2. Toggle VRM/EBL 2 to ON. 3. Repeat the steps for using a floating VRM (steps 1-8). To unfloat a VRM or EBL 1. Press the VRM/EBL softkey. 2. Press the FLOATING EBL softkey (under SET UP VRM/EBL 2 if you are using a second floating VRM or EBL). 3. Select CENTER. 4. Press OK. To create a VRM or an EBL 1. Press the VRM/EBL softkey. 2. Toggle to ON with the VRM/EBL softkey. 3. To adjust settings, press either the ADJUST VRM or ADJUST EBL softkey and make changes with the rotary controller. To place a second VRM or EBL 1. Press the SET UP VRM/EBL 2 softkey. 2. Proceed as with VRM/EBL 1. Floating VRM and EBL The VRM/EBL float function allows you to measure range and bearing between any two points on the radar screen (rather than from your vessels position). First you move the VRM/EBL centre to the position you want to measure from. Then you change the radius of the VRM to measure distance, or change the angle of the EBL to take a bearing. To use floating VRM 1. Create a standard VRM. 2. Highlight the VRM or press the VRM/EBL softkey. 3. Press the FLOATING VRM softkey. 4. Press the ADJUST FLOAT softkey. 5. Move the cursor to the point to measure from. 6. Press OK. 7. Move the cursor to the point to measure to. 8. The range between the two points is shown on the ADJUST VRM softkey label. To use floating EBL 1. Create a standard EBL. 2. Highlight the EBL or press the VRM/EBL softkey. 149 Chapter 11: Radar 11.11 Using radar to track objects The TARGET TRACKING softkey opens the toolbars shown below:
VRM/EBL TARGET TRACKING GAIN ENHANCE ECHOES PRESENTATION Monitor in zones Zone 1 on/off Setup zone 1 Acquire target Zone 2 on/off Setup zone 2 MARPA & AIS options Options window MARPA list window MARPA list Cancel all targets Cancel target G-Series Reference Manual 150 D10573-1 Target tracking functions are used to help avoid collisions. 6nm Head-Up Guard zones sound an alarm when an object comes within a specified range. MARPA displays information about tracked objects. AIS displays the identity and voyage information of other AIS-
enabled vessels. To track a target 1. Press the TARGET TRACKING softkey. 2. Highlight the object you wish to track. 3. Press the ACQUIRE TARGET softkey. The target being acquired icon is displayed, followed by the appro-
priate MARPA status icon. Guard zones A guard zone is a protected area around your vessel: as soon as an object (like another vessel) enters the zone, it triggers an alarm on your Nav Station. Guard zones are managed from the Monitor in Zones toolbar. Guard zones can be either circular- or sector-guards, and you can define up to two of them on your system. 6nm Head-Up Relative Motion Rings 1nm Circular Guard Zone Sector Guard Zone 2
2 3 8 6 D 3 _ 5 1 8 6 D You can adjust the sensitivity of guard zones on the Alarms Setup Menu. For more information, see Alarm Setup Menu on page 194. Guard zones only operate when the whole zone is displayed on the screen. To avoid inappropriate alarms, they become active ten sec-
onds after being placed or edited. To place a guard zone 1. Press the TARGET TRACKING softkey. 2. Press the MONITOR IN ZONES softkey. 3. Toggle ZONE 1 or ZONE 2 to ON, as appropriate. 4. Press the corresponding SET UP ZONE softkey. 5. Choose your zone shape. 6. Set the limits of the guard zone using the rotary controller. 7. Press OK. 151 Chapter 11: Radar MARPA The Mini Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (MARPA) provides target-
tracking and risk-analysis features. MARPA obtains detailed infor-
mation for up to ten automatically tracked objects and provides continuous, accurate and rapid situation analysis. To use MARPA, you need a fast heading sensor. Setting up MARPA You can customize the following parameters from the MARPA Options menu:
Parameter Options Vector Length The time period specified for drawing length of vectors. 0.5min, 1 min, 3 min, 6min, 12min, 30 min, 60 min To open the MARPA Options menu 1. Press the TARGET TRACKING softkey. 2. Press the MARPA & AIS OPTIONS softkey. 3. Change MARPA options as required. Safety notices MARPA can improve collision avoidance when used wisely. It is the Users responsibility to exercise common prudence and navigational judgements. There are certain conditions under which acquiring a target may become difficult. Some of those conditions are:
The target echo is weak. The target is very close to land, buoys or other large targets. The target or your own ship is making rapid manoeuvres. Choppy sea state conditions exist and the target is buried in ex-
cessive sea clutter or in deep swells. Target History Plots a targets previous position at the specified intervals. The four most recent position points are displayed. If True target vectors are selected, the four most recent vessel position points are also displayed. Own vessel safe zone The safe zone is a ring, centred on your boat, within which a target is considered dangerous if it will enter this zone within the time to safe zone period. Time to safe zone If a target enters your safe zone within this time period, it is considered dangerous. OFF, 0.5 min, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min Choppy sea state conditions exist yielding poor stability. Inadequate heading data exists. Symptoms of such conditions are that acquisition is difficult and the MARPA vectors are unstable; the symbol wanders away from the target, locks on to the wrong target or changes to a lost symbol target. If any of these conditions are present, acquisition and tracking may need to be re-initiated or, in some cases be impossible to maintain. Improving the quality of the heading data will reduce the effect of the other conditions. 0.1 nm, 0.2nm, 0.5nm, 1.0 nm, 2.0nm 3 mins, 6 mins, 12 mins, 24 mins To acquire a target MARPA automatically tracks acquired targets, calculates target bearing and range, speed and course, Closest Point of Approach
(CPA), and Time to Closest Point of Approach (TCPA). Safe zone ring Controls whether the safe zone ring is displayed or hidden on screen Visible Hidden G-Series Reference Manual 152 Each target tracked can be displayed with a CPA graphic which shows the target vessel, course and speed (as a vector) and indi-
cates the CPA. The calculated target data can also be shown on your screen. Each target is continually assessed and an audible alarm is sounded if a target becomes dangerous, or is lost. MARPA targets Effective MARPA operation is dependant on accurate own-ships heading and speed. Speed Over Ground (SOG) and Course Over Ground (COG) information are required to show true target course and speed. The better the quality of the heading and speed data, the better MARPA will perform. MARPA will function without SOG and COG in relative mode. For the best heading data a Raymarine SMART heading sensor or a gyro-stabilized autopilot is required. Risk assessment Each target is monitored to see if it will be within a certain distance from your boat within a certain time. If so, the target is designated as dangerous and an audible warning is sounded along with an on-
screen warning being shown. The target symbol changes to the dangerous target symbol and flashes to indicate that it is a danger-
ous target. Pressing the appropriate soft key will silence the alarm and remove the warning. If a target is lost, either because the MARPA software has lost con-
tact with it, or because it has moved out of range, an audible alarm is sounded and an on-screen warning appears. The on-screen symbol will change to the target lost symbol. Pressing the appropri-
ate soft key will silence the alarm and remove the on-screen warning and the target lost symbol. MARPA range MARPA target acquisition is only available at radar range scales of up to 12nm, although tracking continues at all ranges. If you change to a smaller range scale, targets may be beyond the range of your scanner and will be lost. In such cases, an on-screen warning will indicate that the target is off-screen. 4 _ 0 1 8 6 D Closest point of approach Closest point-of-approach (CPA) graphics show vectors for your vessel and a selected target. (A vector is a line showing a predicted course.) Vector length varies with speed (settings can be changed in the MARPA Setup Menu). Vector CPA graphic 3 9 1 _ 8 0 0 9 D To show or hide closest point-of-approach 1. Highlight the object with the cursor. 153 Chapter 11: Radar 2. Toggle to the required CPA setting using the CPA GRAPHIC softkey. How motion modes affect CPA In true motion mode, the vectors of your vessel and the target are shown extended to their intersection point. The CPA is shown as a line that is placed on your boats vector at the point of the CPA. The length and direction of the line indicates the distance and bearing of the target at CPA. The text indicates CPA and TCPA. The text next to the target symbol indicates its true course and speed. In relative motion mode, no vector extension of your boat is shown. The CPA line emerges from your own boat, with the target vector extension being shown as relative, not true. The text next to the target indicates its course and speed. Press SHOW DETAILS to display the calculated relative course and speed. Displaying MARPA data All MARPA data is held in a list containing:
MARPA ID Bearing Range True Course True Speed CPA TCPA Target display The position of MARPA objects is marked with an icon, which also indicates its MARPA status. G-Series Reference Manual 154 Target being acquired Dangerous target Safe target Lost target 2 _ 2 4 5 7 D To view the MARPA list 1. Press the TARGET TRACKING softkey. 2. Press the MARPA LIST softkey. To cancel MARPA directly 1. Highlight a tracked MARPA object. 2. Press either the CANCEL TARGET or CANCEL ALL TARGETS softkey, as appropriate. To cancel MARPA from the MARPA list 1. Open the MARPA list. 2. Select a target and press CANCEL TARGET or CANCEL ALL TARGETS, as required. Displaying vessel identity (AIS) If you have an AIS receiver fitted to your system, you can use it to:
Show the position and display vessel data for other AIS-
equipped vessels within a specified range of your boat. Display voyage data (position, course, speed and rate of turn) of AIS-equipped vessels. Display basic or detailed information for each target vessel in-
cluding safety critical target data. Set up a safe zone around your boat. View alarm and safety related messages. This information is displayed in the form of an overlay or as a dialog box on your radar screen. For more information about AIS, see Chapter 12:Automatic Identification System on page 157. To overlay AIS on a radar window 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Toggle the AIS LAYER to ON. 155 Chapter 11: Radar G-Series Reference Manual 156 Chapter 12: Automatic Identification System The Automatic Identification System (AIS) provides safety features when you are at sea. On the G-Series system, AIS is overlaid on a chart or radar widow. It provides:
Heading, speed and rate of turn data for nearby AIS-equipped vessels. 12 A safe zone around your boat. Alarms and safety messages. Chapter contents 12.1 Background on page 158 12.2 System requirements on page 158 12.3 System settings on page 158 12.4 AIS setup on page 158 12.5 Using AIS on page 159 12.6 The AIS data display on page 159 12.7 Displaying AIS vectors on page 160 12.8 Displaying safety-critical AIS data on page 160 12.9 Safe zones on page 161 12.10 MARPA and AIS options on page 162 12.11 AIS alarms on page 163 12.12 Simulator mode on page 163 12.1 Background AIS broadcasts information between vessels and shore-based sta-
tions on VHF frequencies in the maritime band. This information is used to provide fast, automatic and accurate collision-avoidance data. AIS augments the radar application. It can operate in radar blind spots and can detect smaller (AIS-equipped) vessels than radar can. AIS does not replace radar, because it is unable to detect land or navigation beacons. WARNING The following information can be transmitted by a Class A AIS system:
Static data: ship name, type, MMSI number, call sign, IMO number, length, beam and GPS antenna location. Voyage data: draft, cargo, destination, ETA, other relevant information. Dynamic data: time, position, COG, SOG, gyro heading, rate of turn, navigational status. Dynamic reports: speed and status. Messages: alarm and safety. 12.2 System requirements To use AIS, you need:
Product installation AIS unit: either a receive-only or full transceiver device. Smaller vessels do not have to be fitted with AIS, and although it is mandatory for larger commercial vessels to use AIS, do not assume that they all do. Always exercise due prudence and judgement. AIS complements radar, it is not a radar substitute. VHF antenna 12.3 System settings For the NMEA port that communicates with the AIS transceiver unit, specify a baud rate of 38,400 (see page 188). Classes of AIS data AIS data is defined as Class A or Class B. The sending and receiv-
ing of Class A data is compulsory for larger vessels. You will therefore be able to view all larger vessels on your AIS display. Not all AIS receivers will decode all information and not all of the Class A vessels input all of the required AIS data. For example, some inexpensive AIS Class B receivers do not decode and output the ships name, IMO number and vessel data. Class B data is applicable to smaller vessels and is not compulsory. Do not assume that your AIS will display data for all smaller vessels in your area. 12.4 AIS setup The AIS Layer Setup Menu allows you to:
Select target types displayed (ALL or DANGEROUS). Switch AIS safety messages on or off. View the list of active AIS alarms. To display the AIS Layer Setup Menu 1. Ensure the AIS LAYER is set to ON (see Using AIS, below). 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Select AIS Layer Setup. G-Series Reference Manual 158 12.5 Using AIS 12.6 The AIS data display AIS is a selectable layer of the chart or radar application. To switch AIS layer on 1. With either a chart or radar window active, press the PRESEN-
TATION softkey. 2. If you are in a radar window, toggle AIS on or off using the AIS LAYER softkey. If you are in a chart window, press the CHART LAYERS softkey to open the toolbar containing SYMBOLOGY, then select AIS. AIS status icons Status icons are displayed in the data bar. No recent AIS messages. There are recent AIS messages. AIS unit on with active alarms. 1
1 4 5 9 D oo AIS unit switched on and operating but dangerous and lost alarm disabled. Suitably AIS-enabled vessels (or AIS targets) appear as triangular symbols. Up to 100 targets can be displayed. Heading Large vessel Direction of turn Small vessel Sleeping target Safety critical data 097T 11.6kt 1.237nm 00h04m33s COG/SOG vector Safe zone (defined by distance or time) Dangerous target (flashes) 1 _ 6 5 0 9 D Vectors can be displayed for each target. These vectors indicate the direction of travel and rate of turn of the vessel and the distance it will travel over a specified period of time (COG/SOG vector). Tar-
gets displayed with their vectors are referred to as active targets and are scaled according to the size of the vessel. You can choose to display all targets or just the dangerous ones
(see page 158). 159 Chapter 12: Automatic Identification System AIS Target symbols AIS target symbols are summarized below. Sleeping target Target not activated, dangerous or lost. Activated target Target activated i.e. AIS vector displayed. Vector line (optional) shows predicted distance travelled within given time. Selected target Target selected with cursor. Can activate the target and view detailed data. Dangerous target Targets within specified distance (CPA) or time (TCPA). Dangerous target alarm sounds if en-abled. Target flashes. Uncertain target Calculated CPA/TCPA value uncertain. Lost target When signal of dangerous target not received for 20 seconds. Target in latest predicted position. Alarms sounds if enabled. Target flashes. 12.7 Displaying AIS vectors The AIS vector feature gives you the following data for selected targets:
COG/SOG vector Direction of turn A COG/SOG vector indicating the predicted distance that a tar-
get will travel within a given period of time. Heading Graphical representation of heading and direction of turn. To switch AIS vectors on or off AIS 1. Highlight the AIS target for which you want to display vectors. 2. Toggle to your desired setting on the AIS VECTOR softkey. 12.8 Displaying safety-critical AIS data Safety-critical target data such as COG, SOG, CPA and TCPA can be displayed in the tag alongside each target. You can switch this data on or off or set it to display it automatically when the cursor is over the target. D8523-1 Viewing AIS information To view AIS data 1. Highlight an AIS target. You can display information relating to individual AIS targets. 2. Toggle to your preferred setting on the AIS DATA softkey:
AUTO (default): safety-critical data shown when the cursor is over the target. ON: safety-critical data shown constantly. OFF: safety-critical data never shown. To see AIS data for a selected target 1. Highlight the AIS target with the cursor. 2. Select the appropriate data from the toolbar. The AIS toolbar Softkeys on the AIS toolbar give you access to:
AIS vectors AIS safety critical data AIS List Full AIS data G-Series Reference Manual 160 AIS list 12.9 Safe zones The AIS list provides collision-avoidance data for the highlighted target:
A safe zone is a circular area about your vessel. If another vessel enters this area, the G-Series system considers it dangerous. The perimeter of the zone is displayed on the radar and chart window as a red ring. The AIS safe zone uses the same criteria as MARPA and will deem a target dangerous if it comes within a specified distance of your vessel (closest point of approach, or CPA) within a specified time
(time to closest point of approach, or TCPA). The CPA and TCPA are calculated using COG/SOG and position from the AIS target. When the system recognizes a dangerous AIS target:
The target symbol changes to red and flashes. 1 _ 2 9 0 9 D An warning is displayed. An alarm sounds (if AIS alarm is enabled). To display the AIS List 1. Make a chart window active, with AIS Layer turned on. Safe zone alarm 1. Press the AIS OPTION softkey. 2. Press the TARGET TRACKING softkey. 3. Select AIS LIST. Full AIS data Full AIS data for an individual target includes static, dynamic and voyage related data. To view full AIS data for a target 1. Highlight the target with the cursor. 2. Press the VIEW FULL AIS DATA softkey. or 1. Select the target on the AIS list. 2. Press the VIEW FULL AIS DATA softkey. You can disable the dangerous target alarm. Doing so will prevent the visual warning from displaying and the audible alarm from sounding, but dangerous targets are still displayed in red. The AIS status icon shows the current status of AIS alarms. The dangerous target alarm operates irrespective of the status of the AIS target display or the status (VISIBLE/HIDDEN) of the safe zone ring. To set up an AIS safe zone 1. Press the TARGET TRACKING softkey. 2. Press the MARPA and AIS OPTIONS softkeys. 3. Select Own Vessel Safe Zone and set the radius of your safe zone. 161 Chapter 12: Automatic Identification System Time to safe zone 12.10 MARPA and AIS options The time to safe zone function calculates how long it will take other AIS-equipped vessels to reach your safe zone, based on their AIS data. You can set your system to alert you when such vessels reach a designated time to safe zone. To set the time to safe zone 1. Press the TARGET TRACKING softkey. 2. Press the MARPA and AIS OPTIONS softkey. 3. Select Time to Safe Zone in the MARPA & AIS OPTIONS menu. G-Series Reference Manual 162 Parameter Options Vector Length The time period specified for drawing length of vectors. 0.5min, 1 min, 3 min, 6min, 12min, 30 min, 60 min Target History Plots a MARPA targets previous position at speci-
fied intervals. The four most recent position points are displayed. If True target vectors are selected, the four most recent vessel position points are also displayed. Own vessel safe zone The safe zone is a ring, centred on your boat, within which a target is considered dangerous if it comes within a specified distance (CPA). OFF, 0.5 min, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min 0.1 nm, 0.2nm, 0.5nm, 1.0 nm, 2.0nm Time to safe zone If a target enters your safe zone within this time period, it is considered dangerous. 3 mins, 6 mins, 12 mins, 24 mins Safe zone ring Controls whether the safe zone ring is displayed or hidden on screen Visible Hidden Safety messages When AIS Safety Messages is on (controlled from the AIS Layer Setup Menu), incoming safety messages from vessels, shore sta-
tions and mobile stations are displayed in a pop-up box. The message will include latitude and longitude if it is available. Whenever you receive a safety message, the system gives you options to:
Remove the message (ACKNOWLEDGE). Place a waypoint to mark the sending vessels position. GOTO the sending vessels position. Note: When the simulator is operating you will not be able to To acknowledge an AIS alarm 1. Press either the REMOVE MESSAGE or VIEW AIS ALARM receive any safety messages. LIST softkey. 12.11 AIS alarms In addition to the dangerous target alarm, the system generates an alarm when a dangerous target becomes lost (this happens if the AIS signal from a tracked vessel is not received for more than 20 seconds). When the connected AIS unit generates an alarm, the G-Series system indicates the alarm status in the data bar and displays a warning message:
AIS Alarm active icon 2. Acknowledge the message at your AIS unit. Note: Alarms remain active until they are acknowledged on the AIS unit. Removing the message or adding it to the Alarm list on your G-Series system does not cancel the alarm. 12.12 Simulator mode We recommend that you use the simulator to familiarize yourself with the AIS function. When the system simulator is switched on (see page 29), it dis-
plays 20 AIS targets within a 25nm range. These targets are displayed using the appropriate AIS targets status symbol (see page 160) and move around the screen as if they were real targets. 4nm North-Up
(Relative Motion) Local Note: Incoming safety messages cannot be displayed while the simulator is switched on. AIS Local Alarm
"AIS message"
This alarm must be acknowledged on your AIS Receiver. To remove this message press REMOVE MESSAGE. AIS message REMOVE MESSAGE VIEW AIS ALARM LIST... 1 _ 8 6 9 8 D Active alarm list The active alarm list shows the status of each local alarm. This list can either be accessed via the AIS Layer Setup Menu (see page 158) or from the Alarms Setup Menu (see page 194). 163 Chapter 12: Automatic Identification System G-Series Reference Manual 164 Chapter 13: Video The video application allows the G-Series system to display images from on-board cameras and DVD players. 13 Chapter contents 13.1 Video overview on page 166 13.2 Setting up the video application on page 166 13.3 Using composite video on input 1 on page 166 13.6 Cycling through video feeds on page 167 13.7 Adjusting the image on page 167 See also G-Series System Installation Guide for information about connecting video equipment, and the various input configurations available. 13.1 Video overview The G-Series system is supplied with S-Video cabling but you can also use composite video devices. Video processing is handled by a GVM400: each of these devices provides four inputs. The total number of video inputs available depends upon your system configuration. The system can handle multiple video inputs, and you can cycle through the attached devices to stay updated on each view. You can also adjust the brightness, contrast, color and aspect ratio of the image, adjust audio volume, and set a video window to dis-
play a mirror image of the feed (see page 167). 13.2 Setting up the video application Before you can use the video application, you may need to config-
ure a page set to include a video application window. For information about how to do that, see page 25. At installation, the video module (GVM400) or modules attached to your system, along with any video input devices, were named. You can change these names if you wish. Customizing the video application You need to change the default settings in the following circumstances:
To use composite video on input 1. To name video inputs (for example engine room, view stern, DVD, etc). To cycle video views. To set up the selection softkeys. All these options are accessed from the Video Setup Menu. To open the video setup menu 1. With a video window active, press the MENU button. 2. Select Video Setup Menu. 3. Press OK. 13.3 Using composite video on input 1 By default, the system allows for one S-Video input (input 1) and three composite video inputs (inputs 2-4). If you want to use input 1 for composite video, you need to change the video input settings. To change video input settings 1. Open the Video Setup Menu. 2. Select Composite. 3. Press OK. 13.4 Setting a name for the video feed By default, the video sources are labelled Comp1 to Comp3 and S-Video. You can change these labels to make them more descriptive, for example: engine room, stern, or bow. You can also rename each video controller module (GVM). To edit the video feed name 1. Open the Video Setup Menu. 2. Select the video source whose name you want to change. 3. Select RENAME. 4. Change the name and press OK to save the changes. 13.5 Selecting a video input To change choose a video input to display, press the appropriate softkey. If you have more than four video inputs, press the rotary controller to open a list of all video feeds available and then select the one you want to use. G-Series Reference Manual 166 13.6 Cycling through video feeds 13.7 Adjusting the image You can set up the video application to cycle through images from the attached devices. This is particularly useful if you have on-
board cameras and want a regular overview of the areas they are pointing at. You can specify the length of time each feed is displayed for. By default the cycle period is 10 seconds but you can change this
(from 1 to 99 seconds) if required. While a video cycle is running, you cannot change the aspect ratio, contrast, brightness or color levels of the video image. Unless a video cycle is running, you can make changes to the aspect ratio, contrast, color and brightness settings in the video application. Mirror image Setting up a video window to display a mirror-image of the video feed can be useful if you have, for example, a rear-facing camera linked to a forward-facing display. To set up a video cycle 1. Open the Video Setup Menu. Aspect ratio 2. Select Cycle 1 and the name of the input you want to set as the first view in the cycle. 3. Repeat this process for each successive input in the cycle. 4. To exclude an input from the cycle, switch its status to NONE. The video application automatically detects the appropriate aspect ratio for each input source. If an image appears distorted
(squashed or stretched), you can override the automatic setting to choose the appropriate aspect ratio manually. To set the cycle period 1. Open the Video Setup Menu. 2. Specify the cycle period. 3. Press OK. To run the video cycle 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Toggle the CYCLE VIDEO setting to ON. To stop running the video cycle 1. Press any of the four video softkeys. or 1. Toggle the CYCLE VIDEO option to OFF. An aspect ratio of 4:3 is standard format, while 16:9 is widescreen format. To change the aspect ratio 1. Open the Video Setup menu. 2. Navigate to the required setting using the trackpad. Contrast, brightness and color If necessary you can adjust the level of contrast, brightness or color. If a video cycle is running, this adjustment is unavailable. To change contract, brightness or color 1. Press the PRESENTATION softkey. 2. Choose the setting you want to change. 3. Make your adjustments using the rotary controller. 4. Press OK. 167 Chapter 13: Video G-Series Reference Manual 168 Chapter 14: Sirius Audio (US only) If you have a Sirius SR100 data receiver installed, you can use the G-Series system to control satellite radio broadcasts. Refer to the SR100 documentation for installation information. 14 Chapter contents 14.1 Using Sirius Radio on page 170 14.2 Tuning to a channel on page 170 14.3 Browsing channels on page 170 14.4 Scanning channels on page 171 14.5 Hiding or showing channels and categories on page 171 14.6 Presets on page 171 14.7 Parental locking on page 172 14.8 Favourite song alerts on page 172 14.1 Using Sirius Radio The toolbar gives you access to the functions outlined below. MUTE ON/OFF Controls the mute setting. PRESETS As well as using the G-Series to control your radio, you can set up parental locks to limit access to selected channels and create alerts to tell you when a favourite song is being played. To start using Sirius radio 1. Press MENU. 2. On the Setup Menu, select Sirius Satellite Radio. The Sirius Radio Control screen opens:
SETUP CHANNELS ALERTS BROWSE Displays a list of preset channels and the full channel list with modify options. Use the trackpad or rotary controller to scroll through the list of presets. Gives access to the Edit Presets, Edit Alerts, Edit Channel Access, Scan Channels softkeys. Lets you set up an alert to tell you when favou-
rite songs or artists are played on any channel. Scroll to view play data and to select channels, presets, or categories. Information contained on the Sirius Radio Control screen includes:
14.2 Tuning to a channel From the Sirius Control screen, you tune to channels using the trackpad or the alphanumeric keys. Trackpad up Next channel. Trackpad down Previous channel. Current channel name, number and category Trackpad left First channel in the previous category. Play data for the current channel Date and time Receiver ID and signal strength Use the softkeys and trackpad to control audio functions. Use the rotary controller to adjust volume. Trackpad right First channel in the next category. 14.3 Browsing channels The browse function allows you to view play data for channels with-
out tuning to them. G-Series Reference Manual 170 To browse channels 1. On the Sirius Audio Control screen, press the BROWSE softkey. Pressing this key displays the Channel List or Preset List for browsing. Toggle between the two lists with the VIEW ALL/PRE softkey. 2. Use the rotary controller or trackpad to scroll through the channels. 3. Press the TUNE TO CHANNEL softkey (or the rotary controller) to listen to the selected channel. To go back to the Sirius Control screen, press OK or CANCEL. Filtering categories from the browse This feature allows you to choose a category from which to browse channels; other categories are excluded from the browse. 14.5 Hiding or showing channels and categories You can select particular channels and categories to be excluded
(hidden) from the Browse and Scan sequences. To hide or show a channel or category 1. Press the SETUP CHANNELS softkey. 2. Select EDIT CHANNEL ACCESS. 3. In the channel list, select the channel you want to hide. If you want to hide a category, select any channel in that category. 4. Toggle between hidden and shown states with either the CHANNEL SHOWN/HIDDEN or CATEGORY SHOWN/
HIDDEN softkeys. 14.6 Presets To filter categories 1. On the Browse screen, press the FILTER BY softkey. 2. Press the SELECT CATEGORY softkey. 3. Using the trackpad or rotary controller, select the category you You can assign up to 18 channels to presets to make tuning, scan-
ning and browsing easier. To assign a channel to a preset, use the PRESETS softkey from the main control screen or the EDIT PRE-
SETS softkey from either of the following screens:
want to browse. 4. Press OK. 14.4 Scanning channels The Scan function automatically tunes to all channels in turn. To scan channels 1. Press the SETUP CHANNELS softkey. 2. Select SCAN CHANNELS. 3. Use the SCAN ALL/PRE softkey to choose to scan all channels or only preset channels. 4. Press SELECT to stop the scan and listen to the active channel. Setup channels Browse channels At the Edit Preset Channels screen you can select a preset and assign a channel to it, move the assigned channel to a different preset, or delete the assigned channel. Toggle between the Preset Channels list and the Channel List either by using the trackpad (left/right) or by pressing the appropri-
ate softkey. To assign a channel to a preset 1. Select an unused preset number from the Preset List. 2. Press the ASSIGN NEW CHANNEL softkey. 3. Select the target channel from the Channel List. 4. Press the ASSIGN TO PRESET softkey. 171 Chapter 14: Sirius Audio (US only) Note: If the preset you want to use already has a channel assigned to it, delete the preset first. To change an existing password 1. Press the EDIT CHANNEL ACCESS softkey. To delete a channel from a preset 1. In the Preset Channels list, select the preset you want to clear. 2. Press the EDIT LOCKOUT PASSWORD softkey. 3. Enter your old password, then the new password and hint. 2. Press the DELETE CHANNEL softkey. To move a channel to a new preset 1. Use the rotary controller or trackpad to select the preset you want to move. 2. Press MOVE TO NEW PRESET. 3. Scroll to the preset you want to move the channel to. 4. Press MOVE TO NEW PRESET. Note: You can overwrite a channel that has already been assigned to a preset, but you will be prompted to confirm the action. 14.7 Parental locking You can set up blocks on selected channels so that they can only be played if a correct password is entered. Parental locking must be enabled for the blocks on your selected channels to be effective. By default, blocking is not enabled. To enable blocking 1. Press the SETUP CHANNELS softkey. 2. Press the PARENTAL LOCK ON/OFF softkey so that ON is highlighted. To set up a password 1. Press the SETUP CHANNELS softkey. 2. Press the PARENTAL LOCK softkey to highlight ON. 3. At the Password Setup screen, enter and confirm your pass-
word and hint. You can also access the password entry screen by pressing EDIT CHANNEL ACCESS then CHANNEL ENABLED/LOCKED. To block a channel 1. Press the SETUP CHANNELS softkey. 2. Press the EDIT CHANNEL ACCESS softkey. 3. 4. Press the CHANNEL ENABLED/LOCKED to highlight In the Channel List, select the channel you want to block. LOCKED. 5. Repeat steps 3-4 for each additional channel you want to block. 6. When you blocked all the channels you want, press the CLEAR key. 7. Ensure the parental lock is on (ON is highlighted on the PARENTAL LOCK ON/OFF softkey). 8. At the prompt, enter your password. Blocked channels remain visible in channel lists, but you cannot select them with the trackpad and they are ignored by the scan function. They are marked as locked by an icon next to the channel name. Entering passwords If you select a blocked channel from the channel list or want to block a channel when the parental lock is on, you will be asked to enter the password. After three incorrect attempts, the system displays your password hint. 14.8 Favourite song alerts The favourites feature alerts you when a favourite song or artist is playing on any channel. You can define up to ten favourites using the Alerts softkey. G-Series Reference Manual 172 To enable favourite alerts 1. Press the ALERTS softkey to open the Edit Alerts screen. 2. Use the ALERTS ON/OFF softkey to toggle favourite alerts on and off. To set up a song or artist alert Press the ALERTS softkey to open the Edit Alerts screen. This screen shows ten favourites and the song playing currently. You can delete a favourite from the list, add the current song or artist to the list or switch the favourites alert off. You can also mark a channel or song as a favourite by pressing the ASSIGN TO ALERT softkey while scanning. When alerts are turned on and the system detects one of your favourites being played on any channel, it will display an alert and sound the alarm. To tune to the channel playing the song, press TUNE TO CHANNEL. To ignore the alert, press CLEAR ALERT. 173 Chapter 14: Sirius Audio (US only) G-Series Reference Manual 174 Chapter 15: Course Deviation Indicator With the G-Series system receiving accurate heading and position data, you can use the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) to monitor your course and help you steer to a target waypoint. 15 Chapter contents 15.1 The CDI display on page 176 15.2 Using the CDI application on page 176 15.1 The CDI display Steering instructions The CDI gives you a rolling road representation of your progress, with navigation data displayed alongside. The rolling road covers an area of sea that corresponds to the Cross Track Error (XTE) limits specified in the Setup menu. On course line Target waypoint Direction of next waypoint The steering instructions below the rolling road tell you what correc-
tion is needed to maintain your course and arrive at the target waypoint. Instruction Cause STEER STARBOARD STEER PORT XTE error to port is more than a 1/4 of the maximum XTE error limit in the Setup menu XTE error to starboard is more than a 1/4 of the maximum XTE error limit in the Setup menu Indicator-arrows either side of the steering instruction (pointing towards the centre line) tell you how great or small the error is. The greater the error, the greater the number of arrows. Correct your course by steering in the direction indicated by the arrows. Target way-
point name Direction to steer Direction to steer to maintain course 15.2 Using the CDI application To use the CDI, you need to select a page set that includes a CDI window. For more information about page sets, see Choosing page sets on page 25. 1
5 1 5 9 D 1 _ 5 1 5 9 D To open the CDI application 1. Press and hold the PAGE button to open the Select Page Set window. 2. Select a page set that includes the CDI application. G-Series Reference Manual 176 3. Select a page that includes a CDI window. PAGE Select page including CDI window D9517-1 177 Chapter 15: Course Deviation Indicator G-Series Reference Manual 178 Chapter 16: The Data Application The data application shows you data that is generated by the G-Series system, or that is received from attached instruments. 16 Chapter contents 16.1 The data display on page 180 16.2 Using the data application on page 180 16.1 The data display The data screen gives you access to five preconfigured data panels. For more information about page sets, see Choosing page sets on page 25. Panel Type Navigation Waypoint Route Fishing Sailing Vessel position Active waypoint TTG VMG - Waypoint Depth Cog Sog Heading Speed Set/Drift XTE Trip t n e t n o c a t a D Local time Sea temperature Ground wind App wind True wind VMG wind 1 _ 0 5 9 8 D To select a pre-configured data panel 1. Press the ACTIVE button. 2. Press the appropriate softkey. Customizing data panels You can customize each panel by changing any or all of the follow-
ing attributes:
Panel name. Size and number of data cells. 1 3 1 5 9 D 16.2 Using the data application To use the data application, you need to select a page set that includes a data window. You can select a panel of pre-configured data or customize any panel to display the data of your choice. Pre-configured data panels include data associated with G-Series navigation, waypoint, route, fishing or sailing functions. G-Series Reference Manual 180 Cell data: a cell can contain any transducer- or internally-calcu-
lated data that is available on NMEA or SeaTalk. Additional data includes a compass gauge, a distance log and four reset-
table trip counters. Type of display: data can be shown in numerical, gauge or graphical format as appropriate. To rename a panel 1. Press the MENU button and select Panel Setup Menu. 2. Select the panel you want to rename. 3. Press the RENAME softkey. 4. Set the name. 5. Press OK. To select data for a cell to contain 1. Press the MENU button and select Panel Setup Menu. 2. Select the cell you want to assign data to. 3. Press the SELECT DATA softkey. 4. Select the data type and format. 5. Press OK. To split cells 1. Press the MENU button and select Panel Setup Menu. 2. Select the cell you want to split. 3. Press the vertical or horizontal SPLIT CELL softkey as appropriate. The direction in which the selected cell will be split is indicated by an arrowhead on the softkey label. To merge cells 1. Press the MENU button and select Panel Setup Menu. 2. From the pair of cells you want to merge, select either the left-
or upper-most cell. 3. Press the vertical or horizontal MERGE CELLS softkey as appropriate. The direction in which the cells will be merged is indicated by an arrowhead on the softkey label. 181 Chapter 16: The Data Application G-Series Reference Manual 182 Chapter 17: Engine Monitor The engine monitor lets you view information from up to three compatible engines in the form of gauges and digital data. Engines with a J1939 or NMEA 2000 interface are compatible. 17 Chapter contents 17.1 The engine monitor on page 184 17.2 Setting up the engine monitor on page 184 17.3 Available data on page 184 17.4 Engine monitor alarms on page 185 See also www.raymarine.com for information about compatible engines and related software updates. 17.1 The engine monitor The engine monitor toolbar gives you access to five preconfigured data panels. You can customize these panels in the same way as you do in the data application. For more information about custom-
izing data panels, see Customizing data panels on page 180. To set engine and tachometer values 1. Open the Panel Setup Menu (with an engine monitor window active, press the MENU button). 2. Set the number of engines. 3. Set the maximum tachometer range. 50 25 75 0 100
Fuel 1 50 25 75 0 100
Fuel 2 Fuel Rate 11.61 gals/h Fuel Rate 13.95 gals/h ENGINE ENGINE &
FUEL FUEL RESOURCES ENGINE &
RESOURCES TWIN ENGINE 3 _ 6 1 5 7 D 17.2 Setting up the engine monitor Before you use the engine monitor, you need to:
Customize a page set to include an engine monitor window. Set the number of engines and the maximum tachometer range to reflect your particular vessel. For information about how to do customize page sets, see Choos-
ing page sets on page 25. G-Series Reference Manual 184 Temperature and fuel units Engine temperature units (F or C) and fuel units (liters, imperial gallons or US gallons) are defined in the System Setup Menu under Units Setup. 17.3 Available data The table below summarizes the data contained in each pre-config-
ured data panel (available on the softkeys). Panel Type Engine Engine
& fuel Fuel resources Engine &
resources Multi engines (3) t n e t n o c a t a D Tacho &
engine hours Oil pressure Engine coolant temperature Boost pressure Alternator Fuel level
(tanks 1 & 2) Fuel rate Total fuel 1 _ 3 5 9 8 D 17.4 Engine monitor alarms The engine monitor triggers an alarm (over NMEA/SeaTalk2) when a problem is detected. If this occurs, check the engine monitoring system and if necessary refer to the documentation supplied with your engine system. Press ACKNOWLEDGE to silence the alarm. Note: When engine monitoring is active, all other system alarms remain active. 185 Chapter 17: Engine Monitor G-Series Reference Manual 186 Chapter 18: System Setup and Customizing This chapter details the settings available on the system Setup menu. For instructions on how to use the menus, see Operating Principles on page 21. 18 Chapter contents 18.1 Page sets on page 188 18.2 Databar on page 188 18.3 Compass bar on page 189 18.4 Compass Setup on page 190 18.6 System-wide settings on page 191 18.5 GPS Setup on page 190 The system Setup menu is split into sections: application-specific, external equipment and system-wide. 18.2 Databar Configuration options available on the Databar Setup screen include:
Position on screen At the top or on the side of the display. Size For the top position, set to large or small. Data displayed Note: The databar configuration applies only to the display on which you are working. To configure the databar 1. Open the system Setup Menu. 2. Select Databar Setup then Configure. 3. Press the appropriate softkey:
ADD DATA REMOVE DATA MOVE DATA 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 5. Press OK when complete. Application-specific menus are context-sensitive. The menu that opens is appropriate to the application in the active window when you press the MENU button. For application-specific setup menu details, refer to the appro-
priate application chapter of this book. External equipment menus provide options to set up external equipment that is connected to your G-Series system. This might include AIS, Navtex, GPS or Compass equipment; the options available on the menu depend upon what is connected. System setup menus control functions throughout the system. When you first power on your system, default values are used. The tables that follow show the sub-menus, settings and options that are available to customize those defaults. Changes you make on one display affect all displays in the net-
work, with the exception of Display Setup, Databar Setup and Select Page set. 18.1 Page sets If none of the default page sets suit you, you can edit them to dis-
play the application and page layouts you want. To configure a page set 1. Open the system Setup menu. 2. Open the Select Page Set screen. 3. Highlight the page set you want to edit. 4. Press the appropriate softkey:
EDIT PAGE SET RENAME PAGE SET RESET TO DEFAULT PAGES 5. Follow the on-screen instructions for the option you selected. 6. Press OK. G-Series Reference Manual 188 The table below lists the data available. Data groups Data (abbreviations in brackets) Data groups Data (abbreviations in brackets) CURSOR POSITION Cursor position (Csr Pos) VESSEL Vessel position (Ves Pos) Course over ground/Speed over ground
(COG/SOG) Heading Speed Wind velocity made good (VMG Wind) Waypoint velocity made good (VMG Wpt) Log trip Log Trip Ground Log/Trip 1 Ground Log Ground Trip 1 Ground Trip 2 Ground Trip 3 Ground Trip 4 Rudder TRANSDUCER STATUS Transducer status Log trip You can view the total distance travelled (Log) and the distance of your current journey (Trip) based on your speed through water
(STW) from a speed transducer. In addition you can include in your data application or databar, ground log and four ground trip counters based on your GPS posi-
tion. These counters are updated every minute and can be individually reset from the system setup menu. If the GPS fix is lost or if the system simulator is switched on, the system will pause the ground log and trip counters. When the GPS fix returns, or the system simulator is switched off, the ground log and trip counters resume. NAVIGATION Cross track error (XTE) Waypoint (WPT) DEPTH Depth ENVIRONMENT WIND Pressure Air temperature (Air Temp) Sea temperature (Sea Temp) Set drift True wind Apparent wind (App Wind) Ground wind TIME AND DATE Local time Local date 18.3 Compass bar The compass bar gives you a continuous readout centred on your current heading or course over ground (COG). Arrows at either end of the bar indicate current steer direction. When displayed, it replaces the databar and is always positioned at the top of the screen. 189 Chapter 18: System Setup and Customizing Active waypoint Bearing marker Steer direction In heading mode, the bearing marker is RED. In COG mode, the bearing marker is GREEN. When you use the compass bar with an active waypoint, the bearing marker is BLUE and the active waypoint symbol indi-
cates the bearing to your waypoint. You turn the compass bar on and off from the data toolbar. To turn the compass bar on and off 1. Press the DATA button. 2. Use the DATABAR softkey to turn the compass bar on or off. Compass bar setup The compass bar is set to open in heading mode. To change this setting, press the MENU button and go to the Databar Setup menu where you can select either Heading or COG. Note: If a man overboard (MOB) alarm is activated while the compass bar is open, the compass is replaced with the MOB toolbar. The compass bar returns when you cancel the active MOB. 18.4 Compass Setup This option can be used to linearize, or swing, a Raymarine ST80 active compass or Smart Heading sensor connected on SeaTalk. Note: You calibrate an autopilot compass through the autopilot control head. To linearize your compass 1. Select Compass Setup. 2. Press the LINEARIZE COMPASS softkey. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. 4. Use the rotary controller to fine-tune heading alignment. ON Displays the standard databar, at the top or side of the screen depending on your setup options. 18.5 GPS Setup COMPASS Replaces the standard databar with the compass bar, displayed along the top of the screen. OFF Removes both the databar and the compass bar from your display. The GPS is used to position your boat on the chart. You can set up your Global Positioning System (GPS) and check its status from the GPS Status option in the Setup Menu. For each tracked satellite, this screen provides:
Note: When the compass bar is displayed the transducer icons remain visible in the top-right section of the screen. satellite number signal strength bar status azimuth angle elevation angle A sky-view to show the position of tracked satellites G-Series Reference Manual 190 Actual mode GPS reporting
(No Fix, Fix, D Fix or SD Fix) COG/SOG filter Set the COG/SOG filter to the level appropriate to your use and to the level of oscillation being experienced by the GPS:
HIGH for trawling or when there is a high level of oscillation. MEDIUM for general use. 5. LOW when travelling at speed.Display Setup DIFF GPS ON OFF DIFF SET UP OTHER SET UP RESTART GPS The following tables detail the options available under each of the system-wide menu items. Mode selected by GPS 18.6 System-wide settings Only available if connected to Raymarine landbased GPS e.g. 114 3 _ 9 0 8 6 D GPS accuracy depends upon the parameters shown, especially the azimuth and elevation angles which are used in triangulation to cal-
culate your position. Horizontal Dilution of Position (HDOP) is a measure of GPS accu-
racy; a higher figure signifies a greater positional error. In ideal circumstances, the figure should be in the region of 1.0. Satellite differential system Select the satellite group(s) appropriate to your area using the Other Set Up softkey:
WAAS - United States EGNOS - Europe MSAS - Japan GAGAN - India Note: The EGNOS, MSAS and GAGAN systems may not be active. Check with your local government for operational status. 191 Chapter 18: System Setup and Customizing System Setup menu MENU ITEM OPTIONS Position Mode Controls whether the position is expressed in latitude and longitude co-ordinates or Loran TDs. TD Setup If the Position Mode is set to TDs, this function controls the selected chain identifier, slave and ASF. Lat/Long TDs Various Simulator ON - allows operation of display without data from antenna and/or external data sources. Demo - a series of slides with descriptions to demonstrate the various system functions. OFF ON Demo Bearing Mode Mode of all bearing and heading data displayed. This does not affect how the chart or radar are drawn. True Magnetic MOB Data Type Selects whether position data or dead reckoning displayed on screen. Assuming your boat and the MOB are subject to same tide and wind effects, dead reckoning normally gives a more accurate course. Variation Source This allows you to compensate for the naturally occurring offset of the earths magnetic field. When set to AUTO, the value the system would use (or is using) is noted in the menu e.g. 40W. To enter your own variation value, set to MANUAL. Dead Reckoning Position Auto Manual Manual variation If Variation Source is set to MANUAL then use this setting to enter the variation value. This value is transmitted to any other SeaTalk instruments. 0E Range 0 - 30 east/west G-Series Reference Manual 192 MENU ITEM Language Selected language used for screen text, labels, menus, options and display format for lat/lon position information. OPTIONS Selection available will vary according to your location. Extended Character Set Controls whether additional accented characters are made available when you are entering text. OFF ON Ground Trip Reset... Resets the chosen ground trip distance counter to zero. Ground Trip 1 -
4 Reset Settings Reset Resets all system setup menus, including page sets and the data bar to the factory default. Waypoints, routes and tracks are NOT removed. Settings and Data Reset Resets all system setup menus, including page sets and the data bar to the factory default. Waypoints, routes and tracks are deleted. Date /Time Setup Units Setup System Integration See sub-menu below See sub-menu below See sub-menu below Waypoint Password Set-up... Allows you to set up a password to protect access to your waypoint and route databases. Date/Time Setup Menu MENU ITEM Date Format Displays date as day/month/year or month/day/year Time Format Displays either 12 or 24 hour clock Local Time Offset Specify local time in increments of 0.5 hours (+/- 13) from the Universal Time Constant. Use rotary control for 0.5hr increments and trackpad to individually adjust the value of the tens, units, and tenths - system rounds to nearest 0.5 hr. Units Setup Menu MENU ITEM OPTIONS OPTIONS mm/dd/yy dd/mm/yy 12hr 24hr
+/- 13hrs from UTC Pressure Units Select required pressure unit. Volume Units Select required volume unit. Bar Psi Kpa US Gallons Imp Gallons Litres MENU ITEM OPTIONS Distance Unit Choose the units you require distances to be displayed in. Speed Units Choose the units that you require speed to be measured in. Depth Units Choose the units that you require depths to be measured in. Temperature Units Select required temperate unit. NM Miles km Knots MPH KPH Meters Feet Fathoms Fahrenheit Celsius 193 Chapter 18: System Setup and Customizing System Integration Setup Menu Alarm Setup Menu MENU ITEM OPTIONS DSC Message When set to ON, details of distress DSC messages are displayed on screen ON OFF SeaTalk Alarms When set to enabled, all SeaTalk system alarms are received and displayed on the chartplotter. Enabled Disabled Data Master When set to ON, the display you are working on is defined as the master. Bridge NMEA Heading Used to prevent NMEA heading data being bridged onto the SeaTalk bus. Switch this function off if you are using MARPA with an external fast heading sensor. NMEA Output Setup Allows you to switch off individual NMEA out sentences ON OFF ON OFF APB, BWC, BWR, DBT, DPT, GGA, GLL, MTW, RMA, RMB, RMC, RSD, RTE, TTM, VHW, VLW, VTG, WPL, ZDA NMEA Port Setting Select the appropriate setting dependent on the equip-
ment attached to the NMEA port for each individual display. When Navtex 4,800 or 9,600 selected, the option to view the Navtex message list is available. NMEA 4,800 Navtex 4,800 Navtex 9,600 AIS 38,400 Note: If AIS or Navtex has been set on any display in the system, the menu options will be available on all displays. Navtex and AIS are available simultaneously. G-Series Reference Manual 194 The Alarm Setup Menu has five sub-menus:
System Alarms Setup Navigation Alarms Setup Radar Alarms Setup Fishfinder Alarms Setup AIS Alarms Setup System Alarms Setup System alarms sound in all applications. MENU ITEM Anchor Alarm Switches the anchor alarm on or off. Anchor Alarm Radius If the Anchor Alarm is set to ON, an alarm is triggered when you drift from your anchor position by more than the specified distance. OPTIONS OFF ON 0.01 - 9.99 nm 0.10nm
(or equivalent in the selected Distance Unit) Timer Switches the countdown timer alarm on or off OFF ON Timer Period If the Timer is set to ON, the system counts down from the time you specify. An alarm is triggered when zero is reached. 00h01m - 99hrs 59mins 00h00m Alarm Clock Switches the alarm clock on or off. OFF ON Alarm Clock Time If the Alarm Clock is set to ON, an alarm is triggered when the time you specify is reached. 00.01 - 24:00hrs 00:00 Radar Alarms Setup These alarms will only sound when you are in the radar application. MENU ITEM Guard Zone Sensitivity Ensure that this is not set too low or targets will be missed. OPTIONS 50%
0 - 100%
Note: If a radar is not detected, the alarm setup windows are grayed out. MENU ITEM Temperature Alarm If this alarm is set to ON, an alarm is triggered if the temperature moves into or out of the range that you have specified in Lower Temperature Limit /Upper Temperature Limit. OPTIONS OFF ON Lower Temperature Limit Specifies the lower limit of the sea temperature range that is to trigger the Temperature Alarm. Upper Temperature Limit Specifies the upper limit of the sea temperature range that is to trigger the Temperature Alarm. 60F 0-99.8F 75F 0.2-99.9F Navigation Alarms Setup Navigation alarms will sound in any application when you are navigating. MENU ITEM Arrival Alarm Radius The distance from the target waypoint or the closest point of approach to the target waypoint that triggers the arrival alarm to sound. OPTIONS 0.1nm 0.01 - 9.99nm Offtrack Alarm Switches the off-track alarm on or off OFF ON Offtrack Alarm XTE If the Offtrack Alarm is set to ON, an alarm is triggered when the XTE for any current navigation, exceeds the value that you have specified. 0.3nm 0.01 - 9.99nm
(or equivalent in the selected Distance Unit) 195 Chapter 18: System Setup and Customizing Fishfinder Alarms Setup Note: If a fishfinder is not detected, the alarm setup windows are greyed out. AIS Alarms Setup Dangerous Targets Alarm Switches the alarm for dangerous targets to on or off. When OFF, the AIS alarm off icon is displayed in the status bar. OFF ON AIS Alarm List Details the identity, description, time and acknowledge-
ment of alarm messages received from an AIS receiver. Display setup MENU OPTION OPTIONS Soft key Autohide Controls whether the toolbar is automatically hidden if not used for a period of 10 seconds. Pressing any key re-displays it. Cursor Autohide Controls whether the cursor is automatically hidden if not used for 10 seconds. Pressing any key re-displays the cursor. Key beep Controls whether a noise is made when you press a key. Text size Controls the size of the text on the screen OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Small Large MENU ITEM Fish Alarm Switches the fish alarm on or off. Fish Alarm Sensitivity If the Fish Alarm is set to ON, an alarm is triggered when the fish return strength reaches the sensitivity that you specify. OPTION OFF ON 5%
10% - 100%
Fish Alarm Depth Limits If the Fish Alarm and this alarm is set to ON, an alarm is triggered (2 beeps) if any target meets the sensitivity level and is within the Shallow Fish Limit and Deep Fish Limit that you specify. OFF ON Shallow Fish Limit Specifies the lower value for the Fish Alarm Depth LImit. 2ft
(0002ft - 1000ft) Deep Fish Limit Specifies the upper value for the Fish Alarm Depth LImit 1000ft
(0002ft - 5000ft) Shallow Depth Alarm Switches the shallow depth alarm on or off. If a DSM is not connected, this cannot be set. OFF ON Shallow Depth Alarm Value If the Shallow Depth Alarm is set to ON, an alarm is trig-
gered if the depth drops below the value you specify. 5ft
(0002ft - maximum range of transducer) Deep Depth Alarm Switches the deep depth alarm on or off. If a DSM is not connected, this cannot be set. OFF ON Deep Depth Alarm Value If the Deep Depth Alarm is set to ON, an alarm is trig-
gered if the depth exceeds the value that you specify. G-Series Reference Manual 196 Chapter 19: CompactFlash Cards and Managing Data CompactFlash cards expand the capabilities of the G-Series system. They provide:
Detailed cartographic information Obtain cartographic information using Navionics chart cards. To check the current availability of Navion-
ics chart card types, visit www.navionics.com or www.navionics.it. 19 Archiving and updating Store waypoints, routes and tracks and update system software. Saving data Save waypoint, route and track data for use on other equipment like personal computers. Chapter contents 19.1 Cautions on page 198 19.2 Card insertion and removal on page 198 19.3 Saving and retrieving data on page 199 19.4 Sending and receiving data from a personal computer on page 199 19.5 Password protecting your waypoints on page 200 19.1 Cautions CompactFlash Card Installation When installing CompactFlash cards ensure that the card is fitted the correct way around. DO NOT try to force the card into position as this may result in irreparable damage to the card. Water Ingress To prevent the ingress of water and consequent damage to the unit, ensure that the chart card door is firmly closed at all times. This can be confirmed by an audible click. Card Removal DO NOT use a metallic instrument such as a screwdriver or pliers to help you remove a card, as doing this can cause irreparable damage. Card writing CompactFlash cards can be damaged if they are removed from the unit during either a read or write operation. A warning is displayed during write operations. The unit is continually reading the card. It is therefore essential that before removing the card you follow the correct procedure to stop access to the card. Note: Raymarine recommends the use of SanDisk Standard Compact Flash memory for reliability. 19.2 Card insertion and removal You can remove and insert cards while a chart is displayed pro-
vided that you follow the correct procedure. Chart information is retained on-screen until the chartplotter redraws the screen; for example, when you pan outside the current area, or use the RANGE button to change the chart scale. Cartographic data is available on any monitor. Card removal Only remove the card while the CF Card Removal message is dis-
played. This is opened through the setup menu, documented below. Once the message is closed, the card should no longer be removed If you try to remove a card without accessing the setup menu, a blue screen and warning message is displayed and the unit must be restarted. To insert a CompactFlash card 1. Check that you are using the correct type of card (see Important Information, at the beginning of this manual). 2. Open the chart card door. 3. Insert the card with the lip of the card facing inwards. It should position easily. If it does not, DO NOT force it but check the direction in which the lip is facing. 4. Gently press the card home. 5. To prevent the ingress of water and consequent damage, close the chart card door and press firmly until it clicks. To remove a CompactFlash card with the unit powered up 1. Press the MENU button to open the system Setup menu. 2. Select Remove CF Card. 3. When you see the message telling you it is safe to do so, remove the card. Do not remove a card until you see the pop-up saying it is safe to do. Otherwise you could lose data. 4. Open the chart card door. 5. Grip the card and pull to remove it from its slot. 6. To prevent water damage, close the chart card door and press firmly until it clicks. 7. Press OK. To remove a CompactFlash card with the unit powered down 1. Open the chart card door. G-Series Reference Manual 198 2. Grip the card and pull to remove it from its slot. 3. To prevent water damage, close the chart card door and press firmly until it clicks. If your selection is already found to exist on the system, a warning message appears and the softkey labels change to give you the options of retrieving as new, replacing the data or cancelling the retrieving process. 19.3 Saving and retrieving data The system can save up to 3000 waypoints, 150 routes and 15 tracks in database lists. Once this number is reached, you need to archive data to a CompactFlash card for safe-keeping or retrieval at a later date. Alternatively, you can transfer data to another instrument or PC using SeaTalkhs or NMEA. When navigation is active, you can also receive waypoints, routes and tracks from a PC, other SeaTalkhs, SeaTalk and NMEA instruments (see page 199). Raymarine strongly recommend that you save data to a separate CompactFlash card and not to a Navionics card containing cartography. To save data to a CF card 1. Make sure the correct card is inserted. 2. Press the DATA button. 3. Press the ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER softkey. 4. Press the SAVE TO CARD softkey. 5. Select the data list you want to save on the SELECT LIST softkey. 6. Define the data you want to save by pressing the appropriate softkey. To retrieve information from a CF card 1. Insert the appropriate card. 2. Press the DATA button. 3. Press the ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER softkey. 4. Press the RETRIEVE FROM CARD softkey. 5. Select the data list you want to retrieve from. 6. Define the data you want to retrieve by pressing the appropriate softkey. To erase information from a CF card 1. Insert the appropriate card. 2. Press the DATA button. 3. Press the ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER softkey. 4. Press the ERASE FROM CARD softkey. 5. Select the list you want to remove data from. 6. Define the data to be deleted. 7. Press YES to confirm 19.4 Sending and receiving data from a personal computer You can transfer and retrieve waypoints or routes to and from another instrument or PC using NMEA or SeaTalkhs. With a RayTech 6.0s planner you can transfer waypoints and routes via a CF memory card. Such transfers require that the PC be connected to the displays NMEA port via a serial data cable. Ray-
Tech 6.0 will transfer waypoints and routes via SeaTalkhs. To transfer or receive information from a personal computer 1. Press the DATA button. 2. Press the ARCHIVE AND TRANSFER softkey. 3. Press TRANSFER ON NMEA. 4. Press the softkey that corresponds to the transfer you want to perform. To stop the transfer at any point, press STOP TRANSFER. 199 Chapter 19: CompactFlash Cards and Managing 19.5 Password protecting your All other options including GOTO CURSOR are unaffected. waypoints If required, you can use password protection to control access to your waypoint and route databases. Once you have set up a pass-
word, it must be entered to access the Password Setup sub-menu, regardless of the whether Password Protection is set to ON or OFF. Password confirmation When Password Protection is enabled and you attempt to access a password-protected function for the first time during a power-cycle, the system asks for the password for the following functions:
Access WPTS key functions. This does not affect the operation of the MOB function. Access ROUTES soft key functions. Create a route from a track. All other track functions are unaffected. Archive or transfer any waypoints. Enter the Waypoint Password Setup menu. Disabled data/functions When Password Protection is ON and you have not entered a password you cannot:
View details of waypoint and route databases. Edit waypoints or routes. Goto an existing waypoint. Follow a route. View waypoints on screen (even when the SHOW/HIDE status is set to SHOW). View waypoint names on screen (even when WAYPOINT NAME is set to ON). To set up a password 1. Open the system Setup menu. 2. Select System Setup. 3. Select Waypoint Password Setup. 4. Select Enable Password: ON. 5. Press OK. 6. Read and accept the warning. 7. Enter the password and confirm it. 8. If wanted, enter the password hint. Note: The password is case sensitive. The password is now set and protection enabled although access to the waypoint and route functions remains available until you restart your system. To change the password 1. Select Change Password on the Waypoint Password Setup menu. Enabling and disabling password protection Once you have set up a password on your system (see previous section) you need to key in this password whenever you want to change the status of the password protection feature. To enable or disable password protection 1. Open the system Setup menu. 2. Select System Setup. 3. Select Waypoint Password Setup. 4. Enter your password. Remember it is case-sensitive. 5. Select Enable Password: OFF. 6. Press OK. If you enter an invalid password more than twice within one power cycle the system displays the password hint. G-Series Reference Manual 200 There is no limit to the number of attempts to enter a valid pass-
word but if you forget your password, you need to perform a Settings and Data Reset (see page 205) which will erase all way-
points in the units memory. Raymarine strongly recommends that you regularly save your way-
points, routes and tracks to a CF memory card. 201 Chapter 19: CompactFlash Cards and Managing G-Series Reference Manual 202 Chapter 20: Maintenance and Troubleshooting This chapter provides information on maintaining and troubleshooting the G-Series system, and information about getting assistance from Raymarine. 20 Chapter contents 20.1 Maintenance procedures on page 204 20.2 Resetting the monitor on page 204 20.3 Troubleshooting on page 205 20.4 Getting technical support on page 209 20.5 Navionics contact details on page 210 20.6 Sirius contact details on page 210 20.1 Maintenance procedures Routine checks At regular intervals, carry out the following servicing procedures:
Carry out the following tasks on a regular basis:
Routine checks. Cleaning the Display. Do not attempt any other servicing procedures. Servicing and Safety Raymarine equipment should be serviced only by authorized Raymarine service technicians. They will ensure that service procedures and any replacement parts used will not affect performance. There are no user serviceable parts in any Raymarine product. Some products generate high voltages, so never handle the cables or connectors when power is being supplied to the equipment. Examine all cables for signs of damage, such as chafing, cuts or nicks. Check that all cables are securely connected. Cleaning the display Please read these instructions carefully. Failure to follow the correct cleaning procedure may damage your display window and invalidate your warranty. Window coating A coating is applied to the plastic window of your display. This makes it water repellent and prevents glare. To avoid damaging this coating, the recommended cleaning procedure must be followed. When powered on, all electrical equipment produces electro-
Recommended cleaning procedure magnetic fields. These can cause adjacent pieces of electrical equipment to interact with one another, with a consequent adverse effect on operation. In order to minimize these effects and enable you to get the best possible performance from your Raymarine equipment, guidelines are given in the installations manual, to enable you to ensure minimum interaction between different items of equipment, i.e. ensure optimum Electromag-
netic Compatibility (EMC). Always report any EMC-related problem to your nearest Raymarine dealer. We use such information to improve our quality standards. In some installations, it may not be possible to prevent the equipment from being affected by external influences. Gener-
ally this will not damage the display, but it can lead to spurious re-setting action, or momentarily may result in faulty operation. At the end of the useful working life of this product, it should disposed of in accordance with local regulations. 1. Power off the Display. 2. Rinse the window with fresh water, to remove all dirty particles and salt deposits. 3. Allow the window to dry naturally. Do not use any abrasive materials including a dry cloth. Do not use any cleaning solutions, polishes or sprays. Do not use a jet wash. 3 0 2 9 D 4. If any smears remain, very gently wipe the window with a clean microfiber cleaning cloth (provided with the Display or available from opticians). 20.2 Resetting the monitor You can reset the G-Series system in one of two ways:
G-Series Reference Manual 204 Settings reset. Settings and data reset. After applying either of these, the system resets and returns you to the power-on procedure. Settings reset When you apply a settings reset, all system set-up menus, page sets and the data bar are reset to the factory default. Your way-
points, routes and tracks are NOT removed. Settings and data reset When you apply a settings and data reset, all the system settings return to their default values and waypoint, route and track data are deleted. If, after using this section, you still have problems with your system, contact your local dealer, national distributor or Raymarine Techni-
cal Services Department for further advice. Always quote the product serial numbers which are printed on the back of the unit. This section is divided into problems associated with:
Installation and display. Chart application. Fishfinder application. Radar application. Weather receiver. To apply a settings reset 1. Open the system Setup menu. 2. Select System Setup. 3. Select Settings Reset. 4. Press the YES softkey to confirm. To apply a settings and data reset 1. Open the system Setup menu. 2. Select System Setup. 3. Select Settings and Data Reset. 4. Press the YES softkey to confirm. 20.3 Troubleshooting All Raymarine products are subjected to comprehensive test and quality assurance programs before packing and shipping. However, if your system should develop a fault, this section will help you iden-
tify the most likely cause and suggest corrective action. 205 Chapter 20: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Installation and display Problem Solution System does not power up Check power supply cable is sound and that all connections are tight and free from corrosion. Check relevant fuses. Problem Solution No fix displayed against GPS status icon Check GPS status (see page 190). Check the GPS antenna has a clear view of the sky. Check connections/operation of the GPS antenna. No instrument, navigational or engine data displayed Check power source is of the correct voltage and sufficient Check instruments/engine interface are operating correctly. Check SeaTalk/NMEA correctly connected to Display (see System Integration chapter of the Installation Guide). Check all SeaTalk/NMEA cables are free from damage and corrosion. current. System switches off Check power input connection is secure at the rear of the Display(s). Check power cable for damage or corrosion. Check your boats power supply for faulty connections or insufficient cable diameter. How do I upgrade software?
Visit www.raymarine.com and click on Support to download the latest software. Follow the instructions included with these downloads. How do I reset my system?
Use the system setup menu. For details see page 205. Display very dull/hard to view Check PALETTE set to DAY (see page 32). No databar or compass databar displayed Set the databar or compass bar to ON (see page 188) G-Series Reference Manual 206 Chart Problem Solution Vessel not shown in correct geographical position Check GPS status (page 190). Check that the Display is not in Simulator mode (see page 29). Check the SDGPS setting is switched OFF. Perform the chart offset operation (see page 47). Display does not show enough chart detail Set the Declutter option to OFF (see page 68). In the Cartography Setup Menu switch the appropriate feature(s) to ON. Fishfinder Problem Solution How do I upgrade my DSM software?
Visit www.raymarine.com and click on Support to download the latest software. Follow the instructions included with these downloads. Problem Solution No data source for my fishfinder Check the DSM power cable is free from damage and corrosion. Check DSM is receiving the correct voltage and current. Check status LED of the DSM unit - refer to Maintenance and problem solving section of the DSM owners handbook. Check the DSMs SeaTalk High Speed connections are sound and connected correctly - refer to the System Integra-
tion chapter of your E-Series Installation Guide. No depth readings available from the DSM Check status LED of DSM unit - refer to the Maintenance and Problem solving section of your DSM Owners manual Check Gain setup and Transducer frequency - refer to the Fishfinder chapter in your Reference Manual. Check the DSM power cable is free from damage and corrosion 207 Chapter 20: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Radar Problem Solution No data message Weather receiver No connection Check that the cable connecting to the weather receiver is securely connected and undamaged. Check that cable connecting the scanner to the GPM is Display not showing weather data Check the weather graphics are switched on in the weather graphics menu (see page 113). securely connected and undamaged. Scanner software incompatible message Check software revisions by contacting your local Raymarine dealer. Invalid scanner software: Version xx.x, Version xx.x required Incorrect software version installed. Contact your local Raymarine dealer. Scanner not responding message Check that the cable connecting the scanner to the radar display unit is securely connected and undamaged. Scanner hardware fault Scanner not functioning. The bearing displayed on the radar picture is not the same as the actual bearing Perform the bearing alignment procedures described in the Installation Guide. G-Series Reference Manual 208 20.4 Getting technical support Contacting Raymarine in the US This section details how you can obtain technical support for your G-Series system or for your Navionics cartography. Raymarine provides a comprehensive customer support service, on the world wide web, through our worldwide dealer network and by telephone help line. If you are unable to resolve a problem, please use any of these facilities to obtain additional help. If you need to request service, please quote the following product information:
Product name. Product identity. Serial number. Software application version. To see your product information 1. Open the system Setup menu. 2. Select System Diagnostics. 3. Select Software Services. 4. Select the Software Services menu:
Web There is a Customer Support area on our website at:
www.raymarine.com This contains Frequently Asked Questions, servicing information, e-mail access to the Raymarine Technical Support Department and details of worldwide Raymarine agents. If you dont have access to the web, contact Technical Support where specialists are available to answer questions about install-
ing, operating and trouble-shooting all Raymarine products. You can contact Raymarine in the US either using the website as detailed above or by calling one of the telephone numbers below. For accessories and parts Contact your authorized Raymarine dealer or Raymarine Technical Services on:
1-603-881-5200 extension 8665 Opening hours: Monday through Friday 0815 - 1700, Eastern Stan-
dard or Eastern Daylight Savings Time. For product repair and service If your Raymarine product should develop a problem, contact your authorized Raymarine dealer for assistance. The dealer is best equipped to handle your service requirements and can offer time-
saving help in getting your equipment back into normal operation. If repairs cannot be obtained conveniently, product service can be obtained by returning the unit to:
Raymarine Inc. 21 Manchester Street Merrimack, NH, 03054 - 4801 US The Product Repair Centre is open Monday to Friday 0815 to 1700 Eastern Standard Time or Eastern Daylight Savings Time. All products returned to the Repair Centre are registered upon receipt and a confirmation letter is sent to acknowledge the repair status and the reference number of the product. We will make every effort to carry out the repair and return your unit as quickly as possible. If you wish to enquire about the repair status of your unit, contact the Repair Centre on:
1-603-881-5200 209 Chapter 20: Maintenance and Troubleshooting Navionics customer support Navionics Australia 134/85 Reynolds Street Balmain NSW 2041 Australia Navionics UK PO Box 38 Plymouth, PL9 8YY England Tel: +61-2-9555-2522 Fax: +61-2-9555-2900 sales@navionics.com.au Tel: +44-1752-204735 Fax: +44-1752-204736 sales@navionics.co.uk If you wish to file a report of an error or omission on a Navionics chart, please provide the information to Navionics web site, Dis-
crepancy Report section at the link below:
http://www.navionics.com/DiscrepancyReports.asp 20.6 Sirius contact details For questions about the Sirius marine weather service, contact:
www.sirius.com/marineweather 1-800-869-5480 For questions about the Sirius audio, contact:
www.sirius.com 1-888-539-SIRIUS Contacting Raymarine in Europe You can contact Raymarine in Europe either using the Raymarine website as detailed above or by calling the telephone number below. For technical support, service and accessories Contact your authorized Raymarine dealer or Raymarine Technical Support at:
Quay Point Portsmouth P03 5TD England Tel: +44(0)23 92714713 Fax: +44(0)23 92661228 20.5 Navionics contact details For questions about Navionics cartography, contact Navionics directly through their website:
www.navionics.com or contact Navionics customer support:
Navionics customer support Navionics Italy Via Fondacci, 269 Z.I. Montramito 55054 Massarosa Italy Tel: +39-0584-329111 Fax: +39-0584-962696 sales@navionics.it Navionics USA 6 Thatcher Lane Wareham MA 02571 USA Toll Free: 800-848-5896 Tel: 508-291-6000 Fax: 508-291-6006 sales@navionics.com G-Series Reference Manual 210 Chapter 21: Shortcuts The G-Series system software contains shortcuts for some frequently-used functions. These are usually accessed by pressing and holding the appropriate keyboard button or softkey, but some are reached by pressing the rotary controller. 21 They are summarized in this chapter. Chapter contents 21.1 System shortcuts on page 212 Rotary controller shortcuts Press the rotary controller in until it clicks once. Application Action Radar 3D chart Video Toggle between ADJUST VRM and ADJUST EBL when adjusting VRM Cycle through adjustment softkeys when adjusting guard zones. Toggle between ADJUST ROTATE and ADJUST PITCH. Open Video Source selection list. 21.1 System shortcuts Hardkey shortcuts Press and hold. Hardkey Action PAGE ACTIVE WPTS/MOB DATA Open Select Page Set screen. Set active window to full screen. Press once to place a waypoint when waypoints toolbar is open. Press and hold to activate man overboard. Hold until system beeps to save current screen to CF card. Softkey shortcuts Press and hold. Toolbar Softkey Action Data CHART VECTORS Open Chart Setup Menu. DATABAR ON/OFF/COMP Open Databar Setup menu. Fishfinder PRESET ADJUST PRESET Open Configure Preset Frequencies menu. Video VIDEO 1/2/3/4 Open Video Setup Menu Data and Engine Monitor PANEL 1/2/3/4/5 Open Panel Configuration screen G-Series Reference Manual 212 213 Chapter 21: Shortcuts G-Series Reference Manual 214 215 Chapter 21: Shortcuts G-Series Reference Manual 216 Chapter 22: Disclaimers and Licenses Chapter contents 22.1 Sirius Weather on page 218 22.2 Navionics license agreement on page 219 22 22.1 Sirius Weather ADVISORY NATURE OF SERVICE; SUBSCRIBERS RESPONSIBILITY Subscriber ('Subscriber') acknowledges and agrees that the data service (the 'Service') is advisory in nature and all actions and judg-
ments taken with respect to the Service are Subscribers sole responsibility. Neither WSI Corporation ('WSI') nor Sirius Satellite Radio Inc. ('Sirius') makes any representations or warranties with respect to the reliability, predictive value or accuracy of the informa-
tion contained within the Service, and neither WSI nor Sirius shall be responsible for inaccurate, omitted, delayed, or erroneous infor-
mation. Subscriber further acknowledges and agrees that the Service may be interrupted due to adverse weather or other condi-
tions and that neither WSI nor Sirius shall have any liability for such interruptions. Subscriber is urged to verify the contents of the Ser-
vice against other sources prior to use. Subscriber acknowledges and agrees that under no circumstances should the user of this Service make decisions based solely or primarily on weather infor-
mation contained within the Service. In addition, it is Subscribers responsibility to exercise discretion and observe all safety mea-
sures required by law and his or her own common sense. Neither WSI nor Sirius assumes any responsibility for accidents resulting from or associated with use and/or misuse of the Service. ELIGIBILITY; USE LIMITATIONS Subscriber must be at least 18 years old to assume the obligations set forth in these terms. Minors may use the Service only if a parent or legal guardian assumes the obligations set forth in these Terms and thereby assumes full responsibility for the minors use of the Service. Sirius provides the Service only for your personal, non-
commercial enjoyment. Subscriber may not make commercial use of, reproduce, rebroadcast, redistribute or otherwise transmit the Service, or record, charge admission for utilizing or distribute infor-
mation from the Service. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY; INDEMNIFICATION; WARRANTY DISCLAIMER A. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING CONTAINED HEREIN, OR THE FORUM IN WHICH ANY LEGAL OR EQUITABLE ACTION MAY BE BROUGHT BY SUBSCRIBER AGAINST WSI AND/OR SIRIUS, SUBSCRIBER AGREES THAT EACH OF WSIS AND SIRIUS LIABILITY, IF ANY, TO THE SUBSCRIBER FOR ANY LOSS, DAMAGE, CLAIM, LIABILITY OR EXPENSE, OF ANY KIND CAUSED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY BY THE PERFOR-
MANCE OR NONPERFORMANCE OF OBLIGATIONS PURSUANT TO THIS AGREEMENT OR BY THE NEGLIGENCE, ACTIVE OR PASSIVE, OF WSI AND/OR SIRIUS SHALL BE EXCLUSIVELY LIMITED TO GENERAL MONEY DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO EXCEED THE PRICE PAID BY THE SUB-
SCRIBER TO SIRIUS HEREUNDER FOR THE MOST RECENT SIX MONTHS OF SERVICE. IN NO EVENT SHALL WSI AND/OR SIRIUS BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OR LOST PROFITS OR DAMAGES FROM LOSS OF USE OR DATA
(DESPITE THE FACT THAT THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAM-
AGES ARE OR MAY BE KNOWN TO WSI AND/OR SIRIUS), WHETHER ARISING OUT OF BREACH OF AGREEMENT, TORT OR ANY OTHER CAUSE OF ACTION RELATING TO THE PER-
FORMANCE OR NON-PERFORMANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT. THIS ALLOCATION OF RISK AND THE DISCLAIMER OF WAR-
RANTIES IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE REFLECTED IN SIRIUS SERVICE PRICES AND ARE A FUNDAMENTAL ELEMENT OF SIRIUS AGREEMENT TO PROVIDE THE SERVICE TO SUB-
SCRIBER. SUBSCRIBER MAY HAVE GREATER RIGHTS THAN DESCRIBED ABOVE UNDER HIS OR HER STATES LAWS. B. EXCEPT FOR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT ON THE PART OF WSI AND/OR SIRIUS, SUBSCRIBER SHALL DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS WSI AND SIRIUS FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL LOSSES, CLAIMS, DEMANDS, EXPENSES
(INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS FEES AND G-Series Reference Manual 218 EXPENSES) OR LIABILITIES OF WHATEVER NATURE OR KIND ASSERTED BY, SUFFERED OR INCURRED BY THIRD PARTIES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THE SERVICE. C. NEITHER WSI NOR SIRIUS MAKES ANY WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO THE SERVICE AND, THE SERVICE IS PROVIDED ON AN 'AS IS' AND AN 'AS AVAILABLE' BASIS. NEITHER WSI NOR SIRIUS MAKES ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED REPRESEN-
TATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICU-
LAR PURPOSE, INTENDED USE OR MERCHANTABILITY
(WHICH ARE ALL HEREBY DISCLAIMED). NEITHER WSI NOR SIRIUS ASSUMES ANY RESPONSIBILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE USE BY OF THE SERVICE BY A PARTY. 22.2 Navionics license agreement IMPORTANT: READ THIS AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THE ELECTRONIC CHARTS EMBEDDED IN THIS PRODUCT. THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND NAVION-
ICS S.P.A. (NAVIONICS). BY USING THE ELECTRONIC CHARTS, YOU ARE CONSENTING TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS, DO NOT USE THE ELECTRONIC CHARTS. DEFINITIONS: As used in this Agreement, Data means the infor-
mation contained in the hard drive of the system accompanied by this Agreement; and Related Materials means all of the printed materials and whatever is in this package. USES PERMITTED: Data may be used on your GPS as an elec-
tronic chart/map and as aid to navigation. This Agreement gives you certain limited rights to use and maintain the Data. You agree to use reasonable efforts to protect the Data from unauthorized use, reproduction, distribution or publication. Navionics reserves all rights not specifically granted in this Agreement. USES NOT PERMITTED: YOU MAY NOT (1) make copies of the Data; (2) alter, recompile, disassemble or reverse-engineer the Data, or make any attempt to unlock or bypass the initialization sys-
tem or encryption techniques utilized; or (3) remove or obscure the Navionics copyright and trademark notices. DURATION: This Agreement is effective from the day electronic charts are first used and continues until terminated. Termination is automatic, without notice from Navionics, if you fail to comply with any provision of this Agreement. Upon termination, you must delete and destroy the Data and Related Materials. Navionics explicitly reserves the right to enforce any other legal rights arising from termination. WARRANTY: You purchased the Data and Related Materials together with, or pre-loaded on, a RaymarineTM device or storage media. Your warranty with respect to the Data and Related Materi-
als is provided by Raymarine PLC or its affiliate and is set forth in the written materials that accompanied such device or storage media. DISCLAIMER: EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTIES DESCRIBED ABOVE, THE DATA AND THE RELATED MATERIALS ARE LICENSED AS IS, AND NAVIONICS DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRAN-
TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO PERFORMANCE AND RESULTS OF THE DATA. NAVIONICSS CUMULATIVE LIABILITY TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PARTY FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS, DEMANDS, OR ACTIONS ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE LICENSE TO USE THE DATA. IN NO EVENT SHALL NAVIONICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OR LOST PROFITS, EVEN IF NAVION-
ICS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH 219 Chapter 22: Disclaimers and Licenses DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMI-
TATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE FOREGOING LIMITA-
TION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. ACKNOWLEDGMENT: You acknowledge that you have read this warranty provision, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and conditions. You also agree that: (1) no oral or written information or advice given by Navionics, its dealers, distributors, agents or employees shall in any way increase the scope of this warranty, and you may not rely on any such information or advice;
and (2) this warranty provision is the complete and exclusive state-
ment of agreement regarding warranty by Navionics and supersedes all proposals or prior agreements, oral or written, and any other communications you may have had prior to purchasing. G-Series Reference Manual 220 Raymarine plc Anchorage Park, Portsmouth, Hampshire, PO3 5TD, UK Tel: +44 (0) 23 9269 3611 Fax: +44 (0) 23 9269 4642 www.raymarine.com Raymarine Inc. 21 Manchester Street, Merrimack, New Hampshire 030
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2008-02-05 | 2400 ~ 2483.5 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Effective |
2008-02-05
|
||||
| 1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Flir Belgium BVBA
|
||||
| 1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0025017989
|
||||
| 1 | Physical Address |
Raymarine UK Ltd, Marine House, Cartwright Drive
|
||||
| 1 |
Fareham, Hampshire, N/A PO15 5RJ
|
|||||
| 1 |
United Kingdom
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| 1 | TCB Application Email Address |
V******@babt.com
|
||||
| 1 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 | Grantee Code |
PJ5
|
||||
| 1 | Equipment Product Code |
CCTR
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 | Name |
A**** G******** L********
|
||||
| 1 | Title |
Compliance Manager
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
+4413********
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
+44(0********
|
||||
| 1 |
a******@raymarine.com
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
| 1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
| 1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Low-power (unlicensed) wireless device for leisure | ||||
| 1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
| 1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
| 1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 | Grant Comments | This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any antenna or transmitter not described under this FCC id. | ||||
| 1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| 1 | Firm Name |
Raymarine UK Limited
|
||||
| 1 | Name |
A****** L****
|
||||
| 1 | Telephone Number |
44013******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 | Fax Number |
44013********
|
||||
| 1 |
A******@raymarine.com
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 15C | 2400.00000000 | 2483.50000000 | 0.0030000 | 2M64M2D | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC